Molecular figures

Every figure in one place, to review before it goes into a topic. Each one is drawn from facts with textbook sources, and a mechanism steps through its true states.

Escherichia coli

3D model

Escherichia coli

E. coli, a rod-shaped prokaryote, shown twice: as a model of the whole cell, which you can turn, and in a longitudinal section, a slice along its length. Its envelope has three layers: the outer membrane, a thin cell wall, and the plasma membrane. Inside, with no nucleus, a tangle of DNA, the nucleoid, fills the middle of the cytoplasm, with small rings of DNA, plasmids, and many ribosomes round it. Outside, short fimbriae cover the cell, and long wavy flagella rise all over it, each turned by a motor in the envelope, and stream back from it. Arrow keys turn it, plus and minus zoom, and Home brings back the first view.

Longitudinal section

E. coli, a rod-shaped prokaryote, shown twice: as a model of the whole cell, which you can turn, and in a longitudinal section, a slice along its length. Its envelope has three layers: the outer membrane, a thin cell wall, and the plasma membrane. Inside, with no nucleus, a tangle of DNA, the nucleoid, fills the middle of the cytoplasm, with small rings of DNA, plasmids, and many ribosomes round it. Outside, short fimbriae cover the cell, and long wavy flagella rise all over it, each turned by a motor in the envelope, and stream back from it.

Drag to turn it, pinch or scroll to zoom, and tap a part to read what it does.

E. coli, a prokaryote about 2 µm long, has no nucleus and no membrane-bound organelles: its one circular chromosome lies in the nucleoid, a region of the cytoplasm with no membrane round it. Its envelope is the plasma membrane, a thin wall of peptidoglycan and, outside that, the outer membrane of a gram-negative bacterium. Flagella, turned by motors in the envelope, drive it along, and fimbriae let it stick to surfaces and cells.

Simplified: not to scale: the envelope drawn thicker, and the flagella and fimbriae shorter than they are; the chromosome far shorter than it is: stretched out, it would be about 1.1 mm long, over 500 times the cell’s length; far fewer ribosomes than a real cell has; the flagella drawn apart, though while it swims they turn together in one bundle; in the model, the fimbriae shown only round its outline, where they stand out from it; the wall in carbohydrate’s colour, though its cross-links are peptides; the outer membrane drawn like the plasma membrane, though its outer layer holds lipopolysaccharide; ribosomes in RNA’s colour, though they are part protein.

10 sources
  1. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 4.2 Prokaryotic Cells.
  2. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 4.3 Eukaryotic Cells.
  3. Parker N, Schneegurt M, Thi Tu AH, et al. Microbiology. OpenStax; 2016. 3.3 Unique Characteristics of Prokaryotic Cells.
  4. Parker N, Schneegurt M, Thi Tu AH, et al. Microbiology. OpenStax; 2016. 3.4 Unique Characteristics of Eukaryotic Cells.
  5. Parker N, Schneegurt M, Thi Tu AH, et al. Microbiology. OpenStax; 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of Antibacterial Drugs.
  6. Parker N, Schneegurt M, Thi Tu AH, et al. Microbiology. OpenStax; 2016. 9.2 Oxygen Requirements for Microbial Growth.
  7. Parker N, Schneegurt M, Thi Tu AH, et al. Microbiology. OpenStax; 2016. 15.2 How Pathogens Cause Disease.
  8. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 7.4 Oxidative Phosphorylation.
  9. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 14.2 DNA Structure and Sequencing.
  10. Escherichia coli. Wikipedia, citing Encyclopaedia Britannica and Kubitschek HE, J Bacteriol 1990.
An animal cell

3D model

An animal cell

An animal cell, a eukaryote, shown twice: as a model of the whole cell, which you can turn, and in cross-section, as a slice through its middle. Its plasma membrane encloses the cytoplasm. The nucleus, inside a double envelope crossed by pores, holds the chromatin and a dense nucleolus. Beside it the rough endoplasmic reticulum lies in sheets studded with ribosomes, joined to the tubes of the smooth ER. The Golgi apparatus is a stack of curved sacs with vesicles round it, some carrying their load to the plasma membrane. Mitochondria show their folded inner membrane; lysosomes, peroxisomes and free ribosomes are scattered through the cytoplasm; and microtubules spread from the centrosome, with its two centrioles, by the nucleus. Arrow keys turn it, plus and minus zoom, and Home brings back the first view.

Cross-section

An animal cell, a eukaryote, shown twice: as a model of the whole cell, which you can turn, and in cross-section, as a slice through its middle. Its plasma membrane encloses the cytoplasm. The nucleus, inside a double envelope crossed by pores, holds the chromatin and a dense nucleolus. Beside it the rough endoplasmic reticulum lies in sheets studded with ribosomes, joined to the tubes of the smooth ER. The Golgi apparatus is a stack of curved sacs with vesicles round it, some carrying their load to the plasma membrane. Mitochondria show their folded inner membrane; lysosomes, peroxisomes and free ribosomes are scattered through the cytoplasm; and microtubules spread from the centrosome, with its two centrioles, by the nucleus.

Drag to turn it, pinch or scroll to zoom, and tap a part to read what it does.

A eukaryotic cell, 10 to 100 µm across, keeps most of its DNA in a nucleus and shares its work among compartments bounded by membranes. Proteins for membranes and for export are made on the rough ER, modified in the Golgi apparatus and shipped in vesicles; mitochondria make most of the ATP, lysosomes digest, and microtubules hold the organelles in place and are the tracks they are carried along. Turn the model to see the cell whole; the cross-section shows what a slice through its middle cuts.

Simplified: not to scale: fewer, larger organelles than a real cell has, and fewer, far larger ribosomes; each organelle in a colour of its own, as textbooks paint them, though all their membranes are lipid; the nucleolus in DNA’s colour, though it holds RNA and protein too; in the cross-section, the rough ER and the Golgi show only the sacs the slice cuts, while the smooth ER and the microtubules are drawn whole; in the model, the nuclear envelope drawn as one layer, the chromatin only as the dense patches lining it, though it fills the nucleus, and the rough ER as a few nested sheets joined by short necks; of the cytoskeleton, only microtubules drawn; ribosomes in RNA’s colour, though they are part protein.

13 sources
  1. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology, An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson; 2019. 3.3 Intracellular Compartments, 5.5 Vesicular Transport, and 22.4 Fed-State Metabolism.
  2. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 4.2 Prokaryotic Cells.
  3. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 4.3 Eukaryotic Cells.
  4. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 4.4 The Endomembrane System and Proteins.
  5. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 7.4 Oxidative Phosphorylation.
  6. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 9.1 Signaling Molecules and Cellular Receptors.
  7. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 10.2 The Cell Cycle.
  8. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 23.1 Eukaryotic Origins.
  9. Parker N, Schneegurt M, Thi Tu AH, et al. Microbiology. OpenStax; 2016. 3.4 Unique Characteristics of Eukaryotic Cells.
  10. Parker N, Schneegurt M, Thi Tu AH, et al. Microbiology. OpenStax; 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of Antibacterial Drugs.
  11. Betts JG, Young KA, Wise JA, et al. Anatomy and Physiology 2e. OpenStax; 2022. 3.2 The Cytoplasm and Cellular Organelles.
  12. Centrioles 2A. Digital Histology, an open educational resource.
  13. Tay-Sachs disease. MedlinePlus Genetics. National Library of Medicine (US).
The hypothalamic–pituitary axes
A map of the hormones of the hypothalamus and the anterior pituitary. On the left, the hypothalamus, with the pituitary hanging from it on its stalk: the posterior pituitary behind, made of neural tissue, and the anterior pituitary in front, made of glandular tissue. Across the top, each hypothalamic hormone controls the release of an anterior pituitary hormone below it: dopamine inhibits prolactin, TRH stimulates TSH, CRH stimulates ACTH, GHRH stimulates and somatostatin inhibits growth hormone, and GnRH stimulates FSH and LH, the gonadotropins. Prolactin acts on the breast. TSH acts on the thyroid gland, which secretes the thyroid hormones T₃ and T₄; ACTH on the adrenal cortex, which secretes cortisol; growth hormone on the liver, which secretes IGFs, and on many tissues directly; the gonadotropins on the testis, which secretes androgens, on the ovary, which secretes estrogens and progesterone, and on the germ cells. Thyroid hormones, cortisol, IGFs and the gonads’ hormones act on many tissues, and the gonads’ hormones on the germ cells too. The endocrine targets are the thyroid gland, the adrenal cortex, the liver, the testis and the ovary; the nonendocrine ones are the breast, many tissues and the germ cells.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

The hypothalamus steers the anterior pituitary with releasing and inhibiting hormones, carried from its neurons straight to the gland by a portal system of small vessels. Between hypothalamic and pituitary hormones, an arrow stimulates release and a dashed line ending in a bar inhibits it: dopamine holds back prolactin, and somatostatin growth hormone. Further down, an arrow leads to what a hormone acts on or an organ secretes. Prolactin’s primary target, the breast, is not an endocrine gland, while the other five are trophic hormones, each making an endocrine gland or tissue release a hormone of its own. Growth hormone also acts directly on many tissues, and the gonadotropins also act on the germ cells.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: each organ an icon, none to scale; only each hormone’s primary targets; the feedback loops, the portal vessels and the posterior pituitary’s hormones (oxytocin, vasopressin) left out; germ cells drawn as an egg and a sperm; in the testis, FSH and testosterone act on the germ cells through the Sertoli cells.

2 sources
  1. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology: An Integrated Approach, 8th ed. Pearson; 2019. Chapter 7, Introduction to the Endocrine System: The Pituitary Gland, pp. 207–212, Figs. 7.8, 7.9 and 7.11; Chapter 26, Reproduction and Development, p. 814.
  2. Betts JG, Young KA, Wise JA, et al. Anatomy and Physiology 2e. OpenStax; 2022. 17.3 The Pituitary Gland and Hypothalamus.
The plasma membrane
A piece of the plasma membrane cut straight across and seen a little from above, so its outer surface, packed with phospholipid heads, shows behind the cut. In the cut, two layers of phospholipids face each other, heads outward and fatty acid tails meeting in the middle, with cholesterol among the phospholipids of each layer. Two transmembrane proteins, one with a narrow pore through it, and a glycoprotein cross the bilayer, and sugar chains rise from the glycoprotein and from two glycolipids into the extracellular fluid above. Below, in the intracellular fluid, a lipid-anchored protein is held to the inner layer by a lipid tail, and a peripheral protein bound to a transmembrane protein holds a cytoskeleton filament.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The plasma membrane, about 8 nm thick, separates the intracellular from the extracellular fluid. In the fluid mosaic model, a bilayer of phospholipids, hydrophilic heads facing the water and hydrophobic tails inside, forms the barrier, and cholesterol among the phospholipids keeps it flexible over a wide range of temperatures. Transmembrane and lipid-anchored proteins are tightly bound to the membrane; peripheral proteins sit loosely on either face, on other proteins or on phospholipids, and some anchor the cytoskeleton. Sugars on glycoproteins and glycolipids lie on the outer surface only and help cells recognize each other.

Simplified: not to scale: the cytoskeleton filament drawn far thinner than it is; each phospholipid a ball with two tails, each protein a smooth shape; one or two of each kind of protein, where a membrane holds many; sphingolipids drawn as phospholipids or glycolipids, not told apart.

3 sources
  1. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology: An Integrated Approach, 8th ed. Pearson; 2019. Chapter 3, Compartmentation: Cells and Tissues: 3.2 Biological Membranes, pp. 61–64 and Fig. 3.2; 3.3 Intracellular Compartments, p. 68 and Table 3.2.
  2. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 5.1 Components and Structure.
  3. Betts JG, Young KA, Wise JA, et al. Anatomy and Physiology 2e. OpenStax; 2022. 3.1 The Cell Membrane.
The mitochondrion
A mitochondrion cut along its length and seen a little from above, so the smooth top of its outer membrane shows behind the cut. Inside, across a narrow intermembrane space, the inner membrane folds into cristae from both sides and encloses the matrix. ATP synthases stand on the cristae, facing the matrix, and the matrix holds circles of mitochondrial DNA and mitochondrial ribosomes.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A mitochondrion, about 0.5 to 1 µm across, has two membranes. The outer one lets small molecules through. The inner one folds into cristae and carries the electron transport chain and ATP synthase, which make most of the cell’s ATP. The matrix holds the enzymes of the citric acid cycle and of fatty acid oxidation, and the mitochondrion’s own ribosomes and DNA: a circle of 37 genes, 13 of them for proteins of the electron transport chain and ATP synthase, inherited from the mother.

Simplified: not to scale: ATP synthase and the ribosomes are drawn far larger; one smooth bean cut lengthwise, though mitochondria change shape, fuse and divide; the cristae as simple folds; a few ATP synthases, ribosomes and DNA circles, and none of the electron transport chain; ribosomes in RNA’s colour, though they are part protein.

4 sources
  1. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th ed. Garland Science; 2002. The Mitochondrion.
  2. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th ed. Garland Science; 2002. The Genetic Systems of Mitochondria and Plastids.
  3. MedlinePlus Genetics. Mitochondrial DNA. National Library of Medicine.
  4. Clark MA, Douglas M, Choi J. Biology 2e. OpenStax; 2018. 4.3 Eukaryotic Cells.
The sodium–potassium pump
The Na⁺/K⁺-ATPase in section across the plasma membrane, the outside of the cell above and the cytosol below, drawn from cryo-EM structures of the human pump. The α subunit’s ten helices cross the membrane, drawn as two bundles with the ion sites between them; below the membrane hang its A, P and N domains, with ATP bound between N and P. The β subunit crosses the membrane beside α, and its glycosylated domain sits over α outside the cell. Step 1 of 7: Open to the cytosol (E1). ATP is bound to the N domain and the ion sites face the cytosol. Cytosolic Na⁺ is low, about 10 mM against about 140 mM outside, but in E1 the sites have a high affinity for Na⁺, far higher than once they face outside.Na⁺Na⁺Na⁺K⁺K⁺

Step 1 of 7Open to the cytosol (E1). ATP is bound to the N domain and the ion sites face the cytosol. Cytosolic Na⁺ is low, about 10 mM against about 140 mM outside, but in E1 the sites have a high affinity for Na⁺, far higher than once they face outside.This cycle: 0 of 3 Na⁺ out, 0 of 2 K⁺ in, 0 of 1 ATP used

Point at a name or a part to light it.

For each ATP split, the pump moves 3 Na⁺ out of the cell and 2 K⁺ in, so one net positive charge leaves per cycle. It runs through the Post–Albers cycle: in E1 the sites face the cytosol and bind Na⁺; phosphorylation of an aspartate in the P domain (Asp376 in human α1, Asp369 in the pig numbering of many papers) traps Na⁺ (E1P) and leads to E2P, which opens outward, releases Na⁺ and binds K⁺; K⁺ binding triggers dephosphorylation (E2), and ATP binding returns the pump to E1, which releases K⁺ inside.

Simplified: ions drawn 5× and ATP 2× their true size, everything else at the one scale of the bar; the A, P, N and β outlines traced from cryo-EM structures of the human pump in E1·3Na⁺·ATP (with the analogue ATPγS) and E2·2K⁺, seen from one side; E1·ATP and E1P are drawn as the first and E2P as the second; between E1 and E2, P tilts about 30° in the page and carries N with it; A turns about 100° around an axis close to the membrane’s normal, and N about 40° in all, mostly out of the page, so each of these two is drawn as its outline in E1 fading into its outline in E2; the 10 α helices drawn as two bundles, M1–M4 and M5–M10, that open to one side at a time; the ion sites drawn farther apart, in a roomier pocket than the real one, so the enlarged ions fit; ATP, the phosphate and the ions drawn in front of the protein, passing in front of it where the real ones slip between its parts; each N-glycan drawn as one small generic tree; the real ones vary in size and branching; the regulatory FXYD subunit and β’s short tail in the cytosol left out; the Mg²⁺ that ATP binds with left out.

8 sources
  1. UniProt P05023, AT1A1_HUMAN: topology, Asp376, 3 Na⁺ out and 2 K⁺ in per ATP
  2. UniProt P05026, AT1B1_HUMAN: type II topology, N-glycans at Asn158, Asn193 and Asn265
  3. Guo Y et al. Nat Commun 2022;13:3957. Cryo-EM of human α1β1 with FXYD2 in E1·3Na⁺·ATP (ATPγS), E1·3Na⁺ and E2·[2K⁺] (PDB 7E21, 7E1Z, 7E20)
  4. OPM, Orientations of Proteins in Membranes: 7E21 and 7E20 placed in the bilayer, from which the figure’s outlines and positions are measured
  5. Morth JP et al. Nature 2007;450:1043–9. Crystal structure, PDB 3B8E
  6. Kučerka N et al. Biophys J 2008;95:2356–67. Fluid bilayer dimensions
  7. Shannon RD. Acta Cryst 1976;A32:751–67. Ionic radii
  8. Hall JE, Hall ME. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. Na⁺ and K⁺ inside and outside cells
Enamel in acid, and how fluoride helps
A slice through an enamel crystal seen down its long axis, plaque fluid above and the crystal below. The crystal is hydroxyapatite in rows of channels: in each, a hydroxide ion sits on the axis inside a ring of three calcium ions, with three phosphates and two more calcium ions around them. Through the steps one unit of the crystal dissolves in acid, comes back with fluoride in place of hydroxide as the pH recovers, and holds through the next acid attack while the hydroxyapatite beside it dissolves. Step 1 of 7: Enamel at rest. At pH 7.0 plaque fluid is supersaturated with respect to enamel, so its hydroxyapatite does not dissolve.PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPCa²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻F⁻H⁺H⁺H⁺H⁺H⁺H⁺H⁺H⁺

Step 1 of 7Enamel at rest. At pH 7.0 plaque fluid is supersaturated with respect to enamel, so its hydroxyapatite does not dissolve.Plaque fluid at pH 7.0: above the critical pH of enamel (5.5) and of fluorapatite (about 4.7)

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Enamel dissolves when the fluid around it falls below its critical pH, the pH at which the fluid is just saturated with the mineral: about 5.5, though it moves with the calcium and phosphate in the fluid, up to 6.5 in saliva poor in them and as low as 5.1 in plaque fluid. When the pH recovers the mineral grows back, and with fluoride present it grows back partly as fluorapatite or fluoridated hydroxyapatite, with F⁻ in the plane of its three Ca²⁺ where OH⁻ sat 0.036 nm out of it. That mineral dissolves only below about pH 4.7 (4.5 is also widely quoted). Fluoride built into the crystal, as here, protects only a little, though: most of its effect comes from fluoride dissolved in the fluid around the tooth, which adsorbs to the crystals, slows demineralisation and speeds remineralisation.

Simplified: every ion at its six-coordinate radius, H⁺ at the size of H₃O⁺, its form in water, even once it has bound to an ion, and each phosphate as one ball out to its oxygens’ centres, all at the scale of the bar; a slice half a unit cell deep, seen down the crystal’s long axis and drawn flat; one H⁺ drawn on each phosphate, though at pH 5.0 most dissolved phosphate carries two, as H₂PO₄⁻; pure hydroxyapatite, though enamel is calcium-deficient and about 3% carbonate, which makes it more soluble; one whole formula unit dissolves and re-forms as pure fluorapatite, where a real crystal loses and gains ions one at a time, dissolving first at weak sites such as its core, and in human enamel F⁻ fills under 5% of the OH⁻ sites; in the fluid only the ions that react are drawn, waiting beside the crystal rather than diffusing away; the water each OH⁻ becomes is drawn as the OH⁻ with its H⁺, and the rest of the water and the acids’ anions are left out; the crystal meets plaque fluid directly, though in a white-spot lesion most mineral is lost below a virtually intact surface layer about 0.03 mm thick.

8 sources
  1. Hughes JM, Cameron M, Crowley KD. Am Mineral 1989;74:870–6. Structural variations in natural F, OH and Cl apatites (AMCSD 0001257, 0001259)
  2. Shannon RD. Acta Cryst 1976;A32:751–67. Ionic radii
  3. Chaplin M. Water structure and science: hydrogen ions. H₃O⁺ radius 0.100 nm
  4. Dawes C. J Can Dent Assoc 2003;69:722–4. What is the critical pH and why does a tooth dissolve in acid?
  5. Lussi A, Hellwig E, Klimek J. Schweiz Monatsschr Zahnmed 2012;122:1030–6. Fluorides: mode of action and recommendations for use
  6. Mankar S et al. Clin Cosmet Investig Dent 2024;16:285–93. Clinical evaluation of the effect of nanohydroxyapatite lozenge on the pH of dental plaque: plaque pH after sucrose, saliva’s buffers
  7. Abou Neel EA et al. Int J Nanomedicine 2016;11:4743–63. Demineralization–remineralization dynamics in teeth and bone
  8. Erosive Tooth Wear Foundation. What does fluoride actually do? Critical pH 5.5 and 4.5
The eukaryotic replication fork
A replication fork in section, moving to the right. The parental double helix comes in from the right into the CMG helicase, a ring drawn cut open lengthwise so the two parental strands can be seen parting inside it. Behind CMG, Pol ε copies the leading-strand template, and the new leading strand leaves to the left along the bottom as a double helix, through PCNA. The lagging-strand template leaves CMG past primase, at the front of Pol α–primase, which lies along CMG’s top, and runs left above it; RPA coats it where it is single-stranded. Along it lie Okazaki fragments, each begun by a short RNA primer; PCNA with Pol δ, then FEN1 and DNA ligase I, work on them in turn. Step 1 of 6: CMG unwinds, Pol ε copies. CMG moves 3′ to 5′ along the leading-strand template and pulls the parental strands apart; Pol ε extends the leading strand without a break, and RPA coats the exposed lagging-strand template.3′5′3′5′5′3′

Step 1 of 6CMG unwinds, Pol ε copies. CMG moves 3′ to 5′ along the leading-strand template and pulls the parental strands apart; Pol ε extends the leading strand without a break, and RPA coats the exposed lagging-strand template.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Both new strands grow 5′ to 3′. The leading strand is made continuously, towards the fork; the lagging strand is made away from it, in Okazaki fragments of 100–200 nt, each begun by an RNA primer that is later removed. Each daughter duplex keeps one parental strand: replication is semi-conservative.

Simplified: the fork moves on 84 bp over these steps; in the cell it moves on about a fragment’s length for each Okazaki fragment; the fragment drawn 168 nt long (a whole number of turns), about the 165 nt measured in yeast; proteins without a measured size drawn as lobes the size of the smallest sphere that could hold their mass (real proteins are a little larger); their shapes and the places of their subunits approximate; Pol α’s core, flexible until it takes the primer, drawn in one place beside the complex; CMG, PCNA and ligase I cut open to show the DNA inside them; CMG’s channel drawn to fit the DNA it holds, not measured; both arms drawn straight and in one plane; the leading-strand duplex drawn in line with the parental duplex, where it leaves Pol ε and PCNA at about a right angle to it; the single-stranded template along the arm drawn at the 0.34 nm per nucleotide it has once paired, elsewhere at 0.6 nm; the RNA–DNA primer drawn as B-DNA; the DNA drawn straight where FEN1 bends it by about 100°; the DNA FEN1 holds drawn without its 1-nt 3′ flap; the flap drawn 5 nt long so it can be seen, where most that FEN1 cuts are 1 nt; the DNA drawn as plain B-DNA where ligase I partly unwinds it; ligase I shown replacing Pol δ and FEN1 on PCNA, which can hold more than one of them at once; RFC, topoisomerases, nucleosomes and other replisome proteins left out; the N-terminal regions of POLA1, POLE2 and ligase I left out.

32 sources
  1. Burgers PMJ, Kunkel TA. Eukaryotic DNA replication fork. Annu Rev Biochem 2017;86:417–38. Roles, primer lengths, flaps, nick translation, ligation
  2. UniProt: MCM2–7 (P49736, P25205, P33991, P33992, Q14566, P33993), CDC45 (O75419), GINS1–4 (Q14691, Q9Y248, Q9BRX5, Q9BRT9). Masses
  3. UniProt: POLE, POLE2–4 (Q07864, P56282, Q9NRF9, Q9NR33). Masses, leading strand
  4. UniProt: POLA1, POLA2, PRIM1, PRIM2 (P09884, Q14181, P49642, P49643). Masses, primer synthesis; PRIM2’s interdomain linker 253–270, its C-terminal part moving away with the primer’s 5′ end
  5. UniProt: RPA1–3 (P27694, P15927, P35244). Masses
  6. UniProt: PCNA (P12004), RFC1 (P35251). Homotrimer, loading by RFC
  7. UniProt: POLD1–4 (P28340, P49005, Q15054, Q9HCU8). Masses, lagging strand
  8. UniProt: FEN1 (P39748). Mass, 5′ flap cleavage
  9. UniProt: LIG1 (P18858). Mass, ATP-dependent nick sealing, residues 1–270 predicted disordered
  10. Remus D et al. Cell 2009;139:719–30. Mcm2–7 double hexamer 150 × 230 Å in four ring-like tiers
  11. Choi JM et al. Genes Dev 2007;21:1316–21. Human GINS: 55 × 106 × 61 Å
  12. Yuan Z et al. Nat Struct Mol Biol 2016;23:217–24. CMG structure: GINS and Cdc45 scaffold the N tier (PDB 3JC5, 3JC6)
  13. Abid Ali F et al. Nat Commun 2016;7:10708. Cdc45 and GINS on Mcm2, Mcm3 and Mcm5
  14. Georgescu R et al. PNAS 2017;114:E697–706. CMG at a fork: the N tier leads, the duplex enters its channel, Pol ε below CMG, Pol α–primase on top (PDB 5U8S)
  15. Yuan Z et al. Nat Commun 2020;11:688. DNA unwinding by CMG: strands part at the bottom of the zinc-finger collar (about 30 Å high); the lagging strand diverted, perhaps out between the zinc fingers of Mcm3 and Mcm5
  16. Yuan Z et al. Nat Commun 2020;11:3156. Pol ε holoenzyme on CMG: about 100 Å (16 nt) of single strand to the active site, POLE3–4 bridging the two Pol modules, POLE2 guiding the strand
  17. Asturias FJ et al. Nat Struct Mol Biol 2006;13:35–43. Pol ε: globular catalytic domain and an extended part
  18. Jones ML, Aria V, Baris Y, Yeeles JTP. Mol Cell 2023;83:2911–24. Pol α–primase binds the leading edge of CMG through PRIM2 and extends from the N-tier face, atop Mcm3 and Mcm5, toward the C tier beside Mcm3 and GINS; PRIM1 above the exit for the lagging-strand template, which runs alongside it
  19. Baranovskiy AG et al. Nucleic Acids Res 2022;50:6264–70. An elongated platform of PRIM1, PRIM2’s N-terminal domain, POLA1’s C-terminal domain and POLA2; PRIM2’s C-terminal domain on the primer’s 5′ end while Pol α’s core extends its 3′ end; linkers PRIM2 253–270 and POLA1 1250–1267
  20. Baranovskiy AG et al. Nucleic Acids Res 2014;42:14013–21. Human Pol α catalytic core: residues 335–1257 crystallised, 338–1244 ordered
  21. Kim C, Paulus BF, Wold MS. Biochemistry 1994;33:14197–206. RPA binds about 30 nt
  22. Krishna TSR et al. Cell 1994;79:1233–43. PCNA, a closed ring round DNA
  23. Dieckman LM et al. Subcell Biochem 2012;62:281–99. PCNA 8 nm across, 3.5 nm hole, 3 nm thick
  24. Lancey C et al. Nat Commun 2020;11:1109. Human Pol δ on PCNA: the catalytic core on PCNA, the regulatory subunits to the side; FEN1 on a free PCNA protomer
  25. Tsutakawa SE et al. Cell 2011;145:198–211. FEN1 structures and flap cleavage: a 3′ flap of one nucleotide held in a pocket, the DNA bent by about 100° at the junction
  26. Pascal JM et al. Nature 2004;432:473–8. DNA ligase I encircles nicked DNA
  27. Smith DJ, Whitehouse I. Nature 2012;483:434–8. Okazaki fragments in yeast the length of the nucleosome repeat, about 165 nt
  28. Alberts B et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th ed. Garland Science 2002, chapter 5, DNA Replication Mechanisms. Okazaki fragments 100–200 nt long in eukaryotes, RNA primers about 10 nt
  29. Erickson HP. Biol Proced Online 2009;11:32–51. Minimal radius of a protein of given mass
  30. Wang JC. Helical repeat of DNA in solution. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 1979;76:200–3 (10.4 ± 0.1 bp per turn); Rhodes D, Klug A. Helical periodicity of DNA determined by enzyme digestion. Nature 1980;286:573–8 (10.6 ± 0.1). B-DNA in solution: about 10.5 bp and 3.57 nm per turn
  31. Arnott S, Hukins DWL. Biochem Biophys Res Commun 1972;47:1504–9 (fibre); Dickerson RE et al. Science 1982;216:475–85 (crystal). B-DNA about 2 nm across, 0.34 nm rise per base pair
  32. Drew HR et al. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 1981;78:2179–83, PDB 1BNA, on which the strands measure about 145° apart across the minor groove, so it spans about 0.4 of a turn
How a β-lactam kills a bacterium
A section through the envelope of a gram-positive bacterium: outside at the top, then the cell wall, two layers of sugar chains whose peptides are joined by bridges of glycines, the newest chain under them, the plasma membrane, and the cytoplasm at the bottom. A penicillin-binding protein stands in the membrane where the newest chain is made, holding the D-Ala-D-Ala end of one of its peptides, and autolysins sit in the wall. Step 1 of 6: A PBP builds the wall. The PBP holds the D-Ala-D-Ala end of the newest chain’s peptide in its active site, beside a glycine bridge from the layer above.

Step 1 of 6A PBP builds the wall. The PBP holds the D-Ala-D-Ala end of the newest chain’s peptide in its active site, beside a glycine bridge from the layer above.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A gram-positive wall, after Staphylococcus aureus, whose peptides are joined by bridges of five glycines. Bacteria that a β-lactam stops from growing but kills far more slowly are called tolerant: often their autolysins fail.

Simplified: not to scale; two layers of old wall, where a real one has many; chains straight and peptides in the page’s plane, though they run every way; inside the wall, only the peptides that meet a partner drawn, and a glycine bridge on only some of them, though each peptide carries one; one PBP and one β-lactam, where a bacterium has several kinds of PBP and many drug molecules reach them; penicillin drawn as its two rings and side chain, its smaller groups left out; the autolysins drawn cutting only once cross-linking stops, though a growing wall needs them all along; whether a blocked PBP sets the autolysins off or they simply carry on with their usual work is not settled; the burst drawn at a hole in the side wall, though in staphylococci it opens where the cell starts to split; killing drawn as bursting, though a bacterium can die before it bursts, or without bursting.

11 sources
  1. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 3.3 Unique characteristics of prokaryotic cells
  2. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  3. Vollmer W, Blanot D, de Pedro MA. FEMS Microbiol Rev 2008;32:149–67. Peptidoglycan structure and architecture
  4. Sauvage E, Kerff F, Terrak M, Ayala JA, Charlier P. FEMS Microbiol Rev 2008;32:234–58. The penicillin-binding proteins: structure and role in peptidoglycan biosynthesis
  5. Tipper DJ, Strominger JL. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 1965;54:1133–41. Mechanism of action of penicillins: a proposal based on their structural similarity to acyl-D-alanyl-D-alanine
  6. Bush K, Bradford PA. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med 2016;6:a025247. β-Lactams and β-lactamase inhibitors: an overview
  7. Vollmer W, Joris B, Charlier P, Foster S. FEMS Microbiol Rev 2008;32:259–86. Bacterial peptidoglycan (murein) hydrolases
  8. Papp-Wallace KM, Endimiani A, Taracila MA, Bonomo RA. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 2011;55:4943–60. Carbapenems: past, present, and future
  9. Cho H, Uehara T, Bernhardt TG. Cell 2014;159:1300–11. Beta-lactam antibiotics induce a lethal malfunctioning of the bacterial cell wall synthesis machinery
  10. Giesbrecht P, Kersten T, Maidhof H, Wecke J. Microbiol Mol Biol Rev 1998;62:1371–414. Staphylococcal cell wall: morphogenesis and fatal variations in the presence of penicillin
  11. Tuomanen E, Durack DT, Tomasz A. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 1986;30:521–7. Antibiotic tolerance among clinical isolates of bacteria
How a tetracycline stops a ribosome
A bacterial ribosome in section, reading a messenger RNA that runs across the picture: the small subunit below, holding the mRNA, with its E, P and A sites marked from left to right, and the large subunit above, with an exit tunnel running up through it. Two tRNAs stand on their codons in the E and P sites, the one in the P site holding the growing chain of amino acids, which runs up the tunnel and out of the ribosome. The A site is empty, and a third tRNA, carrying its amino acid, comes in from the right. Step 1 of 6: A tRNA brings an amino acid. A tRNA carrying its amino acid comes to the empty A site, while the tRNA in the P site holds the growing chain.EPA

Step 1 of 6A tRNA brings an amino acid. A tRNA carrying its amino acid comes to the empty A site, while the tRNA in the P site holds the growing chain.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A tetracycline binds the small subunit of the bacterial ribosome, where each new tRNA has to seat. Bacteria take it up with energy, which our cells hardly do, and the ribosomes in our cytoplasm bind it only weakly. Because it lets go, a tetracycline stops bacteria growing rather than killing them: it is bacteriostatic.

Simplified: not to scale, the drug drawn larger than it is; the tRNAs drawn as flat cloverleaves, though each is folded in three dimensions; the elongation factors that bring each tRNA and move the ribosome along left out; the peptide bond and the move along the mRNA drawn as one step, the mRNA moving rather than the ribosome; one ribosome and one drug molecule; tetracycline drawn as its four rings and its main side groups; the magnesium it binds the ribosome with left out.

8 sources
  1. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 10.3 Structure and function of RNA
  2. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 11.4 Protein synthesis (translation)
  3. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  4. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens' Pharmacology, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 39, Antibiotics that inhibit bacterial protein synthesis
  5. Vázquez-Laslop N, Mankin AS. Trends Biochem Sci 2018;43:668–84. How macrolide antibiotics work
  6. Chopra I, Roberts M. Microbiol Mol Biol Rev 2001;65:232–60. Tetracycline antibiotics: mode of action, applications, molecular biology, and epidemiology of bacterial resistance
  7. Grossman TH. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med 2016;6:a025387. Tetracycline antibiotics and resistance
  8. Arenz S, Wilson DN. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med 2016;6:a025361. Bacterial protein synthesis as a target for antibiotic inhibition
How an aminoglycoside makes a ribosome misread
A bacterial ribosome in section, reading a messenger RNA that runs across the picture: the small subunit below, holding the mRNA, with the decoding centre just under its A site and its E, P and A sites marked from left to right, and the large subunit above, with an exit tunnel running up through it. Two tRNAs stand on their codons in the E and P sites, the one in the P site holding the growing chain of amino acids, which runs up the tunnel and out of the ribosome. A third tRNA, one base of its anticodon not pairing with the codon, has come to the A site with the wrong amino acid, its body still leaning out. Step 1 of 5: A mismatched tRNA comes. A tRNA whose anticodon is one base off the codon brings the wrong amino acid to the A site, and the decoding centre checks the pairing.EPA

Step 1 of 5A mismatched tRNA comes. A tRNA whose anticodon is one base off the codon brings the wrong amino acid to the A site, and the decoding centre checks the pairing.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Normally the ribosome turns away a tRNA that doesn’t match its codon. An aminoglycoside binds the decoding centre in the small subunit’s RNA and lets such tRNAs through, so wrong amino acids get into the bacterium’s proteins. Some of the faulty proteins lodge in its membrane and let more drug in, and unlike most drugs that act on the ribosome, aminoglycosides kill.

Simplified: not to scale, the drug drawn larger than it is; the tRNAs drawn as flat cloverleaves, though each is folded in three dimensions; the elongation factors that bring each tRNA and move the ribosome along left out; the peptide bond and the move along the mRNA drawn as one step, the mRNA moving rather than the ribosome; one ribosome and one drug molecule; the aminoglycoside drawn as gentamicin, three linked rings, an aminocyclitol between two amino sugars, with their amino and hydroxyl groups; the decoding centre drawn as a patch under the codon, though the drug binds deep in a helix of the small subunit’s RNA; their block of the start of protein synthesis left out.

8 sources
  1. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 10.3 Structure and function of RNA
  2. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 11.4 Protein synthesis (translation)
  3. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  4. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens' Pharmacology, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 39, Antibiotics that inhibit bacterial protein synthesis
  5. Vázquez-Laslop N, Mankin AS. Trends Biochem Sci 2018;43:668–84. How macrolide antibiotics work
  6. PubChem. Gentamicin (CID 3467).
  7. Krause KM, Serio AW, Kane TR, Connolly LE. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med 2016;6:a027029. Aminoglycosides: an overview
  8. Arenz S, Wilson DN. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med 2016;6:a025361. Bacterial protein synthesis as a target for antibiotic inhibition
How a macrolide stops a ribosome
A bacterial ribosome in section, reading a messenger RNA that runs across the picture: the small subunit below, holding the mRNA, with its E, P and A sites marked from left to right, and the large subunit above, with the exit tunnel running up through it. The ribosome has just begun a protein: tRNAs stand in the E and P sites, the one in the P site holding a chain of three amino acids whose first lies just inside the tunnel, and a tRNA has docked in the A site with the fourth. Step 1 of 5: A protein is begun. The ribosome has joined the first three amino acids of a new protein, and a tRNA has docked with the fourth. The chain will leave through the exit tunnel.EPA

Step 1 of 5A protein is begun. The ribosome has joined the first three amino acids of a new protein, and a tRNA has docked with the fourth. The chain will leave through the exit tunnel.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Macrolides such as erythromycin, clarithromycin and azithromycin bind the large subunit’s RNA inside the exit tunnel, just beyond the peptidyl transferase centre. A ribosome that has only just begun a protein stalls when the chain reaches the drug, and the tRNA, still holding the short chain, falls off the ribosome. Macrolides mostly stop bacteria growing rather than kill them.

Simplified: not to scale, the drug drawn larger than it is; the tRNAs drawn as flat cloverleaves, though each is folded in three dimensions; the elongation factors that bring each tRNA and move the ribosome along left out; the peptide bond and the move along the mRNA drawn as one step, the mRNA moving rather than the ribosome; one ribosome and one drug molecule; the macrolide drawn after erythromycin, its large ring, a few methyl groups and its two sugars; the drug drawn coming in down the tunnel from its exit, the way it is thought to reach its site; the chain drawn shorter than the six to eight amino acids erythromycin lets through before it stalls; the drug drawn as a plug, though it only narrows the tunnel: many proteins thread past it, and a ribosome stalls only at certain sequences.

9 sources
  1. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 10.3 Structure and function of RNA
  2. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 11.4 Protein synthesis (translation)
  3. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  4. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens' Pharmacology, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 39, Antibiotics that inhibit bacterial protein synthesis
  5. Vázquez-Laslop N, Mankin AS. Trends Biochem Sci 2018;43:668–84. How macrolide antibiotics work
  6. Tenson T, Lovmar M, Ehrenberg M. The mechanism of action of macrolides, lincosamides and streptogramin B reveals the nascent peptide exit path in the ribosome. J Mol Biol 2003;330:1005–14.
  7. PubChem. Erythromycin (CID 12560).
  8. Dinos GP. Br J Pharmacol 2017;174:2967–83. The macrolide antibiotic renaissance
  9. Arenz S, Wilson DN. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med 2016;6:a025361. Bacterial protein synthesis as a target for antibiotic inhibition
How chloramphenicol, clindamycin and linezolid stop a ribosome
A bacterial ribosome in section, reading a messenger RNA that runs across the picture: the small subunit below, holding the mRNA, with its E, P and A sites marked from left to right, and the large subunit above, with the exit tunnel running up through it and the peptidyl transferase centre on its underside beside the tunnel’s mouth. tRNAs stand on their codons in the E and P sites, the one in the P site holding the growing chain, which runs up into the tunnel. A third tRNA has docked in the A site, its amino acid in the peptidyl transferase centre beside the end of the chain. Step 1 of 6: A tRNA has docked. A tRNA has paired with the codon in the A site, and its amino acid sits in the peptidyl transferase centre, beside the end of the chain held by the tRNA in the P site.EPA

Step 1 of 6A tRNA has docked. A tRNA has paired with the codon in the A site, and its amino acid sits in the peptidyl transferase centre, beside the end of the chain held by the tRNA in the P site.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Chloramphenicol, clindamycin and linezolid all bind the large subunit’s RNA at the peptidyl transferase centre, where the peptide bond is made, and keep the incoming amino acid from settling there. Clindamycin’s site overlaps the macrolides’, and one change to it, made by the erm gene, lets bacteria resist both. Our mitochondria have ribosomes much like a bacterium’s, which is how chloramphenicol causes a dose-related, reversible marrow suppression.

Simplified: not to scale, the drugs drawn larger than they are; the tRNAs drawn as flat cloverleaves, though each is folded in three dimensions; the elongation factors that bring each tRNA and move the ribosome along left out; the peptide bond and the move along the mRNA drawn as one step, the mRNA moving rather than the ribosome; one ribosome and one drug molecule, each drug shown in turn; each drug drawn as its rings, chains and heavy atoms, its hydrogens left out; the peptidyl transferase centre drawn as a patch at the large subunit’s underside, though the tRNAs’ ends reach into it; clindamycin’s block of the ribosome’s move along the mRNA left out; clindamycin shown on a ribosome well into a protein, though it acts as one is begun; the older account of linezolid, that it stops the first tRNA settling as a protein is begun, left to the text.

12 sources
  1. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 10.3 Structure and function of RNA
  2. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 11.4 Protein synthesis (translation)
  3. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  4. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens' Pharmacology, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 39, Antibiotics that inhibit bacterial protein synthesis
  5. Vázquez-Laslop N, Mankin AS. Trends Biochem Sci 2018;43:668–84. How macrolide antibiotics work
  6. Tenson T, Lovmar M, Ehrenberg M. The mechanism of action of macrolides, lincosamides and streptogramin B reveals the nascent peptide exit path in the ribosome. J Mol Biol 2003;330:1005–14.
  7. Arenz S, Wilson DN. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med 2016;6:a025361. Bacterial protein synthesis as a target for antibiotic inhibition
  8. Dunkle JA, Xiong L, Mankin AS, Cate JHD. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 2010;107:17152–7. Structures of the Escherichia coli ribosome with antibiotics bound near the peptidyl transferase center explain spectra of drug action
  9. Wilson DN et al. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 2008;105:13339–44. The oxazolidinone antibiotics perturb the ribosomal peptidyl-transferase center and effect tRNA positioning
  10. PubChem. Chloramphenicol (CID 5959)
  11. PubChem. Clindamycin (CID 446598)
  12. PubChem. Linezolid (CID 441401)
How a fluoroquinolone kills a bacterium
DNA gyrase on the bacterium’s DNA, side on. A double helix runs across the picture. The enzyme sits round its middle in two halves, each a GyrA below with a GyrB on top, the two GyrAs gripping the DNA where they will cut it and meeting again below a chamber. Between the two GyrBs, just above the DNA, they hold a second stretch of DNA, seen end on. Step 1 of 6: Gyrase holds two stretches of DNA. The two GyrAs grip one stretch of DNA, and the two GyrBs, which bind ATP, have caught a second stretch just above it.

Step 1 of 6Gyrase holds two stretches of DNA. The two GyrAs grip one stretch of DNA, and the two GyrBs, which bind ATP, have caught a second stretch just above it.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

DNA gyrase puts negative supercoils into the bacterium’s DNA, which undo the overwinding ahead of a replication fork, so the DNA can be copied; topoisomerase IV, cutting the same way, separates the copies. Fluoroquinolones trap both on DNA they have cut. In gram-negative bacteria the main target is usually gyrase, in gram-positives topoisomerase IV. Our own topoisomerases lack the two residues that anchor the drug’s magnesium bridge, which is part of why the drugs spare us.

Simplified: not to scale, the enzyme’s shapes simplified and the drug drawn larger than it is; the enzyme drawn as two halves, each a GyrA with a GyrB on top; the gate in the DNA and the gate at the enzyme’s foot drawn opening together, though they open in turn; gyrase’s wrapping of the DNA round itself before it cuts left out; the ATP that closes the GyrBs and drives each round left out; the magnesium held to GyrA through water and two of its residues, drawn as the ion alone; the drugs drawn face on beside the cuts, though each slips in between the base pairs; the drug drawn as its rings, chains and heavy atoms, its hydrogens left out; how a fork turns a trapped cut into a break simplified, the enzyme drawn coming away; topoisomerase IV, which works the same way and is trapped the same way, not drawn.

5 sources
  1. Aldred KJ, Kerns RJ, Osheroff N. Biochemistry 2014;53:1565–74. Mechanism of quinolone action and resistance
  2. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens' Pharmacology, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 40, Other antimicrobial agents such as quinolones and antifolate drugs
  3. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 11.2 DNA replication
  4. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  5. PubChem. Ciprofloxacin (CID 2764)
How sulfonamides and trimethoprim starve a bacterium of folate
Inside a bacterium, the enzymes that make folate. On the left, dihydropteroate synthase, with a groove along its top; on the right, the smaller dihydrofolate reductase, with a groove of its own. Folate is drawn as the skeletons of its three pieces, a pteridine, PABA and glutamate, in shades of orange, and the drugs as grey skeletons. Along the bottom runs the bacterium’s DNA, growing at its right-hand end. Step 1 of 6: PABA is joined to a pteridine. Dihydropteroate synthase holds a pteridine and PABA side by side and joins them, making dihydropteroate. Our cells can’t make folate at all; we take it from food.

Step 1 of 6PABA is joined to a pteridine. Dihydropteroate synthase holds a pteridine and PABA side by side and joins them, making dihydropteroate. Our cells can’t make folate at all; we take it from food.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Bacteria make their own folate. We can’t make it and take ours from food, so sulfonamides spare our cells. We do have a dihydrofolate reductase, but trimethoprim binds the bacterial one about 100,000 times more tightly. Each drug alone only stops bacteria growing; together, as co-trimoxazole, blocking two steps of one pathway, they can kill them.

Simplified: the enzymes’ shapes simplified, each drawn as one rounded body with its site in a groove along the top; the molecules drawn flat and their hydrogens left out; each drug drawn lying exactly where the piece it mimics lay; in the enzymes they overlap only roughly; the pteridine’s two phosphates, which leave as PABA joins it, left out; the enzyme that adds the glutamate left out; the NADPH that gives the reductase its hydrogens left out; where tetrahydrofolate gets its carbons left out, and the carbon drawn in the one form thymidine takes, though the purines take theirs in another; the DNA drawn growing on its own, the nucleotides the carbons go into and the enzymes that make and join them left out; a sulfonamide can also be joined to the pteridine in PABA’s place, a dead end, drawn only filling PABA’s place.

13 sources
  1. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens’ Pharmacology, 6th ed. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 40, Other antimicrobial agents.
  2. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens’ Pharmacology, 6th ed. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 17, Hematopoietic drugs.
  3. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens’ Pharmacology, 6th ed. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 45, Antineoplastic agents.
  4. Yun MK et al. Catalysis and sulfa drug resistance in dihydropteroate synthase. Science 2012;335:1110–4.
  5. Cao H et al. The crystal structure of a tetrahydrofolate-bound dihydrofolate reductase reveals the origin of slow product release. Commun Biol 2018;1:226.
  6. Sittikornpaiboon P, Toochinda P. Structural and dynamics perspectives on the binding of substrate and inhibitors in Mycobacterium tuberculosis DHFR. Sci Pharm 2017;85:31.
  7. OpenStax Microbiology, 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs.
  8. PubChem. 4-Aminobenzoic acid (CID 978).
  9. PubChem. Sulfamethoxazole (CID 5329).
  10. PubChem. Trimethoprim (CID 5578).
  11. PubChem. 6-Hydroxymethyl-7,8-dihydropterin diphosphate (CID 135398612).
  12. PubChem. Dihydrofolic acid (CID 98792).
  13. PubChem. L-Glutamic acid (CID 33032).
How vancomycin stops a bacterium building its wall
A section through the envelope of a gram-positive bacterium: outside at the top, then the cell wall, two layers of sugar chains whose peptides are joined by bridges of glycines, the newest chain under them, the plasma membrane, and the cytoplasm at the bottom. A penicillin-binding protein stands on the membrane at the end of the newest chain. Two new wall units stand on the membrane on their lipid carriers, one beside it and one further right under a pore in the wall: each is two sugars and a peptide ending in two D-alanines. Step 1 of 5: A new unit waits on its carrier. Lipid II, the wall’s building block, is two sugars and a peptide ending in two D-alanines (D-Ala-D-Ala). Made inside the cell, it is held on the membrane’s outer face by a lipid carrier, bactoprenol.

Step 1 of 5A new unit waits on its carrier. Lipid II, the wall’s building block, is two sugars and a peptide ending in two D-alanines (D-Ala-D-Ala). Made inside the cell, it is held on the membrane’s outer face by a lipid carrier, bactoprenol.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Vancomycin and teicoplanin are glycopeptides. A β-lactam blocks the enzyme; a glycopeptide hides the enzyme’s substrate, so new units can be neither joined into the wall nor cross-linked. Too large to cross the outer membrane, glycopeptides act on gram-positive bacteria only.

Simplified: not to scale; two layers of old wall, where a real one has many; chains straight and peptides in the page’s plane, though they run every way; inside the wall, only the peptides that meet a partner drawn, and a bridge only where it reaches one: the new units’ own glycines are left out; a wide gap left in the wall to show the drug’s way in, where a real wall is a mesh it seeps through; one PBP, two units and one drug molecule, where many of each are at work; vancomycin drawn as a sketch of what it is made of: its seven amino acids arched into a cup, its five rings and their three cross-links, two chlorines and two sugars, its smaller groups left out and its shape not exact; the hydrogen bonds drawn as dashes from the amino acids that make them to the peptide’s end, not between the exact atoms, and the end pointing into the cup, though it lies along a cleft in it; bactoprenol drawn as its two phosphates and one long tail, its shape in the membrane simplified; the joining simplified: in fact the growing chain is passed onto the new unit, on its carrier, and it is the chain’s old carrier that is freed; the D-lactate drawn as a ball like the amino acids, though it is joined to the D-alanine by an ester; the drug drawn letting go altogether, though it still binds D-Ala-D-Lac weakly; the wall drawn as Staphylococcus aureus’s in every step, though in the last the bacterium is an enterococcus, whose bridges differ.

8 sources
  1. Stevens CW. Brenner and Stevens’ Pharmacology, 6th ed. Elsevier, 2023. Chapter 38, Antibiotics that inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis.
  2. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  3. Binda E, Marinelli F, Marcone GL. Old and new glycopeptide antibiotics: action and resistance. Antibiotics 2014;3:572–94.
  4. Cho H, Uehara T, Bernhardt TG. Cell 2014;159:1300–11. Beta-lactam antibiotics induce a lethal malfunctioning of the bacterial cell wall synthesis machinery
  5. Olademehin OP, Kim SJ, Shuford KL. Molecular dynamics simulation of atomic interactions in the vancomycin binding site. ACS Omega 2021;6:775–85.
  6. Xie J, Okano A, Pierce JG et al. Total synthesis of [Ψ[C(=S)NH]Tpg4]vancomycin aglycon, [Ψ[C(=NH)NH]Tpg4]vancomycin aglycon, and related key compounds: reengineering vancomycin for dual d-Ala-d-Ala and d-Ala-d-Lac binding. J Am Chem Soc 2012;134:1284–97.
  7. Park JH, Reviello RE, Loll PJ. Crystal structure of vancomycin bound to the resistance determinant d-alanine-d-serine. IUCrJ 2024;11:133–9.
  8. PubChem. Vancomycin (CID 14969).
The trypanosome and the four trypanosomatid forms
Above, a trypanosome drawn large, its posterior end on the left: one nucleus in the middle and, near the posterior end, a small kinetoplast, the DNA of its single long mitochondrion, beside the basal body the flagellum grows from. The flagellum emerges there, from the flagellar pocket, runs forward attached along the edge of a rippled fold, the undulating membrane, and leaves the body at the anterior end as the free flagellum. A dense coat covers the plasma membrane. Below, the four body forms of the trypanosomes and Leishmania: the round amastigote, with no free flagellum; the promastigote, with its kinetoplast near the anterior end and its flagellum free from there; the epimastigote, with its kinetoplast just in front of the nucleus and an undulating membrane along the front of its body; and the trypomastigote, with its kinetoplast behind the nucleus and an undulating membrane the length of its body.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Trypanosoma brucei’s trypomastigote, the form in a patient’s blood, drawn large: 14 to 33 µm long, with its posterior end on the left. The four forms below differ in where the kinetoplast lies relative to the nucleus and in how much of the flagellum runs along the body. Leishmania lives as amastigotes in our macrophages and as promastigotes in the sand fly; T. cruzi lives as amastigotes in our cells, and both trypanosomes as epimastigotes in their insects and trypomastigotes in our blood.

Simplified: not to scale: the amastigote, 1 to 5 µm long, drawn far larger beside the other forms than it is, and the membrane and coat drawn thicker; the cell drawn large after T. brucei’s slender form, though the species takes several shapes, and T. cruzi’s trypomastigote is C-shaped in stained blood films, with a larger kinetoplast; most organelles and the flagellar pocket left out; the coat drawn on the cell body only; the kinetoplast drawn as a plain bar, though it is a network of interlocked DNA rings; the mitochondrion drawn as a plain tube, without its cristae; the four forms drawn without their mitochondrion or coat; the beat played far slower than life, as one simple wave drawn flat on the page; the real beat, and the way the cell turns as it swims, are more complex.

14 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trypanosomiasis, African. Last reviewed 6 March 2019.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trypanosomiasis, American. Last reviewed 16 June 2021.
  3. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Leishmaniasis. Last reviewed 5 June 2024.
  4. Zeledón RA. Hemoflagellates. In: Baron S, editor. Medical Microbiology. 4th ed. Galveston (TX): University of Texas Medical Branch; 1996. Chapter 82.
  5. Yaeger RG. Protozoa: structure, classification, growth, and development. In: Baron S, editor. Medical Microbiology. 4th ed. Galveston (TX): University of Texas Medical Branch; 1996. Chapter 77.
  6. Wheeler RJ, Gluenz E, Gull K. The limits on trypanosomatid morphological diversity. PLoS One. 2013;8(11):e79581.
  7. Jensen RE, Englund PT. Network news: the replication of kinetoplast DNA. Annu Rev Microbiol. 2012;66:473–491.
  8. Kinetoplast. Wikipedia. Accessed 27 October 2026.
  9. Hoffmann A, Käser S, Jakob M, et al. Molecular model of the mitochondrial genome segregation machinery in Trypanosoma brucei. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 2018;115(8):E1809–E1818.
  10. Sullenberger C, Hoffman B, Wiedeman J, Kumar G, Mensa-Wilmot K. Casein kinase TbCK1.2 regulates division of kinetoplast DNA, and movement of basal bodies in the African trypanosome. PLoS One. 2021;16(4):e0249908.
  11. Bílý T, Sheikh S, Mallet A, et al. Ultrastructural changes of the mitochondrion during the life cycle of Trypanosoma brucei. J Eukaryot Microbiol. 2021;68(3):e12846.
  12. Schimanski B, Aeschlimann S, Stettler P, et al. p166 links membrane and intramitochondrial modules of the trypanosomal tripartite attachment complex. PLoS Pathog. 2022;18(6):e1010207.
  13. Godar S, Oristian J, Hinsch V, et al. Light chain 2 is a Tctex-type related axonemal dynein light chain that regulates directional ciliary motility in Trypanosoma brucei. PLoS Pathog. 2022;18(9):e1009984.
  14. Mugnier MR, Stebbins CE, Papavasiliou FN. Masters of disguise: antigenic variation and the VSG coat in Trypanosoma brucei. PLoS Pathog. 2016;12(9):e1005784.
Trypanosoma: the two life cycles
A map of two life cycles side by side, each running down its own column from its insect to the patient, between the columns at the foot, and back. Each stage is a name with the parasite’s form drawn small beside it and a note of where it lives and whether it multiplies there. On the left, Trypanosoma brucei in the tsetse fly: procyclic trypomastigotes, which multiply in the midgut, become epimastigotes, which multiply in the salivary glands, and these become metacyclic trypomastigotes, infective, in the salivary glands. The fly’s bite passes them to the patient, where they become bloodstream trypomastigotes, which multiply in the blood and lymph and later in the spinal fluid, and a fly’s blood meal takes them up again. On the right, T. cruzi in the kissing bug: epimastigotes, which multiply in the midgut, become metacyclic trypomastigotes, infective, in the hindgut. The bug’s faeces, rubbed into the bite, the eyes or the mouth, pass them to the patient, where they become amastigotes, which multiply inside cells, and these become bloodstream trypomastigotes, which do not divide, and which invade new cells or are taken up by a bug’s blood meal, becoming epimastigotes again.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Both trypanosomes pass between an insect and a mammal and change form at each step. Trypanosoma brucei, the cause of sleeping sickness, lives outside cells throughout and multiplies in the patient’s blood; its fly passes it on with its bite. T. cruzi, the cause of Chagas disease, multiplies in the patient only inside cells, as amastigotes, and its trypomastigotes in the blood do not divide; its bug passes it on with its faeces, which must be rubbed into the bite or a mucous membrane, so not every bite infects.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the insects and the patient drawn as icons, nothing to scale; each stage’s form drawn small and the same size; T. brucei’s three kinds of trypomastigote drawn alike, and T. cruzi’s blood form C-shaped, as it looks in a stained blood film; T. brucei’s bloodstream forms drawn as one: the long slender forms that multiply turn into short stumpy ones, which do not, and it is these that go on in a fly; T. b. gambiense and T. b. rhodesiense drawn as one cycle, which they share; only the cycle through the insect: both also pass from mother to child and by laboratory accident, and T. cruzi by blood transfusion, organ transplant and food or drink soiled by the bugs; the animals that also carry the parasites left out; the insects named only as vectors; some textbooks also call the insect the intermediate host and the mammal the definitive host, and the genera named for the bug are the commonest of several.

8 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trypanosomiasis, African. Last reviewed 6 March 2019.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trypanosomiasis, American. Last reviewed 16 June 2021.
  3. Zeledón RA. Hemoflagellates. In: Baron S, editor. Medical Microbiology. 4th ed. Galveston (TX): University of Texas Medical Branch; 1996. Chapter 82.
  4. World Health Organization. Trypanosomiasis, human African (sleeping sickness). Fact sheet, 2 May 2023.
  5. World Health Organization. Chagas disease (also known as American trypanosomiasis). Fact sheet, 8 April 2026.
  6. Nascimento JF, Souza ROO, Alencar MB, et al. How much (ATP) does it cost to build a trypanosome? A theoretical study on the quantity of ATP needed to maintain and duplicate a bloodstream-form Trypanosoma brucei cell. PLoS Pathog. 2023;19(7):e1011522.
  7. Tsetse fly. Wikipedia. Accessed 27 October 2026.
  8. Díaz EV, Fiad FG, Gigena GV, et al. Environmental and dispersal-related drivers of color morph distribution in Triatoma infestans (Klug, 1834) (Hemiptera, Reduviidae). Insects. 2025;16(11):1103.
Leishmania: the amastigote and the promastigote
On the left, a macrophage, a large round host cell with ruffled edges and its nucleus to one side, its cytoplasm full of small oval amastigotes, each in a pale vacuole of its own. On the right, the two forms drawn large. Above, the amastigote: an oval cell with a large nucleus, a small dark kinetoplast in front of it, the basal body beside the kinetoplast and a short flagellum that does not leave the cell, and a single mitochondrion curling round under the nucleus from the kinetoplast. Below, the promastigote: a slender spindle with its nucleus in the middle, its kinetoplast near the anterior end, and the flagellum growing from there, out through the anterior tip and free, as long as the body, beating in a wave.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Leishmania takes two forms. In our macrophages it is the amastigote, 1 to 5 µm long, round to oval, with a large nucleus, a prominent kinetoplast and no free flagellum; it multiplies inside them until they burst. In the sand fly it is the promastigote, about 10 to 12 µm long, with its kinetoplast near the anterior end and its flagellum free from there, which the fly injects with its bite. The species that cause skin, mucosal and visceral disease look the same.

Simplified: not to scale: the two forms drawn large beside the macrophage, and its amastigotes far larger in it than they are; most organelles, the flagellar pocket and the macrophage’s own organelles left out; each amastigote drawn in a vacuole of its own, as in Leishmania donovani; some species share one large vacuole; the kinetoplast drawn as a plain bar, though it is a network of interlocked DNA rings; the beat played far slower than life, as one simple wave drawn flat on the page.

4 sources
  1. Wheeler RJ, Gluenz E, Gull K. The cell cycle of Leishmania: morphogenetic events and their implications for parasite biology. Mol Microbiol. 2011;79(3):647–662.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Leishmaniasis. Last reviewed 5 June 2024.
  3. Zeledón RA. Hemoflagellates. In: Baron S, editor. Medical Microbiology. 4th ed. Galveston (TX): University of Texas Medical Branch; 1996. Chapter 82.
  4. Walker BJ, Wheeler RJ, Ishimoto K, Gaffney EA. Boundary behaviours of Leishmania mexicana: a hydrodynamic simulation study. J Theor Biol. 2019;462:311–320.
Leishmania: the life cycle
A map of Leishmania’s life cycle, running clockwise between two panels: the sand fly’s across the top and the patient’s across the foot. Each stage is a name with the parasite’s form drawn small beside it and a note of where it is. In the sand fly, from left to right: amastigotes, taken up with a blood meal, turn into promastigotes in the fly’s gut; promastigotes multiply in the gut; and metacyclic promastigotes, infective, move forward to the proboscis. The bite injects them into the patient’s skin, where, from right to left, macrophages take up the promastigotes, which become amastigotes; the amastigotes multiply inside the macrophages, burst them and infect new ones. A sand fly’s blood meal takes up macrophages full of amastigotes, closing the cycle. From the amastigotes, arrows lead to where they settle, by species: the skin, with Leishmania tropica; the nose and mouth, with L. braziliensis; and the spleen, liver and bone marrow, with L. donovani.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Leishmania passes between a female sand fly and a mammal. The fly injects promastigotes with its bite; in the patient they live and multiply only inside macrophages, as amastigotes, and a fly takes these up with its next blood meal. Which disease follows depends on the species and on the patient’s immunity: sores on the skin, destruction of the nose and mouth, or a visceral disease of the spleen, liver and bone marrow, kala-azar, which is fatal untreated.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the sand fly and the patient drawn as icons, nothing to scale; each stage’s form drawn small; in the fly the promastigotes go through more forms than the two shown; one species named for each disease, though several cause each: L. major and L. aethiopica sores on the skin, L. infantum kala-azar, and L. donovani sometimes a rash on the skin after kala-azar; only the bite drawn; Leishmania also passes, rarely, by shared needles, blood transfusions and from mother to child; the sand fly named only as the vector; it is also called the intermediate host, and the mammal the definitive host; dogs, rodents and other mammals are reservoir hosts.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Leishmaniasis. Last reviewed 5 June 2024.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. About leishmaniasis. 6 March 2024.
  3. Zeledón RA. Hemoflagellates. In: Baron S, editor. Medical Microbiology. 4th ed. Galveston (TX): University of Texas Medical Branch; 1996. Chapter 82.
  4. World Health Organization. Leishmaniasis. Fact sheet, 12 January 2023.
Trichomonas: the trophozoite
On the left, a vaginal epithelial cell, a flat many-sided cell with a small nucleus, with three trophozoites flattened on it, amoeboid, their flagella at their front, and a fourth, pear-shaped, swimming above it. In the middle, Trichomonas vaginalis drawn large, its broad anterior end up: a large oval nucleus in the anterior end, a row of basal bodies just in front of it, four flagella free from the anterior end, a fifth running back along the edge of the undulating membrane on one side, which reaches about halfway down the body, with the costa, a rod, along its base, the axostyle, a glassy rod, down the middle and out through the posterior end as a spike, and small round hydrogenosomes along the axostyle and the costa. On the right, Trichomonas tenax, smaller, its undulating membrane two-thirds of the body. The flagella beat and the membranes ripple.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Trichomonas lives only as a trophozoite, with no cyst. T. vaginalis is pear-shaped, 7 to 30 µm long, on average 10 by 7 µm: four flagella free from its anterior end, a fifth along the edge of an undulating membrane that reaches about halfway down the body, and an axostyle that runs through it and out of its posterior end. Attached to the vaginal epithelium, it flattens and turns amoeboid. T. tenax, in the mouth, is smaller, 5 to 16 µm, its membrane two-thirds of the body.

Simplified: not to scale: T. vaginalis drawn large, T. tenax smaller beside it, and the trophozoites on the epithelial cell far larger than they would be; most organelles left out: the Golgi, the pelta and the endoplasmic reticulum, and the hydrogenosomes far fewer and larger than they are; the attached trophozoites drawn simply, without their undulating membranes; T. tenax drawn as a smaller T. vaginalis with a longer membrane; its other small differences left out; the beat played far slower than life, as simple waves drawn flat on the page.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trichomoniasis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Petrin D, Delgaty K, Bhatt R, Garber G. Clinical and microbiological aspects of Trichomonas vaginalis. Clin Microbiol Rev. 1998;11(2):300–317.
  3. Cheon SH, Kim SR, Song HO, Ahn MH, Ryu JS. The dimension of Trichomonas vaginalis as measured by scanning electron microscopy. Korean J Parasitol. 2013;51(2):243–246.
  4. Matthew MA, Yang N, Ketzis J, Mukaratirwa S, Yao C. Trichomonas tenax: a neglected protozoan infection in the oral cavities of humans and dogs, a scoping review. Trop Med Infect Dis. 2023;8(1):60.
Trichomonas: the life cycles
A map of the two trichomonads' life cycles, each between two people drawn as pale panels with a figure at the outer edge. Across the top, Trichomonas vaginalis: trophozoites multiply by binary fission in a woman's vagina and urethra, and sexual intercourse passes them to a man, in whose urethra and prostate they live, often without symptoms, and back again. Across the foot, Trichomonas tenax: trophozoites in the gum pockets and on the tartar of one mouth pass in saliva, by kissing, droplets or shared dishes, to another mouth, and back. Neither has a cyst: each passes straight from person to person.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

The trichomonads have one stage, the trophozoite, and no cyst, so they die soon outside the body and pass straight from one person to the next: T. vaginalis by sexual intercourse, T. tenax in saliva. People are the only host of T. vaginalis; T. tenax is also found in dogs, cats and other animals.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the people drawn as icons and the trophozoites drawn small, nothing to scale; only the main routes drawn: T. vaginalis also passes between women, and rarely from mother to baby at birth; T. tenax also on shared dishes and in droplets.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trichomoniasis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Petrin D, Delgaty K, Bhatt R, Garber G. Clinical and microbiological aspects of Trichomonas vaginalis. Clin Microbiol Rev. 1998;11(2):300–317.
  3. Matthew MA, Yang N, Ketzis J, Mukaratirwa S, Yao C. Trichomonas tenax: a neglected protozoan infection in the oral cavities of humans and dogs, a scoping review. Trop Med Infect Dis. 2023;8(1):60.
Giardia: the trophozoite and the cyst
On the left, the Giardia trophozoite seen from its ventral side, drawn large, its broad round anterior end up and tapering to a narrow tail: a pale oval ventral disc fills the front half, its spiral drawn as rings, with two oval nuclei side by side in it like a pair of eyes, the basal bodies between them, two axonemes running down the middle to the tail, two dark curved median bodies across them behind the disc, and four pairs of flagella leaving the body, a pair at the front of the sides, a pair at the lower third of the sides, a pair that comes out of the ventral face behind the disc and runs back over it past the tail, and a pair from the tail. On the right, the cyst, an oval with a pale wall, the cell inside drawn back a little from it, four nuclei at one end and the axonemes and median bodies down its middle. The flagella beat.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Giardia has two forms. The trophozoite, which lives in the small intestine, is pear-shaped, 10 to 20 µm long, with 2 nuclei, 8 flagella in four pairs and a ventral disc it holds on with. The cyst, the form that passes from person to person, is oval, 8 to 19 µm long, and has 4 nuclei when mature.

Simplified: not to scale: the trophozoite drawn far larger than the cyst beside it; the trophozoite drawn flat from its ventral side, the disc as an oval with its spiral as rings, and the flagella's paths inside the cell simplified; most organelles left out: the endoplasmic reticulum, the small vesicles under the surface, and the disc's ridges and lateral crest; the cyst drawn with all four nuclei together at one end and its wall as one layer; the beat played far slower than life, as simple waves drawn flat on the page.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Giardiasis. Last reviewed 5 June 2024.
  2. Adam RD. Giardia duodenalis: biology and pathogenesis. Clin Microbiol Rev. 2021;34(4):e00024-19.
Giardia: the life cycle
A map of Giardia's life cycle, with one host. Across the top, outside the body on the white page: cysts passed in faeces, infective at once, are carried into water and food or onto hands, and are swallowed. Down into the patient, drawn as a pale panel with a figure at its left: in the duodenum trophozoites are freed from the cysts, hold on to the lining of the small intestine by their ventral disc and multiply by binary fission, and form cysts again as they pass on toward the colon. The cysts are passed in the faeces, and the cycle begins again.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Giardia passes from person to person as the cyst, which is infective as soon as it is passed and survives for months in cold water. Swallowed, it releases trophozoites in the duodenum, which multiply on the lining of the small intestine and form cysts again on their way to the colon. People are infected from water, food and hands, and as few as 10 cysts can be enough.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the patient drawn as an icon and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; the steps within each stage left out: the cyst's nuclei dividing, and the divisions that turn one cyst into its trophozoites.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Giardiasis. Last reviewed 5 June 2024.
  2. Adam RD. Giardia duodenalis: biology and pathogenesis. Clin Microbiol Rev. 2021;34(4):e00024-19.
  3. Public Health Agency of Canada. Pathogen safety data sheets: infectious substances, Giardia lamblia.
Entamoeba: the trophozoite and the cysts
On the left, the trophozoite of Entamoeba histolytica drawn large: an irregular amoeba with a clear outer layer, the ectoplasm, which flows out to the upper right as a broad, rounded pseudopodium; inside it a granular endoplasm holding one round nucleus, with fine even beads of chromatin under its membrane and a small dot in its centre, and five red blood cells, each in its own vacuole. The pseudopodium slowly swells and eases back. Down the right, from the top: a young cyst, round in a thin wall, with one nucleus, a large glycogen vacuole and two bar-shaped chromatoid bodies with rounded ends; a mature cyst with four nuclei and one chromatoid body; and Entamoeba gingivalis, a smaller amoeba with one nucleus and two white blood cells it has eaten.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Entamoeba histolytica has two forms. The trophozoite, usually 15 to 20 µm, moves by pseudopodia and has one nucleus with a small central karyosome and fine, even peripheral chromatin; when it invades it swallows red blood cells. The cyst, 12 to 15 µm, matures from one nucleus to 4. E. gingivalis lives in the mouth and has no cyst.

Simplified: not to scale: the trophozoite drawn large, the cysts and E. gingivalis smaller beside it, and the red cells larger than they would be; the cytoplasm's vesicles and the trophozoite's many small vacuoles left out; a young cyst with one nucleus and a mature one with four; the two-nucleus stage between them left out; E. gingivalis drawn smaller than the trophozoite, though the two are much the same size, and with two white cells it has eaten; the pseudopodium's flow played far slower than life, swelling and easing in one place.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Amebiasis. Last reviewed 15 October 2019.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Entamoeba gingivalis.
  3. Bonner M, Fresno M, Gironès N, Guillén N, Santi-Rocca J. Reassessing the role of Entamoeba gingivalis in periodontitis. Front Cell Infect Microbiol. 2018;8:379.
Entamoeba histolytica: the life cycle
A map of Entamoeba histolytica's life cycle, with one host. Across the top, outside the body on the white page: cysts passed in the stool, which survive days to weeks, reach water and food or hands, and mature cysts with four nuclei are swallowed. Down into the patient, drawn as a pale panel with a figure at its left: trophozoites are freed from the cysts in the small intestine, move on to the large intestine and multiply there by binary fission, and form cysts again, which are passed in the faeces. Below the trophozoites in the colon, a line branches three ways: they stay in the lumen, with no symptoms; they invade the wall of the colon, amoebic colitis; or they spread in the blood to the liver and make an abscess.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Entamoeba histolytica passes from person to person as the cyst, swallowed in water or food or from hands. In the large intestine the trophozoites multiply and form cysts again. Most infections stay in the lumen and cause no symptoms; in some the trophozoites invade the wall of the colon, and from there they can reach the liver.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the patient drawn as an icon and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; the steps within each stage left out: the cyst's nucleus dividing from one to four, and the divisions that turn one cyst into its trophozoites; only the liver drawn of the places beyond the gut, the lungs and brain being reached more rarely; Entamoeba dispar and Entamoeba moshkovskii, which look the same under the microscope and are passed on the same way, left out.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Amebiasis. Last reviewed 15 October 2019.
  2. Shirley DT, Farr L, Watanabe K, Moonah S. A review of the global burden, new diagnostics, and current therapeutics for amebiasis. Open Forum Infect Dis. 2018;5(7):ofy161.
Toxoplasma: the tachyzoite and its forms
On the left, the tachyzoite of Toxoplasma gondii drawn large: a crescent, round at its posterior end, lower left, and tapering to its anterior end, upper right. At the very tip, the conoid, a short dark cone inside a ring at the apex; behind it eight club-shaped rhoptries in a row, their slender necks running forward to meet in the conoid; short rod-like micronemes along both sides near the tip; a small oval apicoplast with four membranes in front of the nucleus; the large round nucleus in the middle; and pale yellow dense granules scattered through the back half. The tachyzoite flexes slowly. Down the right, from the top: a host cell with its nucleus, holding a pale parasitophorous vacuole in which eight small tachyzoites radiate from a central residual body, a rosette; a round tissue cyst, its thin wall packed with small, slender bradyzoites; and an oval sporulated oocyst with a double wall, holding two sporocysts, each with four sporozoites.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Toxoplasma gondii has three infective forms. The tachyzoite, 4 to 8 µm long and 2 to 3 µm wide, invades almost any nucleated cell with its apical complex and multiplies fast in a vacuole of its own. Bradyzoites multiply slowly inside tissue cysts, 5 to 50 µm, mainly in the brain and muscle, for the life of the host. The oocyst, 10 to 12 µm, comes from the cat and, once sporulated, holds 2 sporocysts of 4 sporozoites each.

Simplified: not to scale: the tachyzoite drawn far larger than the forms beside it, and the oocyst drawn as large as the tissue cyst, which can be several times its size; only the apical complex, the nucleus and the apicoplast drawn in the tachyzoite: its single mitochondrion, Golgi body, endoplasmic reticulum and the inner membrane complex under its surface left out; the rosette drawn with eight tachyzoites; there can be many more, and most groups lie at random, a rosette forming only when they divide in step; the tissue cyst drawn with a few dozen bradyzoites, where it can hold hundreds, and without the host cell it lies in; the tachyzoite's flex played slowly, in one place; it glides forward in life.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Toxoplasmosis. Last reviewed 5 May 2025.
  2. Dubey JP, Lindsay DS, Speer CA. Structures of Toxoplasma gondii tachyzoites, bradyzoites, and sporozoites and biology and development of tissue cysts. Clin Microbiol Rev. 1998;11(2):267–299.
Toxoplasma: the life cycle
A map of Toxoplasma gondii's life cycle. Across the top, three places. On the left a pale panel for the cat, with a sitting cat: tissue cysts eaten in prey lead, in the cat's gut, to oocysts made by the sexual cycle. The oocysts pass in the cat's faeces to the white page outside, where they sporulate in 1 to 5 days and become infective. Swallowed by other animals, in a pale panel on the right with a mouse, they leave tissue cysts in brain and muscle, and a cat eating such an animal is infected again. Across the foot, the patient's panel: sporulated oocysts swallowed in food, water or soil, or tissue cysts eaten in undercooked meat, release parasites that become tachyzoites, which multiply in any cell and spread in the blood; as immunity takes hold they become bradyzoites in tissue cysts in the brain, eye and muscle, for life; if immunity fails, the cysts reactivate. From the tachyzoites, a line runs down to congenital infection, across the placenta.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Toxoplasma's sexual cycle runs only in cats, which pass oocysts in their faeces. Almost any warm-blooded animal, people included, can be infected by swallowing sporulated oocysts, or by eating tissue cysts in another animal's meat. In people the tachyzoites spread and then settle as tissue cysts for life; a first infection in pregnancy can cross the placenta, and the cysts reactivate if immunity fails.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; the other animals drawn as one panel with a mouse; in them, as in the patient, tachyzoites come before the tissue cysts; the stages inside the cat's gut left out, cats infected by swallowing oocysts not drawn, and infection by transplant or transfusion only named.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Toxoplasmosis. Last reviewed 5 May 2025.
  2. Robert-Gangneux F, Dardé ML. Epidemiology of and diagnostic strategies for toxoplasmosis. Clin Microbiol Rev. 2012;25(2):264–296.
Plasmodium: the stages in the red cell
A grid of red cells as a stained thin blood film shows them, three rows and four columns. The rows, from the top: Plasmodium vivax, Plasmodium malariae, Plasmodium falciparum. The columns, from the left: the ring, the growing trophozoite, the mature schizont and the gametocyte. Top row, P. vivax: a ring with thick cytoplasm and one large chromatin dot, in a cell slightly larger than normal; then, in cells about one and a half times normal size, finely stippled with red Schüffner's dots, an irregular amoeboid trophozoite with a vacuole and fine brown pigment, a schizont of sixteen merozoites with its pigment in two clumps, and a large round gametocyte almost filling its cell. Middle row, P. malariae, in cells a little smaller than normal: a sturdy ring, a band-form trophozoite stretched across the cell with coarse dark pigment along one edge, a schizont of eight merozoites arranged in a rosette round a central mass of pigment, and a compact round gametocyte. Bottom row, P. falciparum, in normal-sized cells: two delicate small rings in one cell, one with two chromatin dots and one flattened against the cell's edge, with coarse red-purple dashes, Maurer's clefts; a compact trophozoite, also with clefts; a schizont of sixteen small merozoites round one dark mass of pigment; and a curved, banana-shaped gametocyte longer than a red cell, the cell stretched thinly round it.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Inside the red cell, each species goes from ring to trophozoite to schizont, which bursts to release merozoites that invade new cells: erythrocytic schizogony, about every 48 hours for P. vivax and P. falciparum and 72 hours for P. malariae. A few become gametocytes instead. The species are told apart on a Giemsa-stained thin film by the size of the infected cell, the stippling in it, the shape of the stages and how many merozoites a schizont holds.

Simplified: colours: Giemsa stains the cytoplasm blue and the chromatin red; drawn in arcmed's colours instead (the protist's rose, chromatin in DNA's blue), with the stain's contrast; one typical form of each stage; a real film shows every shape in between; the P. falciparum trophozoite and schizont drawn for completeness, though they are seldom seen in the blood; male and female gametocytes not told apart; P. ovale and P. knowlesi left out, and P. malariae's Ziemann's stippling, seen only rarely.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Malaria. Last reviewed 13 December 2024.
  2. Kumar and Clark’s Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 20, Infectious disease; malaria, pp. 563–567.
Plasmodium: the life cycle
A map of the malaria parasite's life cycle. Across the top, a pale panel for the female Anopheles mosquito, drawn on the left. Along it, three stages on chips: the ookinete, formed after gametes fuse in the mosquito's gut; the oocyst on the gut wall; and the sporozoites, in the salivary glands 9 to 18 days after the meal. From the sporozoites, a bite carries them down into the patient's panel, to the liver, a panel of its own, where the link branches: to the liver schizont, which grows in a liver cell, and to the hypnozoites of P. vivax and P. ovale, dormant, with an arrow from them to the liver schizont marked relapse. From the liver schizont, merozoites go down into the blood, a panel of its own: the ring, then the trophozoite, then the schizont, whose merozoites loop back under the row to new red cells, about every 48 hours, or 72 in P. malariae. From the schizont, an arrow to the gametocytes, and from them a blood meal climbs back up to the mosquito's ookinete.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Plasmodium needs two hosts: the female Anopheles mosquito, in which its gametes fuse, and a person, in whom it multiplies first in the liver and then again and again in red cells. The blood stages cause the disease, and the gametocytes carry it on to the next mosquito.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; each stage drawn the same for every species; the figure of the stages in the red cell tells them apart; the gametes and the zygote in the mosquito's gut not drawn apart from the ookinete; infection by blood transfusion or shared needles, without a mosquito, not drawn.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Malaria. Last reviewed 13 December 2024.
  2. Kumar and Clark’s Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 20, Infectious disease; malaria, pp. 563–567.
Balantidium coli: the trophozoite and the cyst
On the left, the trophozoite of Balantidium coli drawn large: an egg-shaped cell, narrower at its upper right end, covered all round in short cilia that beat in a wave running round the cell. At the narrow end a funnel, the peristome, leads in to the cytostome. Inside, a large bean-shaped macronucleus with a small round micronucleus in its hollow, two clear contractile vacuoles, several food vacuoles with particles in them, and at the rounded lower end the cytopyge. On the right, the cyst: round, in a thick double wall, with its macronucleus, micronucleus, a contractile vacuole and a few food vacuoles.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Balantidium coli is the only ciliate that infects humans, and the largest protozoan parasite of humans. The trophozoite, 40 to 200 µm long, is covered in cilia, with a mouth at its narrower front end, a large bean-shaped macronucleus and a small micronucleus. The cyst, 50 to 70 µm, is round in a double wall and is the infective form.

Simplified: not to scale: the trophozoite drawn large and the cyst smaller beside it; the cilia drawn only round the cell's edge, as if seen in section, and sparser than they are; the cilia's wave played far slower than life, and the cell drawn still rather than spinning; a few food vacuoles drawn; the many small vesicles, mucocysts and the rest of the cytoplasm left out; the cyst drawn with its parts clear to see; in a stool sample its insides are often hard to make out.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Balantidiasis. Last reviewed 6 June 2019.
  2. Schuster FL, Ramirez-Avila L. Current world status of Balantidium coli. Clin Microbiol Rev. 2008;21(4):626–638.
Balantidium coli: the life cycle
A map of Balantidium coli's life cycle, with one host and its reservoir. Across the top, outside the body on the white page: a pig at the right, the main reservoir, whose faeces carry cysts; cysts passed in the faeces of pigs and people reach water and food, and are swallowed. Down into the patient, drawn as a pale panel with a figure at its left: trophozoites are freed from the cysts in the small intestine, move on to the large intestine and multiply there by binary fission, at times joining in conjugation, and form cysts again, which are passed in the faeces. Below the trophozoites in the large intestine, a line branches three ways: most stay in the lumen, with no symptoms; some invade the wall of the colon and make ulcers, with diarrhoea or dysentery; rarely they go through it, to peritonitis or beyond.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Balantidium coli passes to people as the cyst, swallowed in water or food contaminated with faeces, most often a pig's. In the large intestine the trophozoites multiply and form cysts again. Most infections cause no symptoms; in some the trophozoites invade the wall of the colon and make ulcers.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the patient and the pig drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; the steps within each stage left out: how the cyst forms and opens, and how conjugation exchanges the micronuclei; the places beyond the colon gathered into one, the appendix, liver, urinary and genital tract and lungs among them; only the pig drawn as a reservoir; people, rodents and monkeys can carry it too, and it can pass from person to person.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Balantidiasis. Last reviewed 6 June 2019.
  2. Schuster FL, Ramirez-Avila L. Current world status of Balantidium coli. Clin Microbiol Rev. 2008;21(4):626–638.
Fasciola hepatica: the adult and its larvae
On the left, an adult Fasciola hepatica seen from its ventral side: a broad, flat leaf with a cone at its front end set off by two shoulders. At the cone's tip the small oral sucker, behind it the pharynx, and level with the shoulders the larger ventral sucker. The gut forks behind the pharynx into two caeca that run back to near the hind end, each with many side branches reaching toward the edge. Two much-branched testes lie one behind the other in the hind half of the body; in front of them on the left lies the branched ovary; the uterus, full of eggs, winds forward from beside the ovary to the genital pore in front of the ventral sucker, beside the cirrus sac. Small yolk glands fill both sides and the hind end. On the right, its forms in order: an oval egg with a lid at one end, full of yolk cells around one egg cell; a pear-shaped miracidium covered in cilia, with two eyespots; a sporocyst, a sac of germ balls and young rediae; a redia, a long sac with a mouth and pharynx and cercariae growing inside it; a cercaria, an oval body with two suckers and a long tail; and a metacercaria, a young fluke curled up in a round cyst.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Fasciola hepatica, the sheep liver fluke, is a flat, leaf-shaped worm up to 30 mm long and 15 mm wide that lives in the bile ducts. It holds on with two suckers, feeds through a gut that ends blindly, and is a hermaphrodite, with branched testes and a branched ovary in one body. Its egg, 130 to 150 µm long, is passed unembryonated; in water a miracidium hatches from it and enters a snail, where sporocysts and rediae multiply into cercariae, which leave the snail and encyst on water plants as metacercariae, the infective form.

Simplified: not to scale: the adult, up to 30 mm long, drawn beside forms well under a millimetre, each about the same size; the adult drawn from its ventral side as if cleared, so the organs show through: the yolk glands and the gut in fact overlap and hide each other, and the nervous and excretory systems are left out; the branches of the gut, the testes and the ovary drawn fewer and simpler than they are; the oviduct, the ootype, the yolk reservoir and Mehlis' gland drawn as one small knot, and the two vasa deferentia as one duct; the miracidium, the sporocyst and the redia drawn with their main parts only; two generations of rediae can come before the cercariae, and the snail's tissues are left out; coloured by organ system, as a teaching drawing is, not as the fluke looks: alive it is grey-brown, and a stained whole mount is shades of one stain.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Fascioliasis. Last reviewed 2 May 2019.
  2. Australian Society for Parasitology. Para-site, an interactive resource dedicated to parasitology: Fasciola.
  3. Hanna R. Fasciola hepatica: histology of the reproductive organs and differential effects of triclabendazole on drug-sensitive and drug-resistant fluke isolates and on flukes from selected field cases. Pathogens. 2015;4(3):431–456.
  4. Mas-Coma S, Valero MA, Bargues MD. Human and animal fascioliasis: origins and worldwide evolving scenario. Clin Microbiol Rev. 2022;35(4):e00088-19.
Fasciola hepatica: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of Fasciola hepatica, the sheep liver fluke. Across the top, a pale panel for sheep and cattle, its main definitive hosts, with a sheep: the adult flukes live in their bile ducts and lay eggs. Down the left, on the white page outside, the eggs are passed in the faeces unembryonated and in fresh water a miracidium forms in about 2 weeks. The miracidium hatches, swims and enters a pond snail, Galba truncatula, the intermediate host, in an amber panel: inside it a sporocyst makes rediae and the rediae make cercariae. The cercariae leave the snail and encyst on water plants as metacercariae, the infective stage. Sheep eat them with grass. Along the foot, the patient's panel: metacercariae swallowed on watercress excyst in the duodenum and the young flukes cross the gut wall; they burrow through the liver, the acute phase; after 3 to 4 months they settle as adults in the bile ducts, the chronic phase, and their eggs pass in the faeces.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Fasciola needs a pond snail as well as a grazing animal. Eggs passed by sheep, cattle or people hatch in water into miracidia, which multiply in the snail as sporocysts and rediae into cercariae. These encyst on water plants as metacercariae, and a person is infected by eating them on watercress or other raw greens. The young flukes burrow through the gut wall and the liver before settling in the bile ducts.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; one snail drawn for all of Fasciola's lymnaeid hosts, and one generation of rediae where there can be two; the stages inside the gut and the liver drawn as two steps; infection from water carrying metacercariae, and flukes straying to other organs, only told in words.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Fascioliasis. Last reviewed 2 May 2019.
  2. Australian Society for Parasitology. Para-site, an interactive resource dedicated to parasitology: Fasciola.
  3. Mas-Coma S, Valero MA, Bargues MD. Human and animal fascioliasis: origins and worldwide evolving scenario. Clin Microbiol Rev. 2022;35(4):e00088-19.
Dicrocoelium dendriticum
On the left, an adult Dicrocoelium dendriticum seen from its ventral side: a slender lance, pointed at both ends and widest a little behind the middle. At its tip the small oral sucker, behind it the pharynx, and close behind that the larger ventral sucker. The gut forks in front of the ventral sucker into two plain caeca, without branches, that run back along the sides. Just behind the ventral sucker lie the two lobed testes, one a little behind and beside the other, with the small cirrus sac in front of the ventral sucker; behind the testes the small ovary. Small yolk glands lie in the sides of the middle of the body. The uterus, full of eggs that darken as they ripen, fills the hind part of the body in loops and runs forward between the testes to the genital pore. On the right, its forms outside the sheep: a small, dark, lopsided egg with a lid, holding its miracidium; a daughter sporocyst, a slender sac full of cercariae; a slime ball, a mass of cercariae in mucus; and a metacercaria, a young fluke in a cyst.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Dicrocoelium dendriticum, the lancet fluke, is a slender fluke 6 to 10 mm long that lives in the bile ducts of sheep and cattle. Its organs lie in a different order from those of Fasciola: the testes in front, just behind the ventral sucker, the ovary behind them and the uterus filling the hind part. Its egg, 35 to 45 µm long and dark brown, already holds its miracidium when it is passed; a land snail eats it, cercariae leave the snail in slime balls, and an ant that eats one carries the metacercariae.

Simplified: not to scale: the adult, 6 to 10 mm long, drawn beside forms well under a millimetre; the adult drawn from its ventral side as if cleared, so the organs show through; the nervous and excretory systems are left out, and the place and shape of the testes, the ovary and the yolk glands vary from fluke to fluke; the uterus drawn with fewer loops than it has, and the seminal vesicle and the oviduct left out; the mother sporocyst left out, and the cercariae in the sporocyst and the slime ball drawn few and simple; a slime ball holds thousands.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Dicrocoeliasis. Last reviewed 16 August 2019.
  2. Ballweber LR. Dicrocoelium dendriticum in ruminants. MSD Veterinary Manual, 2021.
  3. Macko JK, Štefančíková A. A peculiar finding of trematodes of the genus Dicrocoelium (Dicrocoeliidae, Trematoda) from Turdus pilaris L. (Passeriformes) in Slovakia. Helminthologia. 1996;33(1):31–35.
  4. Chai JY, Jung BK. General overview of the current status of human foodborne trematodiasis. Parasitology. 2022;149(10):1262–1285.
Dicrocoelium dendriticum: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of Dicrocoelium dendriticum, the lancet fluke. Across the top, a pale panel for sheep and cattle, its definitive hosts, with a sheep: the adult flukes live in their bile ducts and lay eggs. Down the left, the eggs are passed in the faeces already holding a miracidium, and a land snail eats them. In the snail's amber panel, the first intermediate host: the miracidium hatches and becomes a mother sporocyst, which makes daughter sporocysts, which make cercariae. The cercariae leave the snail in slime balls, on the white page, and an ant eats one. In the ant's panel, the second intermediate host, on the right: the cercariae become metacercariae in its body cavity, and 1 or 2 in its brain make it cling to the tips of the grass when it is cool. A sheep eats the ant with the grass. Down from the ant, into the patient's panel along the foot: a person who swallows an infected ant by accident; the metacercariae excyst in the small intestine and the young flukes climb the bile duct, where they settle as adults, whose eggs pass in the faeces. A note in the patient's panel: eggs in the stool after eating infected liver are only passing through.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Dicrocoelium needs two intermediate hosts, both on dry land: a land snail, which eats the eggs and sheds cercariae in slime balls, and an ant, which eats the slime balls. Infected ants climb to the tips of the grass and are eaten by grazing sheep and cattle. People are infected only by swallowing an infected ant by accident, which is why human infection is rare.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; one snail drawn for the many land snails, and one ant for the many ants, that can carry it; the slime ball drawn as a stage of its own, though it is a mass of cercariae; the young flukes' climb up the bile duct drawn as one step.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Dicrocoeliasis. Last reviewed 16 August 2019.
  2. Ballweber LR. Dicrocoelium dendriticum in ruminants. MSD Veterinary Manual, 2021.
  3. Martín-Vega D, Garbout A, Ahmed F, et al. 3D virtual histology at the host/parasite interface: visualisation of the master manipulator, Dicrocoelium dendriticum, in the brain of its ant host. Sci Rep. 2018;8:8587.
  4. Chai JY, Jung BK. General overview of the current status of human foodborne trematodiasis. Parasitology. 2022;149(10):1262–1285.
Opisthorchis felineus
On the left, an adult Opisthorchis felineus seen from its ventral side: a slender lance, narrow in front and rounded behind. At its tip the oral sucker, behind it the pharynx, and about a fifth of the way back the slightly smaller ventral sucker, with the genital pore just in front of it. The gut forks into two plain caeca, without branches, that run back along the sides to near the hind end. The uterus, full of small eggs, winds forward in transverse loops between the caeca from the ovary to the genital pore. Seven bunches of small yolk glands lie down each side of the middle of the body, outside the caeca. The small ovary lies on the midline at the start of the hind third, with the large round seminal receptacle behind it, and behind them, near the hind end, two lobed testes, one diagonally behind the other: the front one with four lobes, the hind one with five. On the right, its forms outside the definitive host: a small egg with a lid set in a rim and a knob at the far end, holding its miracidium; a redia, a long sac with a mouth and young cercariae inside; a cercaria with a long tail; and a metacercaria, an oval cyst holding a young fluke with a dark ring-shaped excretory bladder.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Opisthorchis felineus, the cat liver fluke, is a slender fluke 7 to 12 mm long that lives in the bile ducts of cats, dogs, foxes and people who eat raw fish. Its name means "testes behind": its two lobed testes lie near the hind end, behind the ovary. Its egg, 19 to 30 µm long, holds its miracidium when it is passed; a Bithynia snail eats it, and the cercariae that leave the snail encyst in the muscle of carp-family fish as metacercariae, the infective form.

Simplified: not to scale: the adult, 7 to 12 mm long, drawn beside forms well under a millimetre; the adult drawn from its ventral side as if cleared, so the organs show through; the excretory and nervous systems are left out; the uterus drawn with fewer loops than it has; the seminal vesicle, the oviduct and Mehlis' gland left out, and one male duct drawn from both testes; the sporocyst left out, and the cercaria drawn with a plain tail, without the fin it swims with.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Opisthorchiasis. Last reviewed 20 February 2018.
  2. Kiyan VS, Bulashev AK, Katokhin AV. Opisthorchis felineus and Metorchis bilis metacercariae in cyprinid fish Leuciscus idus in Nura-Sarysu River, Kazakhstan. Korean J Parasitol. 2018;56(3):267–274.
  3. Mehlhorn H. Opisthorchis felineus (syn. tenuicollis). In: Mehlhorn H, editor. Encyclopedia of Parasitology. Springer, 2016.
Opisthorchis felineus: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of Opisthorchis felineus, the cat liver fluke. Across the top, a pale panel for cats and dogs, its definitive hosts, with a cat: the adult flukes live in their bile ducts and lay eggs. Down the left, the eggs are passed in the faeces already holding a miracidium, and a Bithynia snail eats them in fresh water. In the snail's amber panel, the first intermediate host: the miracidium hatches and becomes a sporocyst, which makes rediae, which make cercariae. The cercariae leave the snail and swim, on the white page, to a fish of the carp family and bore into it. In the fish's panel, the second intermediate host, on the right: they become metacercariae in its muscle or under its scales. A cat eats the fish raw. Down from the fish, into the patient's panel along the foot: a person who eats the fish raw or undercooked; the metacercariae excyst in the duodenum and the young flukes enter the bile duct, where they settle as adults and lay eggs after 3 to 4 weeks, which pass in the faeces.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Opisthorchis needs two intermediate hosts, both in fresh water: a Bithynia snail, which eats the eggs and sheds cercariae, and a fish of the carp family, in whose muscle the cercariae encyst. Cats, dogs, foxes and people are infected by eating the fish raw or undercooked; the young flukes go straight up the bile duct from the duodenum.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; one cat drawn for the cats, dogs, foxes and other fish-eating mammals, one Bithynia for the snails and one fish for the many carp-family fish that can carry it; the young flukes' climb through the ampulla of Vater drawn as one step; the adults also live in the pancreatic duct.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Opisthorchiasis. Last reviewed 20 February 2018.
  2. Chai JY, Jung BK. General overview of the current status of human foodborne trematodiasis. Parasitology. 2022;149(10):1262–1285.
  3. Kiyan VS, Bulashev AK, Katokhin AV. Opisthorchis felineus and Metorchis bilis metacercariae in cyprinid fish Leuciscus idus in Nura-Sarysu River, Kazakhstan. Korean J Parasitol. 2018;56(3):267–274.
Schistosoma, the blood flukes
On the left, a pair of adult blood flukes, drawn after Schistosoma mansoni from their ventral side. The male is short and stout: at his front end a funnel-shaped oral sucker and just behind it a large ventral sucker; behind that his flat body is broad, and its sides roll under to make a long groove, the gynaecophoric canal, which runs to his hind end. Small tubercles stud his back and show along the rolled sides. His gut forks at the ventral sucker into two caeca that run back beside the canal and join again in the front half of his body, then run on as one long caecum to near his hind end. A row of small, round testes lies behind the ventral sucker. The female is longer and thread-like. She lies in his canal, her front end out of it to the side and her hind end out behind him. Her suckers are small; her gut is dark with the pigment of digested blood, and its caeca join about a third of the way back. A short uterus holding one egg runs forward from her long ovary, which lies in her front half, and small yolk glands line her hind two thirds. On the right, at the top, the eggs of the three main species at one scale, none with a lid, each holding a miracidium: S. mansoni's long, with a spine on its side near the hind end; S. haematobium's with a spine at its hind end; S. japonicum's smaller and rounder, with only a small spine. Below them a miracidium, covered in cilia, and a cercaria with a forked tail.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Schistosomes, unlike other flukes, have separate sexes: the stout male carries the longer, slender female in a groove along his body, the gynaecophoric canal, and they live together for years in the veins round the gut or the bladder. Their eggs have no lid but a spine whose place tells the species apart: on the side near the hind end in S. mansoni, at the hind end in S. haematobium, and small in S. japonicum.

Simplified: not to scale: the adults, 10 to 20 mm long, drawn beside forms well under a millimetre; only the three eggs are drawn at one scale; the pair drawn from the ventral side as if cleared, so the male's organs show through his rolled sides; the excretory and nervous systems are left out; the female's front end drawn leaving the canal at its side, a little behind its front opening; the male's seminal vesicle and the female's oviduct, ootype and vitelline duct left out; seven testes drawn; the pair drawn as S. mansoni; the other species differ in the number of testes, the place of the ovary and the number of eggs in the uterus.

6 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Schistosomiasis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Australian Society for Parasitology. Para-site, an interactive resource dedicated to parasitology: Schistosoma.
  3. Kincaid-Smith J, Tracey A, de Carvalho Augusto R, et al. Morphological and genomic characterisation of the Schistosoma hybrid infecting humans in Europe reveals admixture between Schistosoma haematobium and Schistosoma bovis. PLoS Negl Trop Dis. 2021;15(12):e0010062.
  4. Morona D. Differentiation of various species of Schistosoma, after Manson’s Tropical Diseases, Table III.2. Teaching handout, Department of Parasitology, Catholic University of Health and Allied Sciences, Bugando, 2012.
  5. Pichon R, Lotkowska ME, Bulathsinghalage JLD, et al. In vitro sexual dimorphism establishment in schistosomes. eLife. 2026;15:RP111066.
  6. Schistosoma mansoni. Wikipedia, after Rey L. Parasitologia. Rio de Janeiro: Guanabara Koogan, 1991.
Schistosoma: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the schistosomes, the blood flukes. Across the top, a pale panel for the patient, the definitive host, read from right to left: schistosomula, which have shed their tails in the skin and travel by the veins through the lungs; young flukes, which grow in the portal veins of the liver and pair there; and adult pairs, which move to the veins of the gut, in S. mansoni and S. japonicum, or of the bladder, in S. haematobium, and lay eggs for years. Down the left, on the white page, the eggs cross the gut or bladder wall and leave in the faeces or the urine, each holding a miracidium; in fresh water they hatch, and the miracidia swim into a snail. In the snail's amber panel, the intermediate host: the miracidium becomes a mother sporocyst, which makes daughter sporocysts. Cercariae with forked tails leave the snail, on the right, and swim for 2 or 3 days; they bore through the skin of a person in the water, up into the patient's panel.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Schistosomes need only one intermediate host, a freshwater snail, and no second: the cercariae that leave the snail bore straight through the skin of people who wade, wash, swim or work in the water. The adults live as pairs in the veins for years, and the disease comes from their eggs, which lodge in the gut, the bladder and the liver.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the patient and the snail drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; one map for the three main species, which differ in their snail, the veins the adults live in and whether the eggs leave in the faeces or the urine; one ramshorn snail, Biomphalaria, drawn for all their snails; the way from the skin through the heart and lungs to the liver drawn as one step; the animal reservoirs of S. japonicum left out.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Schistosomiasis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Kumar and Clark’s Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 20, Infectious disease; helminths, p. 574, and schistosomiasis, pp. 578–579.
A small airway, healthy and in COPD
Two round fields of lung seen through a magnifier, side by side. In each, a small airway, a bronchiole, is cut across in the middle, surrounded by alveoli, the white air spaces between thin pink alveolar walls that carry small red capillaries. On the left, the healthy airway: a round open lumen, lined by a ring of columnar peach-coloured cells with amber cilia that beat, two violet goblet cells among them, a thin pale wall, a thin ring of rose smooth muscle, and alveolar walls attached to it all round. On the right, the airway in COPD: its lumen narrowed and folded and partly filled by a violet plug of mucus, many goblet cells in its lining and fewer cilia, a thicker wall with pale blue white blood cells and green scar fibres in it, and the alveoli round it broken into larger spaces with stubs of torn walls, so fewer walls tether the airway. Two soot-laden macrophages lie in the enlarged spaces.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Small airways, under 2 mm across, are a major site of the obstruction in COPD. Smoke inflames them: goblet cells multiply and mucus plugs the lumen, white cells and scar thicken the wall, and the alveolar walls round them break down, so fewer remain to hold the airway open when the patient breathes out.

Simplified: not to scale: the airway's wall, the healthy one especially, drawn thicker than life so its layers read; far fewer alveoli, cells and capillaries than a real field holds, and every capillary drawn cut across; the lining drawn as one ring of columnar ciliated cells; the club cells and basal cells left out, and the alveolar walls drawn without their type I and type II cells; a few cilia on each cell instead of about 200; COPD's changes, which are patchy, all drawn in one field and in one airway; the three kinds of white cell drawn as small, simple cells, and lymphoid follicles left out; the branch of the pulmonary artery that runs beside every bronchiole, the thin mucus layer of the healthy airway, and the squamous cells smoke can turn the lining into, left out; the cilia's beat played far slower than life.

5 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: the airways and alveoli (pp. 930–931), and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (pp. 955–956).
  2. Hogg JC et al. The nature of small-airway obstruction in chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. N Engl J Med. 2004;350(26):2645-53.
  3. Leopold PL et al. Smoking is associated with shortened airway cilia. PLoS One. 2009;4(12):e8157.
  4. Ochs M et al. The number of alveoli in the human lung. Am J Respir Crit Care Med. 2004;169(1):120-4.
  5. Saetta M et al. Loss of alveolar attachments in smokers: a morphometric correlate of lung function impairment. Am Rev Respir Dis. 1985;132(4):894-900.
How neutrophils leave the blood
A small vein, a venule, cut along its length. Its upper wall runs across the middle: a row of flat peach endothelial cells on a pale green basement membrane, the tissue above on the white page with a few faint collagen fibres, and the lumen below, a pale wash of plasma with red cells flowing in it. In the tissue at the top a large macrophage, which has swallowed one bacterium, gives off pink cytokines towards the vessel, and a clump of pale khaki rod-shaped bacteria sits at the upper right. Along the wall, from left to right, the steps add a neutrophil each: one rolling, small violet sugars on its surface caught by dark green selectins hanging from the endothelium; one meeting pink chemokines on the endothelium's surface, its light green integrins standing up; one flattened against the wall, its integrins holding deep green ICAM-1; one half through a gap between two endothelial cells, its nucleus going first; and one in the tissue, crawling along a trail of pink chemokines towards the bacteria. Step 1 of 5: Rolling. Histamine, and TNF and IL-1 from the macrophage, have switched on the endothelium: its selectins catch sialyl-Lewis X on a passing neutrophil, let go and catch again, and the cell rolls slowly along the wall.

Step 1 of 5Rolling. Histamine, and TNF and IL-1 from the macrophage, have switched on the endothelium: its selectins catch sialyl-Lewis X on a passing neutrophil, let go and catch again, and the cell rolls slowly along the wall.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

White cells leave the blood in the venules just after the capillaries, where the flow is slow and the wall thin. The four steps are set by different molecules, so each can fail on its own: without the β2 integrins (leucocyte adhesion deficiency) neutrophils roll but never stop.

Simplified: not to scale: the molecules are drawn hugely larger than life, the cells somewhat smaller beside the vessel; one neutrophil drawn at each stage, as textbooks draw the cascade, where it is one cell going through every stage in turn, and many cells at once; L-selectin on the white cell, and the endothelial ligands it binds, left out; a few of each molecule; VCAM-1, PECAM-1, the JAMs and the chemokine receptors left out, and only one integrin drawn for the two kinds; only the route between two cells drawn; a few cells cross through an endothelial cell; the steps take seconds to minutes each, and the crawl to the infection far longer; monocytes, which follow over a day or two by the same steps, left out.

4 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: neutrophils (pp. 44–45) and cell migration, Fig. 3.11 (pp. 53–54).
  2. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology, An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson, 2019. Chapter 24, The immune system (pp. 759–767).
  3. Ley K, Laudanna C, Cybulsky MI, Nourshargh S. Getting to the site of inflammation: the leukocyte adhesion cascade updated. Nat Rev Immunol. 2007;7(9):678-89.
  4. Tvaroška I, Selvaraj C, Koča J. Selectins: the two Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde faces of adhesion molecules. A review. Molecules. 2020;25(12):2835.
The structure of an antibody
One IgG drawn as a Y on a pale plate. Two arms rise from a short stem, joined at a thin hinge. Each arm is two rows of two green ovals, the domains: along the inside of the arm the heavy chain in the protein green, on the outside the light chain in a paler, yellower green. At the tip of each arm six small deep green beads, three on each variable domain, mark the hypervariable loops. Below the arms the two heavy chains run down as thin strands, joined across by two short deep bars, the disulfide bonds, into the stem: two pairs of green ovals, CH2 above and CH3 below, with small violet sugar beads between the two CH2s. A short bar also joins each light chain to its heavy chain near the base of the arm. In the second step a pale khaki bacterial surface fills the top, and the arms swing up to hold a knob on it with their tips. In the third, papain has cut the hinge: the two arms drift apart as Fab fragments and the stem drops away as Fc, keeping the hinge's bonds. In the fourth, pepsin has cut below the bonds: the two arms stay joined as one F(ab′)₂ and the stem is broken into small green pieces. Step 1 of 4: Four chains, twelve domains. Two heavy and two light chains, each pair identical, joined by disulfide bonds into a Y. Each chain is a row of domains of the same fold: the variable ones at the tips, the constant ones below.

Step 1 of 4Four chains, twelve domains. Two heavy and two light chains, each pair identical, joined by disulfide bonds into a Y. Each chain is a row of domains of the same fold: the variable ones at the tips, the constant ones below.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Each arm binds one epitope with the six loops at its tip; the stem, the Fc, is what complement and the receptors of phagocytes bind. Enzymes that cut the hinge show the plan: papain frees two binding arms and a stem, pepsin keeps the arms joined.

Simplified: not to scale: a bacterium is many times wider than the antibody that holds it; every domain drawn as a plain oval of one size; each is a sandwich of two β-sheets; the hypervariable loops drawn as beads, three to a domain; the hinge drawn as a thin strand, with two bonds as in IgG1; IgG3's is far longer, with up to eleven; one simple chain of sugar beads on each CH2; drawn flat; the real molecule is twisted, its arms out of one plane; the cuts drawn at one place each; the enzymes' exact sites vary.

6 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: immunoglobulins, Fig. 3.6 and Box 3.10 (pp. 49–50).
  2. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology, An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson, 2019. Chapter 24, antibodies, Fig. 24.7 (p. 764).
  3. Chiu ML, Goulet DR, Teplyakov A, Gilliland GL. Antibody structure and function: the basis for engineering therapeutics. Antibodies. 2019;8(4):55.
  4. Vidarsson G, Dekkers G, Rispens T. IgG subclasses and allotypes: from structure to effector functions. Front Immunol. 2014;5:520.
  5. Antibody structure and classification. Molecular Probes Handbook, Thermo Fisher Scientific.
  6. Herráez A. Cleavage of IgG with proteases. Biomodel, Universidad de Alcalá.
What antibodies do once bound
Three scenes on a pale plate, each in one step. In the first a round teal-green virus, a red coil of genome beaded with protein inside it, is ringed by six small green Y-shaped antibodies, each holding two of the virus's spikes with the tips of its arms, their stems pointing out. Below, the curved top of a peach body cell carries a row of deep green receptors, and the coated virus hangs clear of them. In the second a khaki rod-shaped bacterium is covered all round by twelve small antibodies, arms on the bacterium and stems out. A large pale blue macrophage below has closed a cup round it, its two arms reaching up past the bacterium's ends; small deep green receptors on the inside of the cup hold the stems of the antibodies they touch. The macrophage has a bean-shaped nucleus and a few pink lysosomes. In the third the khaki bacterium fills the top, its membrane an amber band along its lower edge. Below it hangs one IgM: two units at the sides lie flat, their stems meeting in a central disc, a dark green J chain at the front of the ring, their arm pairs bent up to small knobs on the surface, and a third unit's arms rise between them from behind. Under the disc C1q holds on with six deep green heads, their stalks gathered into one stem. Small light green C3b ovals lie on the surface round it, and at each side two deep green pillars cross the membrane, the walls of a pore. Step 1 of 3: Neutralisation. Antibodies on the virus's spikes keep it from binding the receptor it enters by, so it cannot infect a cell. Antibody against a toxin works the same way.

Step 1 of 3Neutralisation. Antibodies on the virus's spikes keep it from binding the receptor it enters by, so it cannot infect a cell. Antibody against a toxin works the same way.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

An antibody's arms bind; its stem decides what follows. Bound to a virus or a toxin, the arms alone can stop it. Bound to a bacterium, the stems are handles for phagocytes' Fc receptors and, in clusters, for C1q, which starts complement.

Simplified: not to scale, and each scene at its own: a bacterium is many times wider than the antibodies on it; the virus drawn small and simple, a dozen spikes; a real one carries many more; the Fcγ receptors drawn as one kind, a ball on a stalk; there are several, with different jobs; IgM side on, three of its five units in view, the others behind; IgM drawn with IgG's thin hinge; in its place it has a whole domain; C1r, C1s and the steps between C1 and C3 left out; one membrane stands for the bacterium's envelope, which in a Gram-negative bacterium has two.

7 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: complement, opsonisation (Fig. 3.3, Box 3.4) and immunoglobulins.
  2. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology, An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson, 2019. Chapter 24, complement (Fig. 24.6) and antibody functions.
  3. Forthal DN. Functions of antibodies. Microbiol Spectr. 2014;2(4):AID-0019-2014.
  4. Gillis C, Gouel-Chéron A, Jönsson F, Bruhns P. Contribution of human FcγRs to disease with evidence from human polymorphisms and transgenic animal studies. Front Immunol. 2014;5:254.
  5. Heesterbeek DAC, Bardoel BW, Parsons ES, et al. Bacterial killing by complement requires membrane attack complex formation via surface-bound C5 convertases. EMBO J. 2019;38(4):e99852.
  6. V'kovski P, Kratzel A, Steiner S, Stalder H, Thiel V. Coronavirus biology and replication: implications for SARS-CoV-2. Nat Rev Microbiol. 2021;19(3):155–170.
  7. Keyt BA, Baliga R, Sinclair AM, Carroll SF, Peterson MS. Structure, function, and therapeutic use of IgM antibodies. Antibodies. 2020;9(4):53.
Cells armed by antibody
Two scenes on a pale plate, one in each step. In the first a large peach body cell fills the top: it has a lavender nucleus and three small red coils of new viral genome, beaded with protein, inside, and teal-green viral proteins stand on stalks from its lower surface. Five small green Y-shaped IgG hang from them, each holding two viral proteins with the tips of its arms, stems down. Below, a broad pale blue NK cell presses its flat top against the stems, small deep green CD16 receptors gripping each one. Pink granules gather at the top of the NK cell; two have opened onto the gap, small light green granzyme dots cross it, and at each of those places two short deep green pillars of perforin make a pore through the infected cell's membrane. In the second a large oval pale blue mast cell is packed with pale yellow granules, each with a pink core, round a blue nucleus. Seven green IgE stand round its top on short deep green FcεRI receptors, arms out. Deep green lumpy allergen molecules float above; two sit between neighbouring IgE, held by the arms of both. At the sides of the cell four granules have opened at the membrane, and pink histamine dots spill out of them. Step 1 of 2: NK cells kill coated cells (ADCC). IgG binds viral proteins on an infected cell. CD16 on an NK cell grips the stems, and the NK cell empties perforin and granzymes onto the cell, which dies.

Step 1 of 2NK cells kill coated cells (ADCC). IgG binds viral proteins on an infected cell. CD16 on an NK cell grips the stems, and the NK cell empties perforin and granzymes onto the cell, which dies.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Fc receptors let a cell borrow an antibody's aim. An NK cell can kill an infected cell that IgG has coated; a mast cell, already wearing IgE, empties its granules within minutes of an allergen joining two of them.

Simplified: not to scale, and each scene at its own; the gap between the two cells drawn wide, to show the antibodies in it; granzymes drawn as loose dots; they leave the granule bound to other proteins; only the IgE round the top of the mast cell drawn; it wears them all over; IgE drawn with IgG's thin hinge; in its place it has a whole domain; granule contents drawn as a pink core; each holds many mediators besides histamine; eosinophils, basophils and macrophages, which also kill or release through Fc receptors, left out.

6 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: natural killer cells.
  2. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology, An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson, 2019. Chapter 24, antibody functions and cytotoxic cells.
  3. V'kovski P, Kratzel A, Steiner S, Stalder H, Thiel V. Coronavirus biology and replication: implications for SARS-CoV-2. Nat Rev Microbiol. 2021;19(3):155–170.
  4. Gillis C, Gouel-Chéron A, Jönsson F, Bruhns P. Contribution of human FcγRs to disease with evidence from human polymorphisms and transgenic animal studies. Front Immunol. 2014;5:254.
  5. Galli SJ, Tsai M. IgE and mast cells in allergic disease. Nat Med. 2012;18(5):693–704.
  6. Keyt BA, Baliga R, Sinclair AM, Carroll SF, Peterson MS. Structure, function, and therapeutic use of IgM antibodies. Antibodies. 2020;9(4):53.
How IgA crosses the gut lining
A section through the gut lining on a pale plate. Across the top lies the lumen, a pale violet wash of mucus with khaki rod-shaped bacteria in it. Across the middle stand tall peach epithelial cells side by side, a fringe of microvilli on top, a small dark tight junction where neighbours meet just below it, and a lavender nucleus low in each. Below them is the pale lamina propria. In it, at the lower left, a pale blue plasma cell with its nucleus to one side and violet arcs of rough ER, and near it two small IgA dimers: two green Y-shaped units joined stem to stem, a dark green J chain between them. On the base of each epithelial cell hangs a short string of three light green beads, the receptor pIgR; under the middle cell one holds a dimer, its outer part, five light green ovals, spread across the dimer's face where the J chain joins the stems. In the second step a pale yellow vesicle has appeared in the middle cell, carrying a dimer up on its receptor, the receptor's outer part across it. In the third a dimer has reached the lumen, the receptor's outer part still across it as the secretory component, each of its two units holding a bacterium, and a short stub of the receptor is left in the cell's top membrane. Step 1 of 3: Binding. A plasma cell secretes dimeric IgA. pIgR on the base of an epithelial cell binds a dimer, its outer part gripping the J chain and the stems beside it.

Step 1 of 3Binding. A plasma cell secretes dimeric IgA. pIgR on the base of an epithelial cell binds a dimer, its outer part gripping the J chain and the stems beside it.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The epithelium carries IgA across itself. Plasma cells under it make dimers; pIgR takes them from the base to the top, and its cut outer part stays on as the secretory component, which helps the IgA last in the gut.

Simplified: not to scale: the antibodies are drawn many times larger against the cells and bacteria; pIgR drawn as a stalk of three beads, its five outer domains as ovals once they lie across a dimer; a waiting receptor's outer domains, folded together, are not drawn; the dimer drawn flat and straight; its two units are bent and tilted against each other; one dimer drawn at each stage of the way, side by side, though in the gut many cross each cell at once; the basement membrane under the epithelium left out; the mucus drawn as one even layer.

3 sources
  1. de Sousa-Pereira P, Woof JM. IgA: structure, function, and developability. Antibodies. 2019;8(4):57.
  2. Kumar Bharathkar S, Parker BW, Malyutin AG, et al. The structures of secretory and dimeric immunoglobulin A. eLife. 2020;9:e56098.
  3. Keyt BA, Baliga R, Sinclair AM, Carroll SF, Peterson MS. Structure, function, and therapeutic use of IgM antibodies. Antibodies. 2020;9(4):53.
MHC class I and class II
Three views on a pale plate. In the first a peach body cell fills the bottom, a band of amber membrane along its top. On it stands MHC class I, seen side on with its groove running into the page: two broad green domains side by side at the top, each with a round helix end at its inner shoulder, and between them, in the notch, a short teal-green peptide seen end on. Below the right one a smaller green domain, α3, runs on as a strand down through the membrane into the cell; below the left one a pale lime domain, β2-microglobulin, rests beside it without reaching the membrane. In the second a pale blue dendritic cell takes the bottom, and on it MHC class II: a green chain on the left and a lime chain on the right, each with a top domain and one below it, both running down through the membrane, a khaki peptide in the notch between the top domains. In the third both grooves are seen from above, class I at the top and class II below. Each is a rounded floor with a coiled helix along either side. Class I's floor and both its helices are green, its helices drawn in towards each other at the ends, where two green knobs close the groove round a row of nine teal-green residues. Class II's floor is half green and half lime, a green helix along its far side and a lime one along its near side, and its row of fifteen khaki residues runs out past both ends. Step 1 of 3: MHC class I. A heavy chain of three domains, α1, α2 and α3, crosses the membrane, β2-microglobulin bound beside α3, and the peptide sits between α1 and α2.

Step 1 of 3MHC class I. A heavy chain of three domains, α1, α2 and α3, crosses the membrane, β2-microglobulin bound beside α3, and the peptide sits between α1 and α2.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Both classes hold a peptide between two helices on a floor of β-sheet. Class I's groove is closed, so it takes peptides of 8 to 10 amino acids, from proteins made in the cell; class II's is open, so longer peptides, from what the cell has taken in, hang out of its ends.

Simplified: not to scale: the molecules drawn larger than the cell they stand on, the grooves larger again; in the side views the groove runs into the page, so the peptide is seen end on; the view from above shows its length; each groove's floor, a sheet of eight β-strands, drawn plain; class II's split at its middle to show that each chain gives half; each amino acid a bead, without its side chain; the pockets for the anchor residues not drawn, and the knobs at class I's ends standing for the conserved residues that close it; the sugars on the MHC molecules left out; the tails inside the cell drawn short.

4 sources
  1. Janeway CA Jr, Travers P, Walport M, Shlomchik MJ. Immunobiology, 5th edition. Garland Science, 2001. Sections 3-13 and 3-14.
  2. Wieczorek M, Abualrous ET, Sticht J, et al. Major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I and MHC class II proteins: conformational plasticity in antigen presentation. Front Immunol. 2017;8:292.
  3. Rock KL, Reits E, Neefjes J. Present yourself! By MHC class I and MHC class II molecules. Trends Immunol. 2016;37(11):724–737.
  4. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: the major histocompatibility complex.
How a T cell reads a peptide
Four scenes on a pale plate, one in each step, each with a pale blue T cell across the top and another cell across the bottom, their amber membranes facing across a gap. In the middle the T-cell receptor hangs from the T cell, two chains of two rounded domains each, the left one a brighter deep green, the right one forest green, small beads at their tips resting on an MHC molecule standing on the lower cell with a peptide in the notch at its top. Beside the receptor four small light green CD3 domains stand on the T cell's membrane, and light green tails run up from them and from under the receptor into the T cell, each with dark marks and small orange phosphate beads. In the first the lower cell is a pale blue dendritic cell and the MHC molecule is class II, with a khaki peptide; to the right a row of four forest green CD4 domains slants down from the T cell to touch its lower right domain, and its tail inside the T cell holds a green two-lobed Lck beside the CD3 tails. In the second the lower cell is a peach body cell and the MHC molecule is class I, with a teal-green peptide, and two forest green CD8 heads on long stalks touch its lower right domain, Lck on one tail. In the third, at the left, a lime CD28 head on a stalk from the T cell meets a green CD80 or CD86 of two domains on the dendritic cell, and at the right a light green LFA-1, two long legs and an open head, meets a forest green ICAM-1, a row of five small domains. In the fourth a deeper green CTLA-4 holds that CD80 or CD86 instead, CD28 hangs free beside it with nothing to bind, and at the right a forest green PD-1 meets a lime PD-L1. Step 1 of 4: A CD4 T cell reads class II. The receptor's loops touch the peptide and the helices, CD4 binds the β2 domain, and its Lck phosphorylates the ITAMs on the CD3 tails.

Step 1 of 4A CD4 T cell reads class II. The receptor's loops touch the peptide and the helices, CD4 binds the β2 domain, and its Lck phosphorylates the ITAMs on the CD3 tails.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Signal one is the receptor reading its peptide on MHC, with CD3 and the co-receptor's Lck passing the signal in. A naive T cell also needs signal two, CD28 on CD80 or CD86; once active it makes CTLA-4 and PD-1, the brakes.

Simplified: not to scale: the molecules drawn far larger than the cells; one receptor complex drawn; a T cell meets its peptide with many at once; each ITAM, a pair of tyrosines, drawn as one mark with one phosphate; CD28, CTLA-4, CD80 and others pair up on the membrane; each drawn as a single chain; CD8 drawn as two heads on long stalks; how they sit on α3 simplified; LFA-1, an α and a β chain, drawn as two legs and a head; each step draws only the molecules it is about; the others are still there.

4 sources
  1. Mariuzza RA, Agnihotri P, Orban J. The structural basis of T-cell receptor (TCR) activation: an enduring enigma. J Biol Chem. 2020;295(4):914–925.
  2. Janeway CA Jr, Travers P, Walport M, Shlomchik MJ. Immunobiology, 5th edition. Garland Science, 2001. Sections 3-12, 3-13, 3-18, 6-8, 8-4 and 8-5.
  3. Chen L, Flies DB. Molecular mechanisms of T cell co-stimulation and co-inhibition. Nat Rev Immunol. 2013;13(4):227–242.
  4. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: T-cell activation and immune checkpoints.
The complement pathways
A map of the complement cascade. Across the top, three ways in, each under a small drawing of a rod-shaped bacterium: on the left, in blue, the classical pathway, the bacterium with two Y-shaped antibodies on it, then C1; in the middle, in green, the lectin pathway, the bacterium's sugars held by mannose-binding lectin, then MBL with its MASPs; both arrows join at C4 and C2 being cut, which makes the C3 convertase C4b2a. On the right, in orange, the alternative pathway, a bare bacterial surface with one C3b on it, then factor B and factor D, making the C3 convertase C3bBb. Both convertases point down to the shared steps, in magenta: C3 split into C3a and C3b, a loop from C3b back up to the alternative convertase, then the C5 convertase, C5 split into C5a and C5b, and C5b with C6 to C9 forming the membrane attack complex. Arrows lead out to three effects: opsonisation on the left, beside a bacterium coated in C3b; inflammation below it, from C3a and C5a, beside a neutrophil; and lysis at the bottom right, beside a bacterium with pores in its wall.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Every pathway ends by splitting C3 and C5, so all three share complement's three effects. The alternative pathway also amplifies the other two: each C3b they lay down can start a new alternative convertase.

Simplified: a map of who acts on whom, not a picture of the molecules; the regulators left out: C1 inhibitor, factors H and I, CD55 (DAF) and CD59; the classical convertase given its classic name, C4b2a; some newer texts call the C2 fragment C2b and write C4b2b; C4a, the small fragment of C4, and the C3b breakdown products iC3b and C3d left out; the membrane attack complex drawn as rings in the wall; it holds many C9s; the microbes drawn as small rods, and one antibody, lectin or C3b standing for many.

3 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: complement, Fig. 3.2 and Box 3.4 (p. 44).
  2. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology, An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson, 2019. Chapter 24, The immune system: complement proteins and Fig. 24.6 (p. 763).
  3. Merle NS, Church SE, Fremeaux-Bacchi V, Roumenina LT. Complement system part I: molecular mechanisms of activation and regulation. Front Immunol. 2015;6:262.
The kinds of helper T cell
A map of how a naive helper T cell becomes one of four kinds. At the top, a dendritic cell with long branches touches a small, round naive CD4 T cell. Four arrows fan out from it to four columns, each in its own colour, with what drives each written beside its arrow. On the left, in rose, IL-12 and interferon-γ make a Th1 cell, whose master factor is T-bet; it makes interferon-γ and CD40 ligand, which act on macrophages, drawn with a bacterium in a vacuole, against microbes that live in macrophages. Next, in blue, IL-4 makes a Th2 cell, with GATA3; it makes IL-4, IL-5 and IL-13, which act on eosinophils, mast cells and B cells, the B cells switching to IgE, drawn as an eosinophil with two nuclear lobes, against helminths. Two dashed lines ending in bars, one each way between the Th1 and Th2 chips, show that each holds the other back. Then, in ochre, TGF-β and IL-6, then IL-23, make a Th17 cell, with RORγt; it makes IL-17 and IL-22, which act on neutrophils and epithelia, drawn as a neutrophil, against extracellular bacteria and fungi. On the right, in teal, a dendritic cell and then B cells make a follicular helper cell, Tfh, with Bcl-6; it makes IL-21 and CD40 ligand, which act on B cells in follicles, drawn as a plasma cell giving off antibodies, against most pathogens, through antibody.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

What a helper becomes is set by the cytokines around it while it divides, made mostly by the innate cells that met the microbe first. Each kind then calls in the defence that suits one sort of microbe.

Simplified: a map of who acts on whom, not a picture of the cells; the four kinds drawn as separate fates; in the body they overlap, and some cells change from one kind to another; only the main cytokines that drive each kind; IL-21 can stand in for IL-6, and Th2 cells also need IL-2; only each kind's signature products; Th1 cells also make TNF and IL-2, and Tfh cells make IL-4 later; regulatory T cells, a fifth kind with FOXP3, and rarer kinds such as Th9 and Th22 left out; the help CD4 T cells give CD8 T cells, through dendritic cells, left out; one cell drawn for each column's targets; the B cells a follicular helper helps drawn as the plasma cell many become.

5 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 3, Immunity: Box 3.12 and the T helper subsets (pp. 51–52); allergy (p. 62).
  2. Janeway CA Jr, Travers P, Walport M, Shlomchik MJ. Immunobiology, 5th edition. Garland Science, 2001. Chapter 8, sections 8-13 and 8-26.
  3. Zhu J, Yamane H, Paul WE. Differentiation of effector CD4 T cell populations. Annu Rev Immunol. 2010;28:445–489.
  4. Crotty S. T follicular helper cell biology: a decade of discovery and diseases. Immunity. 2019;50(5):1132–1148.
  5. Mills KHG. IL-17 and IL-17-producing cells in protection versus pathology. Nat Rev Immunol. 2023;23(1):38–54.
How a cytotoxic T cell kills
A cytotoxic T cell, pale periwinkle, on the left, pressed flat against a larger virus-infected cell, peach, on the right, with a narrow cleft between them. First, in the cleft, two T-cell receptors bind class I molecules holding a viral peptide, with LFA-1 gripping ICAM-1 above and below them. The T cell's lytic granules, pink, lie scattered round its large nucleus, and its microtubule-organising centre sits beside the nucleus, away from the contact. The infected cell holds its lavender nucleus, salmon mitochondria and coiled viral genomes. Next, the microtubule-organising centre and the blue Golgi move round the nucleus to the contact, and the granules gather round them. Then the front granule opens into the cleft between the receptors; a perforin pore sits in the infected cell's membrane opposite it, and granzymes pass through it. Then granzymes spread through the infected cell; caspase-3 is switched on, cytochrome c spills from the mitochondria, the nucleus has broken into blue fragments and the outline has begun to bleb. Last, the infected cell has broken into a shrunken body and four small round pieces; the T cell has let go and rounded up, its granules spread out again. Step 1 of 5: Find and hold. The T cell's receptor finds its viral peptide on class I. LFA-1 then grips ICAM-1 hard, sealing the contact in a ring round the receptors.

Step 1 of 5Find and hold. The T cell's receptor finds its viral peptide on class I. LFA-1 then grips ICAM-1 hard, sealing the contact in a ring round the receptors.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A cytotoxic T cell kills by making its target take itself apart. It aims its granules at one cell at a time, so the cells around it are spared.

Simplified: not to scale; the cleft and the molecules in it drawn far larger than they are; the ring of LFA-1 and ICAM-1 drawn in section, as a pair above and a pair below; two receptors drawn for the many that gather in the contact; CD8 and CD2 left out of the contact; granzymes drawn entering through the perforin pore; some may be taken up into an endosome first; Bid, the other caspases and the DNase that cuts the DNA left out; Fas ligand binding Fas, the T cell's second way to kill, left out; the dead cell's break-up drawn at once; it takes hours; the viral genomes drawn whole in the apoptotic bodies; the nucleases of apoptosis can cut viral DNA.

4 sources
  1. Janeway CA Jr, Travers P, Walport M, Shlomchik MJ. Immunobiology, 5th edition. Garland Science, 2001. Chapter 8, sections 8-12, 8-15, 8-16 and 8-21 to 8-24.
  2. Chowdhury D, Lieberman J. Death by a thousand cuts: granzyme pathways of programmed cell death. Annu Rev Immunol. 2008;26:389–420.
  3. Lopez JA, Susanto O, Jenkins MR, et al. Perforin forms transient pores on the target cell plasma membrane to facilitate rapid access of granzymes during killer cell attack. Blood. 2013;121(14):2659–2668.
  4. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology, An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson, 2019. Chapter 24, The immune system: cytotoxic T cells (p. 772).
How V(D)J recombination cuts and joins
A stretch of a developing B cell's chromosome, drawn flat as a blue ladder of base pairs, with a D gene segment coming in from the left and a J segment from the right. Between them the DNA rises into a loop whose two legs stand side by side: on the left the signal beside the D segment, a dark block of 7 base pairs, a pale spacer of 12 and a dark block of 9; on the right the signal beside the J segment, with a spacer of 23. First, two green RAG1 and two light RAG2 proteins hold the two signals together at the foot of the loop. Next, each segment has been cut from its signal; the segment's end is sealed into a hairpin, the signal's end left blunt. Then the loop, the signals and RAG have been drawn up out of the way; a ring of Ku is threaded on each coding end, a large DNA-PKcs lies under each end and Artemis sits at each hairpin, now opened, leaving one strand a few bases longer than the other. Then TdT has taken Artemis's place and added random bases to each single strand. Last, the two coding ends have come together and are joined into one continuous ladder by DNA ligase IV, with XRCC4 below; above, the loop has closed into a circle with its two signals joined at its foot. Step 1 of 5: Pair. RAG1 and RAG2 bind a signal with a 12-base spacer and one with a 23-base spacer and hold them side by side. Only such a pair lets RAG finish its cut.

Step 1 of 5Pair. RAG1 and RAG2 bind a signal with a 12-base spacer and one with a 23-base spacer and hold them side by side. Only such a pair lets RAG finish its cut.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Only lymphocytes make this cut, with RAG, but enzymes every cell uses to mend broken DNA join the ends, deliberately carelessly at the coding joint. That carelessness is where much of the receptors' diversity comes from.

Simplified: DNA and proteins at one scale, but the loop drawn far shorter than the thousands of base pairs between the segments; the double helix drawn flat, as a ladder, without its twist; the DNA's path through RAG simplified; HMGB1, which helps RAG bend it, left out; the signals drawn apart from the coding ends once cut; in the cell all four ends are held close until they are joined; only the ends of the two gene segments drawn; Ku and the ligase drawn only at the coding ends, though they join the signal ends too; the polymerases that fill the gaps, the nucleases that trim the ends, and XLF and PAXX left out; one joint of many: how far each hairpin opens, and how many bases are added or trimmed, differ every time.

8 sources
  1. Janeway CA Jr, Travers P, Walport M, Shlomchik MJ. Immunobiology, 5th edition. Garland Science, 2001. Chapter 4, sections 4-4, 4-5 and 4-8.
  2. Roth DB. V(D)J recombination, mechanism, errors, and fidelity. Microbiol Spectr. 2014;2(6):MDNA3-0041-2014.
  3. Schim van der Loeff I, Ahuja M, Chen R, et al. An update on inborn errors of V(D)J recombination. Physiology (Bethesda). 2026.
  4. Lu H, Shimazaki N, Raval P, et al. Extent to which hairpin opening by the Artemis:DNA-PKcs complex can contribute to junctional diversity in V(D)J recombination. Nucleic Acids Res. 2007;35(20):6917–6923.
  5. Walker JR, Corpina RA, Goldberg J. Structure of the Ku heterodimer bound to DNA and its implications for double-strand break repair. Nature. 2001;412(6847):607–614.
  6. UniProt: RAG1 (P15918), RAG2 (P55895), Ku70 (P12956), Ku80 (P13010), DNA-PKcs (P78527), Artemis (Q96SD1), TdT (P04053), DNA ligase IV (P49917), XRCC4 (Q13426). Masses.
  7. Erickson HP. Size and shape of protein molecules at the nanometer level determined by sedimentation, gel filtration, and electron microscopy. Biol Proced Online. 2009;11:32–51. Minimal radius of a protein of given mass.
  8. Arnott S, Hukins DWL. Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 1972;47:1504–9. B-DNA about 2 nm across, 0.34 nm rise per base pair.
How a heavy-chain gene is built and switched
A map of the antibody heavy-chain locus on chromosome 14, drawn as a pale blue line with rounded boxes on it. From the left: blue V segments, more of them running off the page; five small deep blue D segments; six narrow pale J segments; then 9 constant genes, larger deep blue boxes, each but the second with a small grooved switch region before it. First, the locus as inherited. Next, one D segment has joined a J segment: the D and J segments between them are gone, and above, they float away on a small circle of DNA, while the upstream segments have slid along to close the gap. Then a V segment has joined the DJ in the same way, cutting out the segments between on a second circle; V, D and J now sit together as one exon. Then a red RNA below shows the exon spliced to the first constant gene, Cμ. Last, the switch region before Cμ has joined the one before Cγ1: Cμ, Cδ and Cγ3 have been cut out on a circle, and the same VDJ exon now lies upstream of Cγ1. Step 1 of 5: Inherited in pieces. In every cell but a B cell the segments lie apart: about 45 working V, 25 D and 6 J segments, then the constant genes.

Step 1 of 5Inherited in pieces. In every cell but a B cell the segments lie apart: about 45 working V, 25 D and 6 J segments, then the constant genes.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The variable region is built once, in the bone marrow; after antigen, hypermutation can fine-tune it, and the constant region can be exchanged, but only for one further downstream.

Simplified: not to scale: the locus spans over two million base pairs, and the D segments are only 11 to 37 base pairs long; only a few of the V and D segments drawn; the recombination signals, promoters and enhancers left out; each constant gene drawn as one box, though it has an exon for each domain; two broken constant genes left out: a copy of the ε gene between Cγ1 and Cα1, and of a γ gene between Cα1 and Cγ2; the circles drawn whole, carrying the segments between the joins; in the cell they hold the joined signals too; the RNA drawn already spliced, without its cap and tail; the joins drawn on one chromosome; D to J happens on both.

5 sources
  1. Janeway CA Jr, Travers P, Walport M, Shlomchik MJ. Immunobiology, 5th edition. Garland Science, 2001. Chapter 4, sections 4-2, 4-4, 4-5 and 4-16, Figs. 4.4 and 4.18.
  2. Rodriguez OL, Gibson WS, Parks T, et al. A novel framework for characterizing genomic haplotype diversity in the human immunoglobulin heavy chain locus. Front Immunol. 2020;11:2136.
  3. IMGT, the international ImMunoGeneTics information system: human IGH locus gene table and IMGT/GENE-DB IGHD reference sequences. Accessed 1 November 2026.
  4. Stavnezer J, Guikema JEJ, Schrader CE. Mechanism and regulation of class switch recombination. Annu Rev Immunol. 2008;26:261–292.
  5. Liu JC, Zhang K, Zhang X, et al. Immunoglobulin class-switch recombination, mechanism, regulation, and related diseases. MedComm. 2024;5(8):e662.
Four levels of protein structure
A protein drawn at four levels, in shades of green. First, the start of the β-globin chain: 12 amino acids in a row, each a ball on the backbone with a side chain on a stalk, the side chains in four shades by kind, the charged ones marked plus or minus, flat peptide bonds between the balls and the free ends marked N and C. Next, the two regular folds of a chain: on the left an α-helix, a coil whose turns are held by dotted hydrogen bonds; on the right a β-sheet of three arrows lying side by side, each running the opposite way to the next, with dotted hydrogen bonds between them, all joined by loops. Then myoglobin, one folded chain of 153 amino acids on a pale outline of itself: 8 helices drawn as cylinders and joined by loops, the farther ones paler, packed round an orange haem disc with its iron. Last, haemoglobin at the same scale: four such chains, each on a pale outline of its own, the two β chains in lime in front and the two α chains in green behind them, paler, each chain with its own haem. Step 1 of 4: Primary structure. The order of the amino acids, joined by peptide bonds from the N-terminus to the C-terminus. Shown: the first 12 of β-globin's 146.−−+NC

Step 1 of 4Primary structure. The order of the amino acids, joined by peptide bonds from the N-terminus to the C-terminus. Shown: the first 12 of β-globin's 146.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The order of the amino acids decides the fold: hydrogen bonds in the backbone make helices and sheets, the side chains pack them into one shape, and folded chains can join into a larger protein.

Simplified: the chain drawn flat and nearly straight; a real chain can turn at every α-carbon; atoms not drawn: each amino acid a ball, each side chain one ball sized roughly by its bulk; the helix and the sheet drawn to show their shape, not to scale and not from myoglobin, which has no sheet; the sheet drawn flat; real sheets are pleated and twisted; in myoglobin and haemoglobin each helix drawn as a cylinder along its axis and each loop through its α-carbons, measured from human structures, the myoglobin one with two single changes; side chains left out of the folded proteins; the haem drawn as a plain disc.

7 sources
  1. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. The Shape and Structure of Proteins.
  2. UniProt. P68871, Hemoglobin subunit beta (human).
  3. UniProt. P69905, Hemoglobin subunit alpha (human).
  4. UniProt. P02144, Myoglobin (human).
  5. Novotny M, Kleywegt GJ. A survey of left-handed helices in protein structures. J Mol Biol. 2005;347(2):231–241.
  6. Hubbard SR, Hendrickson WA, Lambright DG, Boxer SG. X-ray crystal structure of a recombinant human myoglobin mutant at 2.8 Å resolution. J Mol Biol. 1990;213(2):215–218. PDB 3RGK (1.65 Å).
  7. Park SY, Yokoyama T, Shibayama N, Shiro Y, Tame JR. 1.25 Å resolution crystal structures of human haemoglobin in the oxy, deoxy and carbonmonoxy forms. J Mol Biol. 2006;360(3):690–701. PDB 2DN2.
Protein domains
Proteins drawn as their domains, each kind of domain its own shape and shade of green, its area in proportion to its number of amino acids, threaded on the chain from the N-terminus to the C-terminus. First, tissue plasminogen activator (tPA): a small upright finger, a squat oval EGF-like domain, two three-lobed kringles and a large two-lobed protease. Below it, its gene: blue exons on the intron line, each domain's exons under it and joined to it by a pale band: one exon each for the finger and the EGF-like domain, 2 for each kringle and 5 for the protease. Then three proteins one above another, their proteases in a column: plasminogen with 5 kringles, urokinase with an EGF-like domain and one kringle, and tPA. Step 1 of 2: Domains and exons. tPA's five domains lie along one chain, and each is encoded by its own exon or run of exons in the gene.NC

Step 1 of 2Domains and exons. tPA's five domains lie along one chain, and each is encoded by its own exon or run of exons in the gene.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A domain folds on its own and often does one job. In animal genes a domain often has an exon or a run of exons of its own, so recombination in introns can pass it from gene to gene, and related proteins are built from the same set.

Simplified: each domain drawn as a plain shape of its kind, not its fold, with an area in proportion to its number of amino acids; the chain between domains drawn short and straight; exons and introns not to scale; only the 11 exons of the domains drawn, not those of the mRNA's 5′ end, the signal peptide and the propeptide; plasminogen's first domain (PAN) and each protein's signal peptide left out.

7 sources
  1. UniProt. P00750, Tissue-type plasminogen activator (human).
  2. UniProt. P00747, Plasminogen (human).
  3. UniProt. P00749, Urokinase-type plasminogen activator (human).
  4. NCBI RefSeq. NM_000930.5, Homo sapiens plasminogen activator, tissue type (PLAT), mRNA: exon table.
  5. Ny T, Elgh F, Lund B. The structure of the human tissue-type plasminogen activator gene: correlation of intron and exon structures to functional and structural domains. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 1984;81(17):5355–5359.
  6. Trexler M, Patthy L. Folding autonomy of the kringle 4 fragment of human plasminogen. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 1983;80(9):2457–2461.
  7. Patthy L. Exon shuffling played a decisive role in the evolution of the genetic toolkit for the multicellular body plan of Metazoa. Genes. 2021;12(3):382.
DNA and RNA
Nucleic acids drawn in four steps, DNA in blue and RNA in red. First, a DNA nucleotide and an RNA nucleotide side by side: each a phosphate ball marked P on the sugar's 5′ carbon, the sugar a five-sided ring marked 5′ and 3′, and a base of one ring joined to the sugar's 1′ carbon; DNA's base is thymine (T), with a small methyl knob, and RNA's is uracil (U), without it. Small balls are OH groups: on the 3′ carbon of both sugars, and on the 2′ carbon of ribose only. Next, two DNA strands paired flat: their backbones of sugars and phosphates outside, running opposite ways from 5′ to 3′, their bases meeting in the middle, two-ringed purines (A, G) across from one-ringed pyrimidines (T, C), held by 2 dotted hydrogen bonds in each A–T pair and 3 in each G–C pair. Then the double helix to scale: two backbones winding right-handed round the base pairs, with the wide major groove and the narrow minor groove between them washed pale. Last, one RNA strand folded back on itself into a hairpin: a stem of paired bases and a loop of unpaired ones at its tip. Step 1 of 4: Nucleotides. Each is a phosphate, a five-carbon sugar and a base. RNA's ribose has an OH on its 2′ carbon that DNA's deoxyribose lacks, and RNA has uracil where DNA has thymine.5′3′PT5′3′PU

Step 1 of 4Nucleotides. Each is a phosphate, a five-carbon sugar and a base. RNA's ribose has an OH on its 2′ carbon that DNA's deoxyribose lacks, and RNA has uracil where DNA has thymine.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A strand's order of bases is its information. Two DNA strands pair base to base and wind into a helix; an RNA strand pairs with itself and folds.

Simplified: atoms not drawn: each sugar and base as its ring, each phosphate and OH group a ball, only thymine's methyl group shown; the paired strands drawn flat and to read, not to scale; the helix drawn to scale but smooth, its base pairs as bars; the hairpin's sequence made up for the drawing, its bases as blocks.

6 sources
  1. Brown TA. Genomes, 2nd edition. Wiley-Liss, 2002. Chapter 1, The Human Genome: 1.1 DNA.
  2. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. The Structure and Function of DNA.
  3. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. From DNA to RNA.
  4. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. DNA-Binding Motifs in Gene Regulatory Proteins.
  5. Rhodes D, Klug A. Helical periodicity of DNA determined by enzyme digestion. Nature. 1980;286(5773):573–578.
  6. Wang JC. Helical repeat of DNA in solution. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 1979;76(1):200–203.
The cytoskeleton
The cytoskeleton drawn in four steps, every protein a shade of green. First, its three filaments one above the other at one scale: a microtubule 25 nm across, a hollow tube seen a little from its open minus end, its wall of 13 protofilaments, each a row of light α-tubulin and darker β-tubulin subunits; an intermediate filament 10 nm across, a rope of twisted strands; and an actin filament about 7 nm across, two strands of round subunits winding round each other. A plus sign and a minus sign mark the ends of the microtubule and of the actin filament; the intermediate filament has none. Next, two microtubules: one growing, the subunits at its plus end each holding a GTP, drawn as a small orange bead, with free tubulin dimers beside it; the other shrinking, its protofilaments peeling out in curls at its end and dimers falling away. Then three motors, each carrying a vesicle, a ring of membrane: kinesin, two small heads on a long stalk, and dynein, two large heads, on a microtubule, and myosin, two heads on long lever arms, on an actin filament below. Last, the core of a cilium cut across: nine doublets of microtubules in a ring round two single ones, each doublet with two dynein arms reaching toward the next, a nexin link to it and a radial spoke in toward the central pair. Step 1 of 4: Three filaments. Drawn at one scale: a microtubule 25 nm across, an intermediate filament 10 nm and an actin filament about 7 nm. Each is built from many copies of a small subunit. Microtubules and actin filaments have a plus end (+) and a minus end (−); intermediate filaments have none.−+−+

Step 1 of 4Three filaments. Drawn at one scale: a microtubule 25 nm across, an intermediate filament 10 nm and an actin filament about 7 nm. Each is built from many copies of a small subunit. Microtubules and actin filaments have a plus end (+) and a minus end (−); intermediate filaments have none.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Three kinds of filament, each built from many copies of a small subunit. Two of them grow and shrink at their ends, and motors walk along them.

Simplified: the first two steps to scale, the motors drawn to read, the axoneme at a smaller scale; the microtubule's subunits drawn in rings, not in their slight helical stagger; the intermediate filament drawn as three strands, not its 32 to 40 chains; only β-tubulin's GTP drawn, in the cap and on free dimers; GDP not drawn; the GTP cap drawn a few rows long, where in cells it is tens of rows; the growing end drawn blunt, though its protofilaments flare a little too; each motor's chains drawn as heads and stalks; dynein's partners, such as dynactin, left out; B tubules drawn with 10 subunits; the central pair's sheath and the membrane round the axoneme left out.

13 sources
  1. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. Structure and Organization of Actin Filaments.
  2. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. Microtubules.
  3. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. Intermediate Filaments.
  4. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. Microtubule Motors and Movements.
  5. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. Actin, Myosin, and Cell Movement.
  6. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. The Self-Assembly and Dynamic Structure of Cytoskeletal Filaments.
  7. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. Molecular Motors.
  8. Mitchison TJ. Localization of an exchangeable GTP binding site at the plus end of microtubules. Science. 1993;261(5124):1044–1047.
  9. Malik F, Brillinger D, Vale RD. High-resolution tracking of microtubule motility driven by a single kinesin motor. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 1994;91(10):4584–4588.
  10. Narita A, Usukura E, Yagi A, et al. Direct observation of the actin filament by tip-scan atomic force microscopy. Microscopy (Oxf). 2016;65(4):370–377.
  11. McIntosh JR, O’Toole E, Morgan G, et al. Microtubules grow by the addition of bent guanosine triphosphate tubulin to the tips of curved protofilaments. J Cell Biol. 2018;217(8):2691–2708.
  12. Seetapun D, Castle BT, McIntyre AJ, Tran PT, Odde DJ. Estimating the microtubule GTP cap size in vivo. Curr Biol. 2012;22(18):1681–1687.
  13. Eibauer M, Weber MS, Kronenberg-Tenga R, et al. Vimentin filaments integrate low-complexity domains in a complex helical structure. Nat Struct Mol Biol. 2024;31(6):939–949.
RNA processing
How a pre-mRNA becomes an mRNA, in four steps, RNA in red and proteins in green. First, a pre-mRNA: at its 5′ end the cap, a G with a small methyl knob joined to the RNA through 3 small phosphate balls; then three exons, red boxes, with two introns between them drawn as thin arches; at its 3′ end a tail of lettered As. Next, close up on one intron between two exons: its first two nucleotides, G and U, its last two, A and G, and a branch-point A raised out of the line near its end. Above, the U1 snRNP, a green body with a red snRNA, pairs with the first exon's end and the G and U; below, the U2 snRNP pairs on either side of the branch point, leaving its A unpaired. Then, after the cuts: the two exons joined in one strand, with the exon junction complex, a small green body, just before the joint; and the intron, free as a lariat: a loop closed through the branch-point A, the intron's first G joined to it, and a tail ending in A and G. Last, one pre-mRNA with three exons and two introns, its middle exon a deeper red, and below it two mRNAs made from it: one with all three exons, the other without the middle one. Step 1 of 4: The pre-mRNA. The primary transcript of a gene, still holding its introns. A cap is added to its 5′ end, and its 3′ end is cut and given a poly(A) tail, mostly while it is still being made.GAAAAA

Step 1 of 4The pre-mRNA. The primary transcript of a gene, still holding its introns. A cap is added to its 5′ end, and its 3′ end is cut and given a poly(A) tail, mostly while it is still being made.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Translation
A bacterial ribosome in section, reading a messenger RNA that runs across the picture: the small subunit below, holding the mRNA, with its E, P and A sites marked from left to right and the decoding centre under the A site, and the large subunit above, with the peptidyl transferase centre on its underside and an exit tunnel running up through it. First, the initiator tRNA stands on the start codon in the P site, holding the first amino acid, formylmethionine in bacteria; the A site is empty. Next, a second tRNA comes in from the right with its amino acid, held by EF-Tu, a pale green protein carrying an orange GTP: its anticodon pairs with the codon in the A site while its body still leans out. Then EF-Tu has gone and the methionine has been joined to the second amino acid: the short chain hangs from the tRNA in the A site, and both tRNAs lean to the left, their anticodons still on their codons. Next, EF-G, a deeper green protein with its GTP, by now split to GDP, stands in the A site; the tRNAs have moved on to the E and P sites, and the mRNA has moved one codon to the left. Then, many rounds later, a longer chain runs up the tunnel from a tRNA in the P site, and a release factor, a dark green protein shaped like a tRNA, sits in the A site on a stop codon. Last, the chain has been cut from the tRNA and is free. Step 1 of 6: Start. The small subunit and the initiator tRNA, carrying methionine (formylmethionine in bacteria), find the start codon, AUG, and the large subunit joins. The initiator tRNA sits in the P site; the A site is empty.EPA

Step 1 of 6Start. The small subunit and the initiator tRNA, carrying methionine (formylmethionine in bacteria), find the start codon, AUG, and the large subunit joins. The initiator tRNA sits in the P site; the A site is empty.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A ribosome reads an mRNA one codon at a time: a tRNA brings each amino acid, the large subunit's rRNA joins it to the chain, and the tRNAs and the mRNA move on. At a stop codon a release factor frees the finished chain.

Simplified: a bacterial ribosome drawn; ours is larger and its factors have other names, but it works in much the same way; not to scale: the tRNAs and codons drawn as wide as each other, EF-Tu and EF-G as plain shapes, the release factor as a tRNA's outline; the mRNA drawn as a row of plain bases without letters, so the start and stop codons look like any other; the tRNAs drawn as flat cloverleaves, though each is folded in three dimensions; the tRNA's swing into the A site and the peptide bond drawn as one step; the two centres drawn as patches beside the tRNAs, though the tRNAs' ends and the release factor's tip reach into the peptidyl transferase centre, and the codon–anticodon pair sits in the decoding centre; initiation shown only by its result, the initiation factors left out; the mRNA drawn moving through the ribosome, rather than the ribosome along it; many rounds skipped before the stop codon, the mRNA moved on only one codon for them; the recycling factor, and the tRNA, mRNA and subunits coming apart, left out.

3 sources
  1. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. From RNA to Protein.
  2. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. Translation of mRNA.
  3. UniProt. P68104, Elongation factor 1-alpha 1 (human).
Base excision repair
A short stretch of DNA drawn flat, as a ladder, in blue: the template strand along the top, running 3′ to 5′ from left to right, and the strand being mended along the bottom, running 5′ to 3′; each nucleotide a sugar ring, a phosphate ball marked P and a base marked with its letter. First, in the middle of the lower strand, a U sits where a C was, opposite a G. Next, a pale green enzyme, the glycosylase, has come up under the strand and holds the U in its pocket, cut from its sugar: an empty sugar is left in the strand. Then a light green enzyme, AP endonuclease, has cut the backbone on the left of the empty sugar, and a small ball, a free 3′-OH end, marks the cut. Next, a mid-green enzyme, DNA polymerase, has taken the empty sugar and its phosphate off, and they drift away below; a new C, paired with the G, stands in their place, and a nick remains on its right. Last, a deeper green enzyme, DNA ligase, has sealed that nick, and the strand is whole again. Step 1 of 5: Damage. A cytosine in the lower strand has lost its amino group and become uracil, which DNA should not hold. It sits opposite a guanine.PCPTPAPTPCPAPGPGPAPTPAPGPTPU5′3′5′3′

Step 1 of 5Damage. A cytosine in the lower strand has lost its amino group and become uracil, which DNA should not hold. It sits opposite a guanine.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A damaged base is cut out and replaced in four steps: a glycosylase removes the base, AP endonuclease cuts the backbone beside the empty sugar, a polymerase puts in the right nucleotide, and a ligase seals the strand. The undamaged strand is the template throughout.

Simplified: DNA drawn flat, as a ladder, not as a double helix, and the hydrogen bonds between the bases left out; not to scale: the nucleotides drawn large and the enzymes as plain shapes, far smaller than they are; the uracil shown already cut free in the glycosylase's pocket; first the enzyme flips it out of the helix; the enzymes shown one at a time, and proteins that help some of them, such as XRCC1 and PARP1, left out; short-patch repair shown, the commonest kind; in long-patch repair 2 to 10 nucleotides are replaced.

3 sources
  1. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. DNA Repair.
  2. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. DNA Repair.
  3. Krokan HE, Bjørås M. Base excision repair. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Biol. 2013;5(4):a012583.
Making a protein into the ER
The membrane of the endoplasmic reticulum runs across the figure in amber, the cytosol above it and the ER lumen below. First, a ribosome, drawn in section in pale red with an mRNA across its top and a tRNA inside, has made the first stretch of a green chain; the chain leaves through a tunnel at the ribosome's base, and its first part, the signal sequence, a short deeper green rod, is held by the signal-recognition particle, an RNA band with protein blobs along it that hugs the ribosome's side. In the membrane stand the SRP receptor, a green knob on a stalk, the translocon, two lime halves with a plug between them, and signal peptidase, its head in the lumen. Next, the SRP has brought the ribosome down to the membrane and sits on its receptor. Then the SRP has gone, the ribosome sits on the translocon, the translocon's two halves have parted, the plug has moved out of the way, and the signal lies in the opening with the chain looping down into the lumen beside it. Next, the chain is longer and loops further into the lumen, cut free of the signal next to signal peptidase. Last, the ribosome has left, the translocon has closed, the finished protein lies folded in the lumen, and the signal has moved sideways into the membrane. Step 1 of 5: The signal appears. As the first stretch of the chain leaves the ribosome, the SRP binds its signal sequence and binds the ribosome, slowing translation.

Step 1 of 5The signal appears. As the first stretch of the chain leaves the ribosome, the SRP binds its signal sequence and binds the ribosome, slowing translation.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A protein with an ER signal is made into the ER while it is being made: the signal-recognition particle catches the signal and brings the ribosome to the membrane, the chain threads through the translocon as it grows, and signal peptidase cuts the signal off.

Simplified: the ribosome, the SRP and the proteins of the membrane drawn in section, as flat shapes; not to scale, and the chain drawn as a smooth band, not as its amino acids; the SRP's 6 proteins drawn as four blobs, two of them pairs; the SRP receptor's 2 chains drawn as one shape; the GTP that the SRP and its receptor bind left out; one ribosome shown, leaving whole; many read the same mRNA, and each one's subunits part when it finishes; the protein shown folding by itself; in the lumen the chaperone BiP binds the chain as it comes through.

3 sources
  1. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. The Endoplasmic Reticulum.
  2. Voorhees RM, Fernández IS, Scheres SHW, Hegde RS. Structure of the mammalian ribosome-Sec61 complex to 3.4 Å resolution. Cell, 2014.
  3. Cooper GM. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, 2nd edition. Sinauer Associates, 2000. The Endoplasmic Reticulum.
Reverse transcription of HIV
HIV's genome copied into DNA, drawn flat as a ladder across the figure. First, the viral RNA, a red strand, runs along the top from its 5′ end on the left to its 3′ end on the right; near its left end a deeper red tRNA, its body hanging below, is paired with the RNA, and from it a short blue DNA strand runs left along the bottom to the RNA's end, where a green enzyme, reverse transcriptase, sits with its paler RNase H domain behind it. Next, the RNA's left end has gone, and the short DNA, with its tRNA, has moved to the right end, where it pairs with the RNA's last stretch; the blue strand now runs all the way back along the RNA, the enzyme at its left end. Then the RNA has gone apart from two short red pieces, and a deeper blue strand grows from each: one from the middle, with the enzyme at its growing end, and one from the piece near the right, which runs on to the tRNA. Next, the tRNA has gone and the short deeper blue piece on the right has moved to the far left, and both strands now run the full length, longer than the RNA was at both ends. Last, drawn smaller, the double-stranded DNA sits in a paler blue chromosome that runs on to either edge, joined to it on each side with a short gap in one strand, a deeper green integrase at each join. Step 1 of 5: A tRNA primes the first strand. A tRNA for lysine is paired with the PBS near the RNA's 5′ end. Reverse transcriptase extends it, copying U5 and R, until it reaches the end of the RNA.5′3′3′

Step 1 of 5A tRNA primes the first strand. A tRNA for lysine is paired with the PBS near the RNA's 5′ end. Reverse transcriptase extends it, copying U5 and R, until it reaches the end of the RNA.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Reverse transcriptase copies HIV's RNA into double-stranded DNA in two jumps between matching sequences, which give the DNA a long terminal repeat at each end; integrase then inserts the DNA into a chromosome.

Simplified: the strands drawn flat, as a ladder, not as helices; not to scale: every region is far longer than drawn, and the genome's middle is much shortened; one RNA drawn; each virion carries two copies, and the first jump can land on either; the tRNA drawn whole; to pair with the PBS, its 3′ end unfolds from the cloverleaf; one reverse transcriptase drawn, and the RNA cleared in one step; in fact RNase H cuts the RNA while the minus strand is being made; the two plus strands shown meeting in the middle; in fact the one from the left displaces the start of the one from the central PPT for a short way; integrase drawn at each end; it holds both ends together, and first cuts one strand at each end to leave a 3′-OH.

5 sources
  1. Coffin JM, Hughes SH, Varmus HE, editors. Retroviruses. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 1997. Overview of reverse transcription.
  2. Coffin JM, Hughes SH, Varmus HE, editors. Retroviruses. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 1997. Reverse transcription of the viral genome in vivo.
  3. Coffin JM, Hughes SH, Varmus HE, editors. Retroviruses. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 1997. Transcription.
  4. Piekna-Przybylska D, Dykes C, Demeter LM, Bambara RA. Sequences in the U3 region of human immunodeficiency virus 1 improve efficiency of minus strand transfer in infected cells. Virology, 2011.
  5. Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th edition. Garland Science, 2002. Site-specific recombination.
An infant's bronchiole, healthy and in bronchiolitis
Two round fields of lung seen through a magnifier, side by side. In each, a small airway, a bronchiole, is cut across in the middle, surrounded by alveoli, the white air spaces between thin pink alveolar walls that carry small red capillaries. On the left, the healthy bronchiole: a round open lumen, lined by a ring of columnar peach-coloured cells with amber cilia that beat, two violet goblet cells among them, a thin pale wall and a thin ring of rose smooth muscle. On the right, the same airway in viral bronchiolitis: most of its lining cells have lost their cilia and the lining is ragged; the lumen is narrower and filled by a pale plug in which lie rounded, shed lining cells and pale blue neutrophils; the wall under the lining is swollen and washed pale teal with oedema, and a ring of small pale blue lymphocytes surrounds the outside of the airway.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

In infants, viruses, most often respiratory syncytial virus, infect the lining of the bronchioles, airways under 2 mm across. The infected cells lose their cilia and are shed, and with neutrophils they plug the lumen; oedema swells the wall and lymphocytes gather round it. Air is trapped behind the plugs on breathing out, and the chest hyperexpands.

Simplified: not to scale: the airway's wall drawn thicker than life so its layers read; far fewer alveoli, cells and capillaries than a real field holds, and every capillary drawn cut across; the lining drawn as one ring of columnar ciliated cells; the club cells, which the virus also infects, and the basal cells left out; the plug drawn as a few shed cells and neutrophils in a pale mass of mucus and fibrin; the changes, which are patchy, all drawn in one airway, and the healthy airway drawn without its thin mucus layer; the trapped air and the patches of collapsed alveoli beyond the plugged airway left out; the cilia's beat played far slower than life.

3 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Respiratory syncytial virus infection (p. 521), and the airways (p. 930).
  2. Pickles RJ, DeVincenzo JP. Respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) and its propensity for causing bronchiolitis. J Pathol. 2015;235(2):266-76.
  3. Georgakopoulou VE, Pitiriga VC. Immunomodulation in respiratory syncytial virus infection: mechanisms, therapeutic targets, and clinical implications. Microorganisms. 2025;13(8):1876.
Why the arterial oxygen falls
Five alveoli side by side, each a pink-walled round air space with its airway rising from the top and a pale red capillary running round its lower half, carrying red cells from left to right. Teal dots of oxygen and orange dots of carbon dioxide float in the air. In the first, normal unit the airway is open, the air holds many oxygen dots and a few carbon dioxide dots, and the red cells, dark as they arrive on the left, are bright red early on their way round. In the second, low V/Q unit the airway is narrowed by its swollen walls, fewer oxygen dots reach the alveolus, and the red cells leave only partly reddened. In the third, shunt unit the alveolus is filled with pale teal fluid and holds no gas at all, and the red cells leave as dark as they came. In the fourth, diffusion unit the air is as in health but the wall between alveolus and capillary is thickened with green scar fibres, and the red cells redden only slowly, nearly full as they leave. In the fifth, hypoventilation unit the airway is open but the air holds fewer oxygen dots and many more carbon dioxide dots, more carbon dioxide dots sit in the blood between the red cells, and the red cells leave only partly reddened.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Respiratory failure is a PaO2 below 8 kPa, or a PaCO2 above 7 kPa. In type I failure the oxygen is low and the carbon dioxide normal or low, from V/Q mismatch or shunt; in type II failure, too little air moves in and out to clear the carbon dioxide, so it rises as the oxygen falls.

Simplified: not to scale: beside the alveolus, the red cells and its wall drawn far larger than they are; each cause drawn in one alveolus with one capillary, where a real lung has hundreds of millions of alveoli each wrapped in a net of capillaries, and its disease is patchy; oxygen and carbon dioxide drawn as a few dots, their number standing for how much there is; only a low V/Q drawn; high V/Q, ventilated alveoli with too little blood flow as after a pulmonary embolism, left out; the diffusion unit drawn with the red cells filling slowly, as on exercise; at rest they usually still fill; a low inspired oxygen, as at altitude, where the fault is in the air breathed, left out.

2 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 10, Critical care medicine: applied cardiorespiratory physiology (p. 207) and respiratory failure (pp. 224–225).
  2. Silverthorn DU. Human Physiology: An Integrated Approach, 8th edition. Pearson, 2019. Chapter 18, Gas exchange and transport (pp. 564–569).
The forms of bronchiectasis
Four bronchi side by side, each seen from the side as a pink-walled tube coming down from the top and dividing twice into four small branches. The first, normal one narrows at each division, its wall thin, and each small branch ends in a cluster of pink alveoli. The second, cylindrical bronchiectasis, is wider, with a thicker wall, and stays the same width all the way down; its small branches stop short, cut off square, each end filled with pale violet mucus. The third, varicose bronchiectasis, swells and narrows in turn along its length, like a string of beads. The fourth, cystic bronchiectasis, ends each small branch in a large round sac, each holding a pool of pale violet pus and mucus with a flat top.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Bronchiectasis is a permanent widening of the bronchi. A normal bronchus narrows as it divides; the commonest form, cylindrical, stays wide and even, varicose swells and narrows like beads, and cystic, the most severe, ends in sacs that often hold an air–fluid level. On CT, a bronchus that fails to taper over 2 cm beyond a division is the most sensitive sign.

Simplified: not to scale: the walls drawn thicker than life so they read; each bronchus drawn dividing twice, where the bronchial tree divides many more times before its alveoli; each drawn as a flat outline seen from the side, its wall the same all round; each form drawn on its own, where one patient often has more than one, in different lobes.

3 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: bronchiectasis (pp. 982–983).
  2. Juliusson G, Gudmundsson G. Diagnostic imaging in adult non-cystic fibrosis bronchiectasis. Breathe (Sheff). 2019;15(3):190-197.
  3. Gramegna A, Amati F, Terranova L, et al. Neutrophil elastase in bronchiectasis. Respir Res. 2017;18:211.
Lobar pneumonia and bronchopneumonia
Two pairs of lungs seen from the front, side by side, each a pale pink pair of lungs with the trachea and the pale blue-grey bronchial tree branching inside them, the right lung, on the left of each picture, divided by two fissures into upper, middle and lower lobes, and the left lung by one fissure into upper and lower lobes. In the first pair, lobar pneumonia: the whole right upper lobe, from its edge to the fissure below it, is filled evenly with a solid rose-red consolidation speckled with white cells, the bronchi crossing it, while the other lobes are normal. In the second pair, bronchopneumonia: small rounded rose-red patches speckled with white are scattered through both lungs, more and larger towards the bases, with normal lung between them.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Pneumonia can fill a whole lobe, or more than one, evenly: lobar pneumonia, classically pneumococcal. Or it can start in the bronchi and bronchioles and spread to the alveoli round them, in patches scattered through the lobules, larger and more numerous in the lower lobes: bronchopneumonia.

Simplified: the lungs seen from the front as a flat outline, so each lower lobe shows only where a front view sees it, below and outside its oblique fissure; lobar pneumonia drawn in the right upper lobe, where a front view shows a whole lobe, though the lower lobes are the ones most often affected, and more than one lobe can be; the bronchial tree drawn with far fewer branches than it has, and on top of the lungs; the patches of bronchopneumonia drawn larger and fewer than they are, scattered by chance rather than each at the end of a small airway.

2 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: anatomy (pp. 930–931) and community-acquired pneumonia (p. 964).
  2. Corrin B, Nicholson AG. Pathology of the Lungs, 3rd edition. Churchill Livingstone, 2011. Chapter 5, Infectious diseases: lobar pneumonia and bronchopneumonia.
Alveolar and interstitial pneumonia
Two round fields of lung under the microscope, side by side, each a pink sponge of thin walls round many small air spaces, with small red capillaries cut across in the walls. In the first, the typical bacterial pneumonia: the walls are thin, but every air space is filled with a pale rose fluid, and in it sit many small pale blue neutrophils, each with a nucleus in three lobes, and here and there a red cell. In the second, a viral pneumonia: the walls are clearly thicker, small pale blue lymphocytes, almost all nucleus, sit inside them, and the air spaces between them are empty white.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Typical bacterial pneumonia fills the air spaces: protein-rich fluid with neutrophils and red cells takes the place of air, and the lung becomes solid. Viruses, and Mycoplasma, inflame the walls instead: oedema and lymphocytes thicken the walls between the alveoli while the air spaces stay largely clear of pus, so the chest film shows patchy or diffuse shadows rather than one dense lobe, and there may be little to find on examining the chest.

Simplified: not to scale: the cells drawn larger than life against the alveoli, and fewer; the exudate drawn as a pale fluid without its fibrin, and the walls without the cells that line them; each pattern drawn pure, though they often mix: a viral pneumonia can fill the air spaces when severe, a bacterial one can follow it, interstitial pneumonias may hold some oedema fluid and macrophages in their air spaces, and not every 'atypical' organism gives this pattern: Legionella and psittacosis fill the air spaces; one field standing for each kind of pneumonia, which in the lung is patchy.

1 source
  1. Corrin B, Nicholson AG. Pathology of the Lungs, 3rd edition. Churchill Livingstone, 2011. Chapter 5, Infectious diseases: lobar pneumonia, viral infections and mycoplasmal pneumonia.
Where aspirated material goes
The lungs seen from the front, pale pink, the right lung on the left of the picture divided into upper, middle and lower lobes, the left into two, with the pale blue-grey trachea and bronchial tree branching inside them. A clear plastic breathing tube runs down the middle of the trachea, its tip a little above the point where the trachea divides, and round it a clear oval balloon, the cuff, fills the trachea. Just above the cuff, either side of the tube, sit small pale violet pools of secretions. The right main bronchus leaves the trachea at a steeper angle than the left. In the right lung, scattered rose-red patches of pneumonia lie in the middle lobe and in the lower lobe, below and outside its fissure; the left lung is clear.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A tube in the trachea bypasses the larynx and impairs the cough, and secretions from the mouth and throat pool above its cuff and leak past it. Whatever is aspirated, by a ventilated patient or by anyone who cannot protect the airway, follows gravity and the anatomy: the right main bronchus is more vertical, so it most often lands in the right lung, classically in the middle lobe and the apical or posterior segments of the lower lobe. In a patient lying down, as on a ventilator, it goes to the parts lowest for their posture: the apical segment of the lower lobe when flat on the back, the back and side of the upper lobe when turned to one side.

Simplified: the lungs seen from the front as a flat outline, so the lower lobe shows only where a front view sees it, and its apical and posterior segments, at the back, are drawn within that; the tube and cuff drawn as clear plastic, the larynx and mouth left out, and the secretions as two small pools; the sites drawn are Kumar's classic ones for aspiration, not those of a patient lying down, where the apical segment of the lower lobe and the side of the upper lobe are the likeliest; the bronchial tree drawn with far fewer branches than it has, and on top of the lungs.

3 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: anatomy (pp. 930–931) and pneumonia in other settings (p. 967).
  2. Kalanuria AA, Ziai W, Mirski M. Ventilator-associated pneumonia in the ICU. Critical Care 2014;18(2):208.
  3. Corrin B, Nicholson AG. Pathology of the Lungs, 3rd edition. Churchill Livingstone, 2011. Chapter 5, Infectious diseases: bronchopneumonia and aspiration pneumonia.
Fibrosis and sarcoidosis on the chest
Two pairs of lungs from the front on a pale plate, the right lung on each pair's left as on an X-ray, the pale blue airways inside. On the left, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis: the lungs drawn shorter than the other pair, their bases higher. Small pale rings with thick sandy-green walls crowd the outer edges of both lungs at the bases, and above them a finer net of thin rings runs up the outer edges to about the middle; the upper parts are clear. On the right, sarcoidosis: lungs of normal size, a lumpy pale periwinkle lymph node at each hilum, the two alike, and a smaller one beside the trachea on the right; small periwinkle dots are scattered through the upper and middle parts of both lungs, the bases clear.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis shrinks the lungs and scars them from the outside in and from the bottom up: reticulation under the pleura, most at the bases, and layers of honeycomb cysts there. Sarcoidosis classically shows symmetrical bilateral hilar lymphadenopathy, often with a right paratracheal node, and nodules along the lymphatics in the upper and middle zones; most people with node enlargement alone recover without treatment.

Simplified: the lungs drawn flat from the front, as on an X-ray; the honeycombing is seen best on CT; the cysts drawn as neat rings of a few sizes, without the traction bronchiectasis that goes with them; the sarcoid nodules drawn evenly scattered; in life they follow the lymphatics, along the fissures and round the airways and vessels; one stage of each disease: sarcoidosis may show nodes alone, lung changes alone, or upper-zone fibrosis.

3 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (pp. 988–989, Fig. 28.40).
  2. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: sarcoidosis (pp. 985–987, Fig. 28.38).
  3. Maller V, Kumar K, Silverstone L et al. Sarcoidosis (thoracic manifestations). Radiopaedia.
Where lung cancer grows and spreads
The lungs from the front on a pale plate, the right lung on the picture's left as on an X-ray, the pale blue trachea and airways inside. A lumpy tan tumour sits on the right upper lobe's bronchus near the hilum; the upper lobe beyond it is drawn small and a deeper pink, drawn in towards the hilum and the middle of the chest with its airways left out, and the rest of the right lung fills the space round it. A small tan lymph node lies at the right hilum, and two more in the middle of the chest, one below the carina and one beside the trachea on the right. A small round tan tumour lies out near the side of the left lung, and another sits at the very top of the left lung, bulging past its apex.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Squamous and small-cell cancers classically arise centrally, in the large bronchi, and adenocarcinoma in the periphery. A central tumour can block its bronchus, so the lobe beyond it collapses. The cancer spreads by the lymphatics to the hilar nodes on the same side, then to the mediastinal and subcarinal nodes. A tumour at the apex (a Pancoast tumour) can invade the brachial plexus and the sympathetic chain.

Simplified: the lungs drawn flat from the front, as on an X-ray, the lobes behind each other in life; each type drawn at its classic site; squamous cancers are now often peripheral, and any type can arise anywhere; one lobe collapsed towards the hilum and the rest of the lung simply filling the space, the collapsed lobe's airways left out; the fissures, the trachea and the diaphragm also move in life; three lymph nodes of the many, and the lymphatics between them left out.

3 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: bronchial carcinoma, clinical features, Box 28.50 and spread (p. 976), and TNM staging (p. 979).
  2. Ishizumi T, McWilliams A, MacAulay C, Gazdar A, Lam S. Natural history of bronchial preinvasive lesions. Cancer Metastasis Rev 2010;29(1):5–14.
  3. Hayashi T, Sano H, Egashira R et al. Difference of morphology and immunophenotype between central and peripheral squamous cell carcinomas of the lung. Biomed Res Int 2013;2013:157838.
A pleural effusion on the chest
Two chests seen from the front, as on an X-ray, the right lung on the left of each picture: pale pink lungs with the pale blue-grey trachea and bronchi branching in them, a rose heart low between them, and a rose band of diaphragm under each lung. On the left, a small effusion: a little pale teal wedge of fluid fills only the outer lower corner of the right chest, the costophrenic angle, where the diaphragm meets the side wall, its upper edge curving up the wall, and the lung rests on it. On the right, a massive effusion: pale teal fluid fills most of the right chest, its upper edge a curve that rises highest against the side wall; the right lung has shrunk into a small collapsed lump at its root, near the middle; and the trachea and heart are pushed across towards the other side.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Fluid collects first where gravity takes it, in the costophrenic angle: an upright X-ray shows 300 mL or more, first as a blunted angle, and below about 500 mL an effusion rarely does much more. A larger effusion makes a dense shadow with a curved upper edge rising up the side wall, the meniscus. A massive one can whiten the whole hemithorax, compress the lung until it collapses, and push the trachea and mediastinum away, towards the other side: the opposite of a collapsed lung, which pulls them towards itself.

Simplified: the chest drawn as a flat front view, the ribs and soft tissues left out, the cavity a thin band round each lung; the fluid drawn as in a patient standing or sitting up; lying flat it spreads behind the lung instead; the trachea, heart and collapsed lung shifted together, and the left lung left as it was; the lungs, airways and heart drawn as on other lung figures, not as an X-ray shows them.

3 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: the chest X-ray (p. 929), physical signs (Box 28.8, p. 938), imaging of pleural effusion (p. 939) and pleural effusion (p. 972).
  2. Pai V et al. Pleural effusion (case 27112). Radiopaedia.
  3. Patel TP, Karle EM, Krvavac A. Resorptive (obstructive) atelectasis. BMJ Case Rep 2019;12(11):e232405.
A tuberculous granuloma
A round field of lung under the microscope, pale pink alveolar walls round white air spaces at its edge. In the middle sits a granuloma in rings. At its centre a pale cream disc of caseous necrosis, flecked with dark specks of broken nuclei, with a few small yellow-green rods, the bacilli, lying in it. Round it a ring of epithelioid macrophages, a sheet of pale peach cytoplasm without clear borders, full of long pale nuclei that point outwards from the centre, some with bacilli beside them; four large round Langhans giant cells sit among them, each with a horseshoe of small nuclei round its edge. Outside them a broad mantle of small round lymphocytes, crowded together, and round everything a thin pale green fibrous capsule of wavy collagen fibres with long thin nuclei. The alveoli of the lung press up against the capsule.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Macrophages that have taken up the bacilli but cannot kill them gather round them and become epithelioid cells, and some fuse into Langhans giant cells; lymphocytes surround them, and their signals both activate the macrophages and kill the tissue in the middle, which dies into dry, cheesy caseous necrosis. A fibrous capsule can wall the whole lesion off. The bacilli are held in check rather than destroyed: they can survive in the caseum for years, and reawaken if immunity fails.

Simplified: the cells and the bacilli drawn far larger than they are, and far fewer; the granuloma drawn as neat rings round a round centre; a real one is irregular, and several often merge; the bacilli drawn as if stained, in a colour of their own; in the usual stain they do not show, and even in the Ziehl–Neelsen stain they are hard to find; the epithelioid cells drawn as a sheet with their nuclei, and every lymphocyte as a round nucleus with a rim of cytoplasm.

3 sources
  1. Corrin B, Nicholson AG. Pathology of the Lungs, 3rd edition. Churchill Livingstone, 2011. Chapter 5, Infectious diseases: tuberculosis.
  2. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: tuberculosis, pathogenesis (p. 968).
  3. Kumar SN, Prasad TS, Narayan PA, Muruganandhan J. Granuloma with Langhans giant cells: an overview. J Oral Maxillofac Pathol 2013;17(3):420–423.
The right ventricle in acute pulmonary embolism
Two hearts cut straight across through both ventricles, as an echocardiogram's short-axis view shows them, in soft rose muscle with pale red blood in the cavities. On the left, a healthy heart: the left ventricle a thick round ring of muscle round a round cavity, two small papillary muscles on its back wall, and wrapped round its upper left side (the patient's right, towards the front) a thin crescent, the right ventricle, with a thin outer wall. On the right, the heart in acute pulmonary embolism: the right ventricle swollen into a large round chamber, wider than the left ventricle, its thin wall stretched; the septum between them no longer curves into the right ventricle but runs flat, pushed towards the left ventricle, whose cavity is small and shaped like a letter D.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

An embolism blocking much of the pulmonary arteries suddenly raises the resistance the right ventricle pumps against. It dilates, and its thin wall cannot raise the pressure much; its contraction lasts longer than the left's, the septum is pushed flat or bowed into the left ventricle, and the left ventricle, poorly filled, pumps less: the cardiac output falls. On an echocardiogram a flattened septum and a right ventricle as wide as the left or wider are signs of this strain; a right ventricle as wide as the left or wider marks a worse prognosis.

Simplified: one cut across the middle of the ventricles, drawn as a diagram, without the atria, valves, pericardium or the heart's own vessels; both hearts drawn at one moment of the beat, their shapes smoothed: a real right ventricle is a more irregular crescent, its inner surface ridged with muscle; the septum's flattening drawn as fixed, though it shifts through the beat.

3 sources
  1. Konstantinides SV et al. 2019 ESC guidelines for the diagnosis and management of acute pulmonary embolism, developed in collaboration with the European Respiratory Society. Eur Heart J 2020;41(4):543–603. Sections 3.3, Pathophysiology, 4.9, Echocardiography, and 5.2.1, Imaging of right ventricular size and function.
  2. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 29, Venous thromboembolic disease: diagnosis (p. 1005); chapter 30, Cardiovascular disease: pulmonary hypertension (p. 1117, Fig. 30.103).
  3. Hamirani YS, Hnatiuk O, Pett S, Roldan CA. Large serpiginous thrombus straddling the patent foramen ovale and traversing through mitral and tricuspid valves into both ventricles. J Radiol Case Rep 2014;8(7):1–13.
Kraepelin's split of the major psychoses
Two lives drawn left to right in time, each a soft lavender line on a pale band. Above, dementia praecox: the line runs level through childhood, falls steeply in youth, climbs back only part of the way, and falls twice more, each time settling lower, so that it ends well below where it began; the space between the earlier level, a fine dashed line, and the lowered life is washed pale lavender. Below, manic-depressive insanity: the line rises into a hump of mania, returns to the dashed level, dips into a trough of depression, returns again, and rises into a second mania before running level to the end.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Kraepelin followed his patients for years and split the major psychoses by their course and outcome, set out in his textbook of 1899. Dementia praecox began young and deteriorated, any recovery only partial; manic-depressive insanity came in episodes, with full recovery between them. Bleuler renamed the first schizophrenia in 1908, and the split still divides ICD-10's schizophrenias (F20 to F29) from its mood disorders (F30 to F39).

Simplified: no scale on either axis: the times and depths are a sketch; the upper line shows how well the person is, the lower one the mood; the two are not measured on one scale; one typical course for each illness; real courses vary widely; Kraepelin's picture is starker than today's: about 15 to 20 per cent of first episodes of schizophrenia do not recur in 13 years, and recovery between episodes of bipolar disorder is usual but not always complete.

2 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 5, Schizophrenia and related psychoses (Historical views of schizophrenia; Box 5.4, Outcome in schizophrenia), and chapter 7, Bipolar illness (Historical perspective; Bipolar (affective) disorder 1: classification).
  2. Shorter E. A History of Psychiatry, from the Era of the Asylum to the Age of Prozac. John Wiley and Sons, 1997. On Kraepelin and Bleuler.
The diagnostic hierarchy
Five soft lavender blocks stacked into a stepped pyramid, lit from the upper left, each block narrower than the one below it. A column of numbers on the left points to each block, from the smallest at the top to the widest at the base.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Psychiatric diagnosis works down a hierarchy. A disorder higher up can produce the symptoms of those below it, but not the reverse: delirium can bring hallucinations, low mood and anxiety, while an anxiety disorder does not cause clouding of consciousness. So an organic cause is looked for first, then substances, then psychotic, mood and neurotic disorders, and ICD-10's blocks F0 to F4 follow the same order.

Simplified: the tiers' sizes and colours mean nothing: only their order does; five tiers only: other groups, such as the personality disorders (often set at the foot of the order) and the developmental disorders, are left out; a rule of thumb, not a law: two disorders can be present together, and both are then coded, the main one first.

4 sources
  1. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders, Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. WHO, 1992; and ICD-10 version 2019, chapter V (F00–F99).
  2. Foulds GA, Bedford A. Hierarchy of classes of personal illness. Psychological Medicine, 1975; 5: 181–192.
  3. Surtees PG, Kendell RE. The hierarchy model of psychiatric symptomatology: an investigation based on Present State Examination ratings. British Journal of Psychiatry, 1979; 135: 438–443.
  4. Sturt E. Hierarchical patterns in the distribution of psychiatric symptoms. Psychological Medicine, 1981; 11: 783–794.
The interview room
A plan of a small room seen from above, its floor cream and its walls pale. Near the middle two apricot armchairs are turned towards each other at an angle, neither facing the other straight on; in the left one sits the doctor, a white clipboard on their knees, and in the upper right one the patient. A door opens in the left wall beside the doctor and another in the top wall beside the patient, each leaf swung into the room with its swing dashed. A desk with two sheets of paper stands against the bottom wall, away from the chairs, and a small red alarm button is set in the left wall beside the doctor.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

In psychiatry the patient does not face the doctor across a desk. Two comfortable chairs of the same height, turned towards each other at an angle, are less confrontational and still allow eye contact, and a clipboard lets the doctor write as they go. Ideally each has a door of their own; with one door, the doctor sits so that the patient is not between them and it. The alarm is found before it is needed, and anything that could be used as a weapon is taken out of the room.

Simplified: a plan seen from above: the chairs' equal height cannot show; the ideal room, with two doors; many rooms have one, and then the doctor sits nearer to it; only what the interview needs is drawn; a real room also keeps out anything that could be used as a weapon.

2 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 2, Psychiatric assessment (The clinical interview, Box 2.1; Setting the scene; Interviewing psychiatric patients).
  2. Bourke J. Liaison psychiatry. In Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 25, Box 25.2, Essentials of a safe psychiatric interview.
Clock drawing and figure copying
Two sheets of cream paper side by side. On the left sheet, at the top, two printed pentagons overlap at their tips so that where they cross makes a small four-sided figure; below, on the left, a pencil copy, slightly uneven but with both shapes five-cornered and crossing in the same way, and on the right a poor pencil copy: a four-cornered shape and a five-cornered one, apart. On the right sheet, two pencil clocks. The upper one is whole: a circle, the numbers one to twelve evenly round it, and two hands from the centre, the short one just past the eleven and the long one on the two. The lower one has all its numbers crowded into the right half of the circle, twelve at the top and eleven near the bottom, and two hands of the same length pointing at the ten and the eleven.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Copying a figure and drawing a clock test visuospatial and executive function, which a conversation can miss. In the MMSE the patient copies two intersecting pentagons, and scores a point only if all 10 angles are there and the two shapes intersect. In the MoCA the patient draws a clock with all the numbers and the time set to ten past eleven, one point each for the contour, the numbers and the hands.

Simplified: example drawings, not any patient's; one impaired clock shows two kinds of error at once; real clocks vary, and a single test never makes a diagnosis; only the MMSE's and the MoCA's own scoring is shown; other clock-drawing scales score in more detail.

8 sources
  1. Folstein MF, Folstein SE, McHugh PR. "Mini-mental state": a practical method for grading the cognitive state of patients for the clinician. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 1975; 12: 189–198.
  2. Nasreddine ZS. Montreal Cognitive Assessment (MoCA): administration and scoring instructions, version 7.1 and version 8.1. MoCA Cognition.
  3. Nasreddine ZS, Phillips NA, Bédirian V et al. The Montreal Cognitive Assessment, MoCA: a brief screening tool for mild cognitive impairment. Journal of the American Geriatrics Society, 2005; 53: 695–699.
  4. Rouleau I, Salmon DP, Butters N, Kennedy C, McGuire K. Quantitative and qualitative analyses of clock drawings in Alzheimer's and Huntington's disease. Brain and Cognition, 1992; 18: 70–87.
  5. Soffer M, Butters MA, Herrmann N et al. About time: neurocognitive correlates of stimulus-bound and other time setting errors in the Clock Drawing Test. Journal of the International Neuropsychological Society, 2024; 30: 471–478.
  6. Shulman KI. Clock-drawing: is it the ideal cognitive screening test? International Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry, 2000; 15: 548–561.
  7. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 26, Neurology: dementia, bedside cognitive assessment.
  8. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 2, Psychiatric assessment (cognitive assessment instruments), and chapter 4, Neuropsychiatry (Alzheimer’s disease 1; Dementia with Lewy bodies).
Expressed emotion and relapse
A bar chart. Three pale bands run across the drawing, one under another, deepening in colour: patients living with low-expressed-emotion families, with high-EE families for less than 35 hours of face-to-face contact a week, and with high-EE families for 35 hours or more. In each band two bars run from the left towards the share who relapsed within 9 months, a graphite bar for patients on antipsychotic medication above a lavender bar for those without it. In the low-EE band both bars are short. In the next both are short but the lavender one is longer. In the last both are long, the lavender one reaching nearly the whole way. Under them an axis runs from no one on the left to everyone on the right.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

In the classic London studies, people with schizophrenia who went home to a relative high in expressed emotion, critical, hostile or over-involved, relapsed far more often than those whose families were low in it. Risk rose with the hours spent face to face with that relative and fell with medication, and the two protected together: of those with long contact and no medication, nearly all relapsed within 9 months. Family intervention, which lowers expressed emotion, reduces relapse.

Simplified: the bars are the combined results of two early London studies of 128 patients, not rates for today's patients; medication was not randomised, and some groups were small; high expressed emotion reflects a stressed family coping with a hard illness, and does not cause schizophrenia; families must not be blamed; later studies found smaller differences: a median of 48% against 21% relapse within about a year.

3 sources
  1. Vaughn CE, Leff JP. The influence of family and social factors on the course of psychiatric illness: a comparison of schizophrenic and depressed neurotic patients. British Journal of Psychiatry, 1976;129:125–137.
  2. Kavanagh DJ. Recent developments in expressed emotion and schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry, 1992;160:601–620.
  3. Butzlaff RL, Hooley JM. Expressed emotion and psychiatric relapse: a meta-analysis. Archives of General Psychiatry, 1998;55(6):547–552.
The cognitive model
On the left, a pale rounded box, the situation, holds four soft lavender pieces at the corners of a diamond: thoughts at the top, emotions on the right, body sensations at the bottom and behaviour on the left. Lines join every piece to every other, round the diamond and across it. On the right, three bands are stacked, each narrower than the one above and deeper in colour: automatic thoughts at the top, dysfunctional assumptions below them and core beliefs at the bottom. A dotted line runs from the thoughts piece to the top band.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Cognitive behavioural therapy starts from the idea that it is not a situation itself but how it is read that shapes feelings and actions. Thoughts, emotions, body sensations and behaviour act on one another, so that each can keep the others going in a vicious circle, and a change in any one, most often in thinking or in behaviour, can break it. Beneath the automatic thoughts a person notices lie rules for living and, deepest, core beliefs formed early, which therapy reaches later.

Simplified: the four pieces are drawn the same size and joined equally; which links matter most differs between disorders and people; the three levels are a working model of how beliefs are organised, not separate places in the mind; CBT has many forms; this is the shared model behind them, as it is shown to patients.

4 sources
  1. Padesky CA, Mooney KA. Presenting the cognitive model to clients. International Cognitive Therapy Newsletter, 1990;6:13–14.
  2. Beck AT, Rush AJ, Shaw BF, Emery G. Cognitive Therapy of Depression. Guilford Press, 1979.
  3. Beck JS. Cognitive Behavior Therapy: Basics and Beyond, 2nd edition. Guilford Press, 2011.
  4. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 19, Psychotherapy.
The working alliance
A patient on the left and a clinician on the right, head and shoulders, face each other across three pale lavender rings that overlap in the middle of the drawing: the agreed goals at the top, the agreed tasks below left and the bond below right. Where two rings overlap the colour deepens, and in the middle, where all three overlap, a deeper lavender patch is the alliance itself.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Bordin described the working alliance as three things patient and clinician build together: agreement on the goals of treatment, agreement on the tasks that will get there, and a bond of trust. Each supports the others, a good bond helps a patient try a hard task and agreeing goals builds the bond, and the alliance applies to any treatment, from therapy to a medication clinic. Its strength predicts how well treatment goes.

Simplified: the three parts are drawn as equal rings: the drawing shows that they make the alliance together, not how much each weighs; the patient and clinician stand for any pair or team; in practice the alliance is also with the service, and sometimes with the family; the alliance changes over time: it is strained and repaired, and its strength in the first sessions already predicts outcome.

3 sources
  1. Bordin ES. The generalizability of the psychoanalytic concept of the working alliance. Psychotherapy: Theory, Research and Practice, 1979;16(3):252–260.
  2. Horvath AO, Greenberg LS. Development and validation of the Working Alliance Inventory. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 1989;36(2):223–233.
  3. Flückiger C, Del Re AC, Wampold BE, Horvath AO. The alliance in adult psychotherapy: a meta-analytic synthesis. Psychotherapy, 2018;55(4):316–340.
The assault cycle
A soft lavender area rises and falls across the drawing with arousal over an aggressive incident, above a dashed baseline. It starts at the baseline, steps up a little at the trigger, climbs through escalation to a peak at the crisis, falls through recovery, dips below the baseline in post-crisis depression and settles back to it. Under the area a bar divides time into the five phases, deepest at the crisis. Under the bar, four pale chips set the steps of management under their phases: prevention before the trigger, de-escalation across the trigger and escalation, rapid tranquillisation and restraint under the crisis, and debrief across recovery and post-crisis depression.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Aggression usually builds: a trigger, then escalation, with rising tension, raised voice and pacing, then the crisis, when control is lost, then recovery and a low after it. Each phase calls for its own response. Prevention and early de-escalation, while arousal is still rising, are the most effective and the least restrictive; medication by injection, restraint or seclusion is a last resort at the crisis; and a debrief afterwards, for patient and staff, helps prevent the next incident.

Simplified: arousal has no scale and the phases are not drawn to time: an incident can build over hours or erupt in seconds; the assault cycle is a teaching model; many incidents do not follow it, and some come without warning; the steps overlap: de-escalation goes on through every phase, and most incidents end without anything restrictive.

3 sources
  1. Kaplan SG, Wheeler EG. Survival skills for working with potentially violent clients. Social Casework, 1983;64(6):339–346.
  2. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Violence and aggression: short-term management in mental health, health and community settings (NG10), 2015.
  3. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 23, Difficult and urgent situations.
Development in the pervasive developmental disorders
Three pale lanes, one above the other, run across the first twelve years, the early years spread wide, with ticks for the years beneath them. In each lane a soft lavender area rises with the child's skills, and a dashed line shows typical development, rising fast at first and then more slowly. In childhood autism, the top lane, the area follows the dashed line at first, then falls behind it in the second and third years and stays below it. In childhood disintegrative disorder, the middle lane, the area follows the dashed line to past two, then falls steeply and stays low. In Rett syndrome, the bottom lane, the area follows the dashed line for the first months, flattens, then falls steeply between one and four, marked by a bracket, levels off with a little regained, and slowly declines again from about ten. A dotted line crosses all three lanes at three.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The pervasive developmental disorders of ICD-10 are told apart partly by when and how development goes wrong. In childhood autism it is abnormal before 3. In childhood disintegrative disorder it is normal to at least 2, and then skills are lost in several areas. In Rett syndrome, almost always in girls, early development seems normal, then stalls, and between about 1 and 4 purposeful hand use and speech are lost. ICD-11 and DSM-5 fold autism and disintegrative disorder into autism spectrum disorder, and list Rett syndrome as a genetic condition.

Simplified: development is drawn as one line; in reality language, social, motor and hand skills move separately, and in Rett syndrome motor skills decline while eye contact improves; each course is typical, drawn by hand, and the heights have no scale; Asperger syndrome, with no delay in language or cognitive development, is not drawn.

4 sources
  1. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders: Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. WHO, 1992. F84, Pervasive developmental disorders.
  2. Hagberg B, Witt-Engerström I. Rett syndrome: a suggested staging system for describing impairment profile with increasing age towards adolescence. American Journal of Medical Genetics Supplement, 1986;1:47–59.
  3. Neul JL, Kaufmann WE, Glaze DG, et al. Rett syndrome: revised diagnostic criteria and nomenclature. Annals of Neurology, 2010;68(6):944–950.
  4. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 17, Intellectual disability; chapter 15, Child and adolescent psychiatry.
ADHD from childhood to adult life
Three pale lanes, one above the other, run across the same years, from early childhood on the left to thirty on the right, with ticks for the years beneath them. In each lane a soft lavender area rises with how marked one group of symptoms is. Inattention, in the top lane, is high through childhood and falls only a little into adult life. Overactivity, in the middle lane, is highest in early childhood and falls steeply through adolescence to a low level. Impulsivity, in the bottom lane, falls too, but less. Three fine dotted lines cross all the lanes: at seven, at twelve and at twenty-five.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

ADHD begins in childhood, by 7 in ICD-10 and with several symptoms before 12 in DSM-5 and ICD-11, but it often does not end there. Overactivity fades most through adolescence, often to inner restlessness, impulsivity less and inattention least. By 25 about 15 per cent still meet the full criteria, and about 65 per cent, counting them, still have symptoms that impair them.

Simplified: the heights have no scale: each lane shows how marked one group of symptoms is, relative to itself; the course is typical, drawn by hand, not one person's; some recover fully and some keep all their symptoms; the figures at 25 come from a meta-analysis of follow-up studies and depend on how remission is defined.

5 sources
  1. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders: Diagnostic Criteria for Research (DCR-10). WHO, 1993. F90, Hyperkinetic disorders.
  2. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th edition, text revision (DSM-5-TR). APA, 2022. Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder.
  3. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, 6A05.
  4. Biederman J, Mick E, Faraone SV. Age-dependent decline of symptoms of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder: impact of remission definition and symptom type. American Journal of Psychiatry, 2000;157(5):816–818.
  5. Faraone SV, Biederman J, Mick E. The age-dependent decline of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder: a meta-analysis of follow-up studies. Psychological Medicine, 2006;36(2):159–165.
IQ and intellectual disability
A bell curve of IQ across the population in a pale wash, highest in the middle at the mean, marked by a dotted line, and falling away on both sides; ticks along the axis mark each standard deviation. The thin left tail below seventy, two standard deviations below the mean, is lavender. Under the axis a bar divides the low end into the ICD-10 grades, darkest at the far left and paler toward the mean: profound, then severe, moderate and mild, palest, which ends at seventy. Beside mild, a dashed, unfilled stretch from seventy to the mid-eighties is borderline intellectual functioning.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

IQ is scaled so the population averages 100, with a standard deviation of 15, and intellectual disability begins about two standard deviations below the mean, under 70. ICD-10 grades it by IQ into mild, moderate, severe and profound, and about 85 per cent of people with intellectual disability have the mild form. An IQ alone never makes the diagnosis: adaptive behaviour must be limited too, from the developmental period, and ICD-11 and DSM-5 grade severity by adaptive behaviour.

Simplified: an IQ score is an estimate with a margin of error of several points, and tests cannot measure reliably at the lowest levels; the bell curve is the tests' model of the population; real numbers at the low end are higher than it predicts, from genetic and other causes; the grades shown are ICD-10's, by IQ; ICD-11 and DSM-5 grade severity by adaptive behaviour.

4 sources
  1. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders: Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. WHO, 1992. F70 to F79, Mental retardation.
  2. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Disorders of intellectual development, 6A00.
  3. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4th edition, text revision (DSM-IV-TR). APA, 2000. Mental retardation.
  4. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 17, Intellectual disability.
Where the electrodes go in ECT
Three heads seen from above in a row, in the warm body colour, each with its nose to the top of the page and an ear on each side; the patient's right is on the right. Each has two electrodes, pale discs with dark rims, and between them a soft lavender field, the current. On the first head the electrodes sit on both temples, a little in front of the ears, and the field runs right across the head. On the second they sit on the forehead, one above each outer corner of the eye, and the field runs across the front. On the third, one sits on the right temple and the other on the right side of the crown, and the field stays on the right side of the head.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

In ECT a brief current through the scalp starts a seizure under anaesthesia and muscle relaxation, and where the electrodes go decides how much of the brain the current crosses. Bitemporal placement works most reliably and fastest but affects memory most. Right unilateral placement, both electrodes over the non-dominant hemisphere, spares memory most and works almost as well at a high enough dose. Bifrontal placement works about as well; whether it spares memory more than bitemporal is unsettled.

Simplified: the heads are seen from above and drawn as ovals; the temporal electrodes sit low on the side of the head, which a view from above foreshortens; the current is drawn as a soft field between the electrodes; in the head it spreads, and much of it runs through the scalp and skull; the pictures show where the electrodes go, not the dose, pulse width or number of sessions, which matter as much.

2 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 6, Depressive illness: electroconvulsive therapy.
  2. Kellner CH, Knapp R, Husain MM, et al. Bifrontal, bitemporal and right unilateral electrode placement in ECT: randomised trial. British Journal of Psychiatry, 2010;196(3):226–234.
Where antidepressants act
A serotonin synapse. Above, the terminal of a serotonin neuron, pale lavender, comes down from the top and widens into a bulb; below, across a narrow cleft, lies the receiving neuron. In the terminal five round vesicles hold small pink serotonin, and a sixth has opened on the membrane to release it. Up on the left a mitochondrion carries a small green monoamine oxidase, with a graphite MAO inhibitor on it. In the terminal's membrane, facing the cleft, a green serotonin transporter stands on the right with a graphite SSRI in it, and a paler green α2 receptor on the left with graphite mirtazapine in it. Pink serotonin is scattered through the cleft. Along the receiving neuron's membrane four deeper green serotonin receptors face the cleft.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Most antidepressants raise serotonin, noradrenaline or both at the synapse. SSRIs block the serotonin transporter, so serotonin stays longer in the cleft; SNRIs and most tricyclics block the noradrenaline transporter as well. MAO inhibitors block the enzyme that breaks serotonin and noradrenaline down inside the terminal. Mirtazapine blocks α2 receptors, which hold back their release. The levels rise within hours, but mood lifts only over weeks, as the brain adapts.

Simplified: one serotonin synapse is drawn; the same drugs act at noradrenaline synapses, and vortioxetine, agomelatine, trazodone and esketamine act in other ways; nothing is to scale: a vesicle is far larger than a transporter, and a terminal holds hundreds of vesicles; the picture shows the first effect, within hours; the effect on mood comes later and is not fully understood.

2 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 6, Depressive illness: antidepressants.
  2. Stahl SM. Stahl's Essential Psychopharmacology: Neuroscientific Basis and Practical Applications, 5th edition. Cambridge University Press, 2021. Chapter 7, Treatments for mood disorders.
The GABA-A receptor
On the left, the receptor seen from outside the cell: five green subunits, each a rounded slice of a ring, round a small dark pore with a teal chloride ion in it. The γ subunit, palest, is at the top; going round anticlockwise come a β, deeper green, an α, lighter, the other β and the other α. A small pink GABA sits at the rim where each β meets the α after it, two in all, and a larger graphite benzodiazepine where the second α meets the γ. On the right, the receptor cut through, standing in an amber membrane: two green walls, an α and a β, with large heads outside the cell and stems through the membrane, the pore between them. A pink GABA sits on the β's head and the graphite benzodiazepine on the α's. Teal chloride ions come down from outside, pass through the pore and reach the pale inside of the neuron below.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The GABA-A receptor is a chloride channel of five subunits, usually two α, two β and one γ. GABA binds where β meets α and opens it; chloride flows in and the neuron becomes harder to fire. Benzodiazepines bind at their own site, where α meets γ, and make GABA open the channel more often: they add to GABA's effect but do little without it, which is why they are safer in overdose than barbiturates.

Simplified: the subunits are drawn as smooth slices and walls; each is a long chain with a large head outside the cell and four helices through the membrane; the commonest receptor is drawn; others differ in their subunits, and some have no benzodiazepine site; in the cut, GABA and the benzodiazepine are drawn on the heads of the walls; their sites lie between the subunits, as the view from outside shows.

3 sources
  1. Sigel E, Ernst M. The benzodiazepine binding sites of GABA-A receptors. Trends in Pharmacological Sciences, 2018;39(7):659–671.
  2. Olsen RW, Sieghart W. International Union of Pharmacology. LXX. Subtypes of γ-aminobutyric acid A receptors: classification on the basis of subunit composition, pharmacology, and function. Update. Pharmacological Reviews, 2008;60(3):243–260.
  3. Rudolph U, Knoflach F. Beyond classical benzodiazepines: novel therapeutic potential of GABA-A receptor subtypes. Nature Reviews Drug Discovery, 2011;10(9):685–697.
The window of D2 occupancy
Above, a strip of amber membrane is crossed by ten green D2 receptors in a row. The seven on the left each hold a graphite antipsychotic in the pocket at their top; of the three on the right, two hold a small pink dopamine and one is empty. A fine bracket runs under the seven, ending above seventy per cent of the way along a long pale bar below. The bar is occupancy, from none on the left to all on the right; a short stretch of it, from about two-thirds to about four-fifths, is lavender. From that stretch three fine ink lines stand up, the leftmost tallest: response, a raised prolactin and extrapyramidal effects. Under the bar, a soft lavender band from low down to below the lavender stretch is where clozapine and quetiapine work.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Antipsychotics work by blocking dopamine D2 receptors, and in the striatum the dose that helps is close to the dose that harms. Response is likely once about 65 per cent of the receptors are occupied, prolactin rises above about 72 and extrapyramidal effects become likely above about 78, so pushing the dose beyond the window adds side effects, not benefit. Clozapine and quetiapine work below it.

Simplified: ten receptors stand for the many millions in the striatum, and occupancy changes over the day as the level rises and falls; the thresholds come from one study of haloperidol in first-episode patients and are averages: people differ; occupancy is measured in the striatum; it may differ in the cortex and the pituitary.

4 sources
  1. Kapur S, Zipursky R, Jones C, Remington G, Houle S. Relationship between dopamine D2 occupancy, clinical response, and side effects: a double-blind PET study of first-episode schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry, 2000;157(4):514–520.
  2. Kapur S, Zipursky R, Jones C, Shammi CS, Remington G, Seeman P. A positron emission tomography study of quetiapine in schizophrenia: a preliminary finding of an antipsychotic effect with only transiently high dopamine D2 receptor occupancy. Archives of General Psychiatry, 2000;57(6):553–559.
  3. Kapur S, Zipursky RB, Remington G. Clinical and theoretical implications of 5-HT2 and D2 receptor occupancy of clozapine, risperidone, and olanzapine in schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry, 1999;156(2):286–293.
  4. Kapur S, Seeman P. Does fast dissociation from the dopamine D2 receptor explain the action of atypical antipsychotics? A new hypothesis. American Journal of Psychiatry, 2001;158(3):360–369.
How two currents make a beat
Four pale lanes, one above the other. In the top lane an ink sine wave of steady height in a pale lavender band: the first circuit's 4000 Hz current. In the second lane a slightly faster one: the second circuit's 4100 Hz current. In the third, taller lane, their sum: an ink wave inside a lavender outline that swells to twice the height where the two are in step and narrows to nothing where they cancel, twice across the lane. In the bottom lane a nerve's line with a spike just after each swell. Two dotted lines run down through all the lanes, one where the two waves are in step and one where they cancel, and a bracket under the lanes spans one beat.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Interferential current crosses two medium-frequency currents a little apart in frequency, here 4000 and 4100 Hz. Where they meet they drift in and out of step, so their sum swells and fades 100 times a second, the difference between them: the beat. The carriers get the current through the skin easily; the beat is what the nerves follow, like the slow wobble you hear from two notes a little out of tune.

Simplified: the carriers are drawn with about a dozen cycles in each beat; at 4000 and 4100 Hz there are 40; the two currents are drawn equally strong and running in the same line, where the beat is full; elsewhere in the tissue it is shallower; the nerve is drawn firing once on every swell; a real one can miss swells, and adapts if the current stays the same.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. 11.1, Principle of interference.
  2. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Medium frequency currents, interference current.
  3. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter on interferential therapy.
  4. Ward AR. Electrical stimulation using kilohertz-frequency alternating current. Physical Therapy, 2009.
Why medium frequencies pass the skin
On the left, a block of skin in section, in a warm beige: a darker band on top, the horny layer, with fine lines across it, and lighter living skin and tissue beneath. On it sits an electrode, a pale plate with a dark rim, on a moist pad. To its right an ink circuit runs from the electrode down through a resistor and a capacitor side by side and back into the tissue. On the right, a chart: a thick ink curve starts high at the left, at low frequencies, falls steeply across the middle and levels off low at the right, at high frequencies. The axis under it has a tick at every tenfold step of frequency. A pale lavender column marks where medium-frequency currents are used in practice, and three brackets under the axis mark the low, medium and high frequency bands.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The skin's outer horny layer is a poor conductor between two good ones, the electrode's pad and the salty tissue, so it acts like a capacitor, which lets an alternating current through more easily the faster it alternates. So the skin opposes low-frequency currents strongly and medium-frequency currents much less: these need less voltage, stimulate the skin's nerves less, and a stronger current can be given comfortably.

Simplified: real skin is not a pure capacitor: a pure one's opposition would be 80 times lower at 4000 Hz than at 50 Hz, while the skin's falls less; the curve has no scale and is drawn from a simple model, not measured; real skin varies widely between people, places and how moist it is; the horny layer is drawn far thicker than it is, and the living skin and the tissues under it as one.

5 sources
  1. Ward AR. Electrical stimulation using kilohertz-frequency alternating current. Physical Therapy, 2009.
  2. Watson T. Interferential therapy. Electrotherapy on the web (electrotherapy.org), accessed 2026. The skin impedance at 50 Hz and at 4000 Hz.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Comparison with low-frequency currents: skin impedance and patient comfort.
  4. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Electrotherapy, types of electric current; medium frequency currents.
  5. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on interferential therapy and electrical stimulation.
Four-pole interferential current at the knee
A right knee cut across above the joint, seen from above, the kneecap at the top and the inner side on the left: warm beige skin, cream fat beneath it, rose muscles behind the joint, and the ivory femur, its two condyles behind, with the kneecap in front of it. Four electrodes, pale discs with dark rims, sit on the skin: at the front and the back, and on the inner and outer sides. A soft lavender field joins each pair, one running front to back and one side to side, crossing in the middle. Over the crossing lies a deeper lavender cloverleaf, its four leaves pointing along the diagonals, between the electrodes. Dotted lines run from each electrode to its partner, through the gaps between the leaves. An arc with a tick at each end curves round the tip of the upper-right leaf.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

In classical four-pole interferential therapy two circuits, here 4000 and 4100 Hz, cross over the target, and where their currents meet they beat at the difference, 100 Hz. How deep the beat is depends on where: full on the diagonals between the circuits, weak along each circuit's own line, a four-leaved cloverleaf. The vector scan swings the cloverleaf to and fro to cover more tissue.

Simplified: the cloverleaf is the textbook's map for a uniform medium; in a real knee, bone, fat and muscle bend the currents and the leaves lie only near the diagonals; the beat is drawn only where the currents cross, but it forms near the electrodes too; the old claim that it forms only deep, sparing the skin, is not correct, and crossed currents are not shown to reach deeper; each current is drawn as a soft lens between its electrodes; in the knee it spreads widely and is strongest near the skin, and the knee's section is simplified.

5 sources
  1. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter on interferential therapy.
  2. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Medium frequency currents, interference current.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. 11, Interferential current: vector scan and frequency sweep.
  4. Beatti A, Rayner A, Souvlis T, Chipchase L. Penetration and spread of interferential current in cutaneous, subcutaneous and muscle tissues. Physiotherapy, 2011.
  5. Ozcan J, Ward AR, Robertson VJ. A comparison of true and premodulated interferential currents. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 2004.
The four types of sinusoidal modulated current
Four pale lanes stacked on the right, each with a fast ink wave inside a lavender outline, and under them four smaller panels side by side. Type 1: the outline swells and narrows evenly all along the lane. Type 2: a run of swells, then a flat line with no current, then swells again; brackets under the lane mark the two parts of the cycle, as under the next two. Type 3: a run of swells, then a stretch of steady wave at full height, then swells again. Type 4: slow swells, then about twice as many in the same time, then slow ones again. The panels: a steady wave that never dips; one whose outline dips to half its height; one that dips to nothing between swells; and one broken into separate short bursts with flat gaps between them.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Sinusoidal modulated current is one medium-frequency carrier, usually 5 kHz (2 to 10 kHz), whose strength the device swells and fades at 10 to 150 Hz: the carrier passes the skin easily, and the slow rhythm tells the nerves what to do. The four types are the same current in four rhythms. A steady rhythm works strongly, but nerves soon adapt (type 1); a changing one works more gently but for longer (types 3 and 4); real pauses let muscle contract and rest (type 2). The deeper the modulation, the more stimulating the current.

Simplified: time is squeezed: each drawn swell stands for about 25 real ones, and the carrier swings a few times in each swell instead of 50; the types are drawn at 75 per cent depth and type 2 at 100; each can be set to any depth; in type 3 the plain carrier is drawn at the swells' full strength; the rectified (one-way) form of each type is not shown.

2 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Medium frequency currents, sinusoidal modulated current: types and deepness of the modulations.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. 10, Sinusoidal modulated currents: four classical types, modulation depth, main parameters.
The lithium level over a day
A chart: hours after the evening dose run to the right, from the dose to the next a day later, and serum lithium rises up the page. Pale bands run across it. Low down, a lavender band is the usual target range; just above it a paler lavender band is the higher level used after a relapse. Higher up, a light grey wash marks where toxicity is likely, and above it a deeper grey wash, to the top, where it is severe. Graphite tablets sit on the axis at the start and the end, the evening doses. The level, a graphite line, starts just below the target range, the trough before the dose, rises for a few hours after the dose to just above its top, and falls slowly back over the rest of the day. A dotted line stands up from twelve hours to the level, with a ring where they meet, in the target range: the blood test.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Lithium has a narrow range: most aim for 0.6 to 0.8 mmol/L, sometimes up to 1, while toxicity is likely above about 1.5 and severe above 2. The level rises for a few hours after each dose and falls slowly until the next, so it is measured at a set time, 12 hours after the dose, and a level taken at another time cannot be read against the range.

Simplified: the curve is drawn by hand from lithium's usual kinetics at steady state, not measured, and its shape differs with the tablet and the person; the ranges are for adults; older people often need lower levels and can be toxic within the range; toxicity is judged on the symptoms as well as the level: a level within the range does not rule it out.

3 sources
  1. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Bipolar disorder: assessment and management (CG185), 2014, updated 2023. Lithium.
  2. Joint Formulary Committee. British National Formulary. Lithium carbonate: monitoring and toxicity.
  3. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 7, Bipolar illness.
Severity first, then traits
Three rows on pale trays. Across the top, four rounded steps of deepening lavender: personality difficulty, only outlined, then mild, moderate and severe personality disorder. In the middle, five pale lavender pods: negative affectivity, detachment, dissociality, disinhibition and anankastia. At the foot, four warm pale chips for the older types: dependent, under negative affectivity; anxious (avoidant), joined by fine lines to negative affectivity and to detachment; narcissistic, joined to dissociality; and anankastic, at the far right under anankastia.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

ICD-11 drops the personality types. It diagnoses one personality disorder, by how severely it disturbs the person's sense of self and their relationships, from mild to severe, and then describes it with any of five trait domains. The older cluster C types map mainly onto negative affectivity, detachment and anankastia, and narcissism onto dissociality, often with negative affectivity.

Simplified: the lines are approximate: a person is described by their own traits, not their old type, and the types often draw on several domains; ICD-11 also has a borderline pattern specifier, kept for access to the treatments built for borderline personality disorder.

4 sources
  1. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Personality disorders and related traits, 6D10 and 6D11.
  2. Tyrer P, Mulder R, Kim YR, Crawford MJ. The development of the ICD-11 classification of personality disorders: an amalgam of science, pragmatism, and politics. Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 2019;15:481–502.
  3. Bach B, First MB. Application of the ICD-11 classification of personality disorders. BMC Psychiatry, 2018;18:351.
  4. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 12, Personality disorders.
The three clusters
Three tall, pale lavender groups stand side by side, each headed by its cluster's name and holding a column of deeper lavender pods, one for each personality disorder. On the left, cluster A, odd or eccentric: paranoid, schizoid, and schizotypal, whose pod has a dashed edge. In the middle, cluster B, dramatic, emotional or erratic: dissocial, emotionally unstable, histrionic, and narcissistic, also dashed. On the right, cluster C, anxious or fearful: anankastic, anxious (avoidant) and dependent.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The ten personality disorders are grouped in three clusters by their likeness: odd or eccentric, dramatic, emotional or erratic, and anxious or fearful. The clusters come from DSM; ICD-10 uses the same types under its own names, but files schizotypal disorder with schizophrenia and narcissistic personality disorder among the other specific types. The clusters are a convenience, not a finding: many people meet the criteria for several types.

Simplified: the clusters are a convenience for learning, not a finding: many people meet the criteria for types in more than one; ICD-11 drops the types and diagnoses one personality disorder by its severity, described with trait domains.

3 sources
  1. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th edition, text revision (DSM-5-TR). APA, 2022. Personality disorders.
  2. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders: Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. WHO, 1992. F60, Specific personality disorders; F21, Schizotypal disorder.
  3. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 12, Personality disorders.
Weight in the eating disorders
A long horizontal bar of adult body mass index, low on the left and high on the right, in warm washes: the healthy range palest in the middle left, deeper below it, and deeper again through overweight and obesity to the right. Four fine lines stand up from the bar at the low end, each to a different height, the leftmost tallest: high medical risk, dangerously low weight, the ICD-10 threshold for anorexia nervosa and the ICD-11 threshold, which is where the healthy range begins. Below the bar, three soft lavender bands fade at their ends: anorexia nervosa, from the far left to the ICD-11 threshold; bulimia nervosa, across the healthy range and a little into overweight; and binge eating disorder, from the upper healthy range far into obesity.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Anorexia nervosa is the only eating disorder defined by low weight: in adults a BMI under 18.5 in ICD-11, or 17.5 or less in ICD-10, with under 14 counted as dangerously low and under 13 a high medical risk. People with bulimia nervosa usually have a normal weight, and those with binge eating disorder are often overweight or obese, so a normal weight does not rule out a serious eating disorder.

Simplified: the scale is for adults; in children and young people weight is judged by BMI-for-age centiles or the percentage of median BMI; the bands show where weight usually lies, not limits: each disorder occurs at other weights; the risk in an eating disorder is judged on many measures together, not on BMI alone.

5 sources
  1. World Health Organization. Obesity: preventing and managing the global epidemic. WHO Technical Report Series 894, 2000. The BMI classification.
  2. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders: Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. WHO, 1992. F50, Eating disorders.
  3. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Feeding or eating disorders, 6B80 to 6B8Z.
  4. Royal College of Psychiatrists. Medical emergencies in eating disorders (MEED): guidance on recognition and management (CR233), 2022, updated 2025.
  5. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 9, Eating and impulse-control disorders.
Intention and motive
A grid of rounded squares. Across the top, two pale headings: symptoms not produced on purpose, and symptoms produced on purpose. Down the left, three pale headings for the motive: none that the person is aware of, to be cared for as a patient, and an external gain. Three squares are filled, each with a person's head and shoulders in a warm skin colour. Top left, where the symptoms are not produced on purpose and there is no conscious motive, a lavender square holds the functional and somatic symptom disorders. In the right column, a lavender square in the middle row holds factitious disorder, and a square in the bottom row, outlined in dashed ink and not coloured, holds malingering. The other three squares are empty dashed outlines.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Functional and somatic symptom disorders are real symptoms that the person does not produce on purpose. What separates them from feigned illness is intention and motive: in factitious disorder the person produces the symptoms on purpose in order to be cared for as a patient, and in malingering on purpose for an external gain, such as money, drugs or avoiding work, military service or prosecution. Malingering is not a mental disorder.

Simplified: the squares are sharper than life: intention and motive are inferred, not observed, and can be hard to tell; the states can coexist, with a real disease, a functional disorder and some exaggeration in one person.

3 sources
  1. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Bodily distress disorder (6C20), dissociative neurological symptom disorder (6B60), factitious disorders (6D50, 6D51), malingering (QC30).
  2. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th edition, text revision (DSM-5-TR). APA, 2022. Somatic symptom and related disorders; malingering among other conditions that may be a focus of clinical attention.
  3. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 18, Liaison psychiatry.
After the event
Four pale lanes, one above the other, share one time line that starts at a dotted line on the left, the event, and runs two years to the right, on a scale that widens so that hours and years both fit; ticks beneath mark an hour, a day, a week, a month and a year. In each lane a soft lavender area rises with the symptoms. In the top lane, an acute stress reaction, a tall area rises within the first hour and is gone within a few days. In the second, an adjustment disorder, a lower area rises over the weeks after a change and ends within months. In the third, PTSD, a lower area of early distress fades over the first days, then a taller one rises over the following weeks and stays to the right edge, with a bracket over its first month. In the bottom lane, prolonged grief, an area rises at once and stays high to the right edge, with a bracket over its first six months, while a dashed line from the same start shows usual grief easing to nothing within about a year.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The stress-related disorders are told apart by their stressor and their timing. An acute stress reaction comes within minutes to hours and fades within days; an adjustment disorder comes within a month of a life change and usually ends within 6 months; PTSD develops over weeks after a trauma and can last for years; and in prolonged grief disorder the grief is still intense and disabling at least 6 months after a death, when usual grief would be easing.

Simplified: the heights have no scale, and time runs on a scale that widens to the right, so the first hours take as much room as the last year; each lane is a typical course drawn by hand, not one patient's; PTSD can begin after a longer delay, and complex PTSD, after prolonged or repeated trauma, is not drawn.

4 sources
  1. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders: Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. WHO, 1992. F43, Reaction to severe stress, and adjustment disorders.
  2. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Disorders specifically associated with stress, 6B40 to 6B4Z.
  3. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th edition, text revision (DSM-5-TR). APA, 2022. Trauma- and stressor-related disorders.
  4. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 8, Anxiety and stress-related disorders.
The loop that will not switch off
A brain cut down the middle and seen from the left, the front to the left, in pale lavender: the cerebrum with its folds, the corpus callosum arching over the middle, the brainstem and the cerebellum. Two deeper lavender washes mark the cortex of the loop: the orbitofrontal cortex on the underside of the frontal lobe, and the anterior cingulate cortex curving round the front of the corpus callosum. Dashed outlines, seen through the midline, mark the head of the caudate nucleus and, behind and below it, the globus pallidus; the thalamus is a deeper lavender oval behind them. A deeper lavender tract with a pale glow runs round them in a loop: from the orbitofrontal cortex, and from the cingulate, to the caudate, from the caudate to the pallidum, from the pallidum to the thalamus, and from the thalamus forward under the others back to the orbitofrontal cortex. Each link ends in a small spray of branches.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

In obsessive-compulsive disorder a loop from the orbitofrontal and anterior cingulate cortex through the caudate nucleus, the globus pallidus and the thalamus, and back to the cortex, is overactive, as if a signal of danger or of a task left unfinished cannot be switched off. Imaging shows raised activity in the orbitofrontal cortex, caudate and thalamus, which falls after successful treatment with an SSRI or with CBT.

Simplified: the caudate and the globus pallidus lie to the side of the midline, and are drawn as if seen through it; the routes are schematic, and the loop's direct and indirect paths through the basal ganglia are drawn as one; this is the leading model, not a full explanation; other circuits and transmitters, glutamate among them, are involved.

3 sources
  1. Saxena S, Rauch SL. Functional neuroimaging and the neuroanatomy of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 2000;23(3):563–586.
  2. Pauls DL, Abramovitch A, Rauch SL, Geller DA. Obsessive-compulsive disorder: an integrative genetic and neurobiological perspective. Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 2014;15(6):410–424.
  3. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 8, Anxiety and stress-related disorders: obsessive-compulsive disorder.
Escape and exposure
Anxiety, rising up the page, over the hour after entering a feared situation, with ticks along the bottom for the minutes. A dotted line near the left marks the moment of entering. A full lavender line, the first time the person stays, rises steeply to near the top, stays there for some minutes and then falls slowly by itself to a low level by the end of the hour. A deeper lavender line follows the same rise, but from a dot just before the peak, where the person escapes, it drops almost at once to the bottom and stops soon after. Two thinner, lighter lines show later sessions: the second rises only about two thirds as high and falls sooner, and a later one rises only a little and settles within minutes.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Escaping a feared situation brings relief at once, and the relief keeps the escape going, but the feared outcome is never tested, so the fear is just as strong next time. Staying, without escape or safety behaviours, lets the anxiety peak and fall by itself and the feared disaster fail to happen; repeated, the anxiety rises less and falls sooner. This exposure is the core of cognitive behavioural therapy for phobias, panic disorder, agoraphobia and social anxiety.

Simplified: anxiety has no scale and the times are typical, not measured; the curves show habituation; in the newer inhibitory learning view, exposure works through what is learnt, even if the anxiety does not fall within a session; one person in one situation is drawn; each anxiety disorder has its own patterns that keep it going.

4 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 8, Anxiety and stress-related disorders; chapter 19, Psychotherapy (behaviour therapy).
  2. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Generalised anxiety disorder and panic disorder in adults (CG113), 2011, updated 2020; Social anxiety disorder (CG159), 2013.
  3. Foa EB, Kozak MJ. Emotional processing of fear: exposure to corrective information. Psychological Bulletin, 1986;99(1):20–35.
  4. Craske MG et al. Maximizing exposure therapy: an inhibitory learning approach. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 2014;58:10–23.
Bipolar disorders over three years
Three pale lanes, one above the other, run across the same three years, with ticks for the months beneath. In each lane a fine line marks normal mood across the middle; above it a dotted line marks the level of hypomania, and in the top lane a dashed line, higher, that of mania; below it a dashed line marks a depressive episode. Mood is a soft lavender area, lighter above the middle line when it is raised and deeper below it when it is low. In the top lane, bipolar I disorder, two long deep falls below the depression line alternate with two shorter rises past the mania line, with normal mood between. In the middle lane, bipolar II disorder, the falls are longer and more frequent, and the two rises are brief and reach only past the hypomania line. In the bottom lane, cyclothymia, mood swings up and down all the time but never reaches the dotted or dashed lines.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Bipolar I disorder has at least one manic episode, usually with depressive ones; bipolar II disorder has hypomania and depression but never mania; and cyclothymia is mild instability of mood, up and down, for at least 2 years, never reaching a manic or depressive episode. In both bipolar disorders depression takes far more of the time than raised mood, most of all in type II, and mood is normal between episodes in many.

Simplified: mood has no scale; up the lane is raised mood, down the lane low mood; each lane is a typical course drawn by hand, not one patient's; episodes vary widely in number and length; mixed episodes, with manic and depressive symptoms together, and rapid cycling, with four or more episodes a year, are not drawn.

4 sources
  1. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Bipolar or related disorders, 6A60 to 6A6Z.
  2. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 7, Bipolar illness.
  3. Judd LL et al. The long-term natural history of the weekly symptomatic status of bipolar I disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 2002;59(6):530–537.
  4. Judd LL et al. A prospective investigation of the natural history of the long-term weekly symptomatic status of bipolar II disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 2003;60(3):261–269.
Treating depression in phases
A soft lavender line runs left to right over time, with worse symptoms lower on the page. Below a dashed line across the middle, a pale lavender wash marks the symptoms that make an episode. The line starts high and level, falls steeply into the wash, the depressive episode, and after treatment begins climbs back: a dot where it has come halfway up, response, a dot where it is back near the top, remission, and a dot further on at the top, recovery. Two dashed lines branch down from it into the wash: one between remission and recovery, a relapse, and one after recovery, a recurrence. Beneath, three pale bars mark the phases: acute, from the start of treatment to remission; continuation, from remission to recovery; and maintenance, after it.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A depressive episode is treated in three phases. The acute phase aims at response, symptoms at least halved, and then remission, when the person is nearly well. Continuation keeps the treatment going for at least 6 months after remission, to prevent a relapse, the return of the same episode; once remission has lasted, the person has recovered. Maintenance, for those at raised risk, aims to prevent a recurrence, a new episode.

Simplified: time and severity have no scale; the phases are drawn wider or narrower than they last; one course is drawn, with a relapse and a recurrence dashed as turns it can take; the thresholds for response, remission and recovery differ between studies and scales.

5 sources
  1. Kupfer DJ. Long-term treatment of depression. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 1991;52 Suppl:28–34.
  2. Frank E et al. Conceptualization and rationale for consensus definitions of terms in major depressive disorder: remission, recovery, relapse, and recurrence. Archives of General Psychiatry, 1991;48(9):851–855.
  3. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Depression in adults: treatment and management (NG222), 2022. Preventing relapse.
  4. Geddes JR et al. Relapse prevention with antidepressant drug treatment in depressive disorders: a systematic review. The Lancet, 2003;361(9358):653–661.
  5. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 6, Depressive illness.
The other psychoses over two years
Four pale lanes, one above the other, run across the same two years, with ticks for the months beneath them. In each lane a soft lavender area rises as the psychotic symptoms grow. In the top lane, schizotypal disorder, a low area runs the whole way, with two brief peaks circled. In the second, a delusional disorder, nothing at first, then an area that rises slowly and stays level to the end, with a bracket over its first three months. In the third, an acute and transient psychosis, a dotted line marks a stress, and days later a tall, jagged area rises steeply and falls back to nothing within a few months. In the bottom lane, schizoaffective disorder, a dashed middle line has two episodes on it: in each, a lavender area rises above the line, the psychotic symptoms, and a deeper lavender area hangs below it at the same time, the mood episode, both clearing between the episodes.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The other psychotic disorders differ from schizophrenia, and from one another, in how they come on and how long they last. Schizotypal disorder is lifelong eccentricity with only brief quasi-psychotic spells; a delusional disorder is one delusion lasting at least 3 months, with life otherwise kept going; an acute and transient psychosis comes on within 2 weeks, often after a stress, and clears within a few months; and in schizoaffective disorder psychotic symptoms and a mood episode come together in the same episode.

Simplified: the heights have no scale; up the lane is more psychotic symptoms; each lane is a typical course drawn by hand, not one patient's, and each disorder varies widely; schizophrenia itself, against which these are told apart, has its own topic.

3 sources
  1. World Health Organization. The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders: Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. WHO, 1992. F21 to F25.
  2. World Health Organization. Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Requirements for ICD-11 Mental, Behavioural and Neurodevelopmental Disorders (CDDR). WHO, 2024. Schizophrenia or other primary psychotic disorders, 6A20 to 6A2Z.
  3. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 5, Schizophrenia and related psychoses.
The family risk of schizophrenia
Nine soft lavender bars, one for each kind of relative of a person with schizophrenia, run to the right from a common start, their lengths the lifetime risk drawn to scale against fine dotted lines every ten per cent, up to half. Pale bands group them by the share of genes they have with that person, and the bars are deeper for relatives who share more. At the top, alone, the identical twin, the longest bar, reaching nearly half. In the next band, sharing half their genes, the child of two affected parents, about as long, then much shorter bars for the fraternal twin, the child of one affected parent and the brother or sister. Below, the half-brother or half-sister, then the first cousin, then, sharing no genes by descent, the husband or wife and the general population, the shortest bars.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The more genes a relative shares with a person with schizophrenia, the higher their own lifetime risk: about 48 per cent for an identical twin against 1 per cent in the general population. Even an identical twin, with the same genes, is more likely not to develop it, so genes raise the risk without deciding it.

Simplified: Gottesman's figures, pooled from older European family and twin studies; other sources, such as the Oxford Handbook, give a little more for a brother, sister or child and a little less for a child of two affected parents; the share of genes is an average for each kind of relative; families share homes as well as genes; twin and adoption studies are needed to tell them apart.

3 sources
  1. Gottesman II. Schizophrenia Genesis: the Origins of Madness. WH Freeman, 1991. Figure 10, Lifetime risks of developing schizophrenia, p. 96.
  2. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 5, Schizophrenia and related psychoses, Inheritance and Table 5.2.
  3. Sullivan PF, Kendler KS, Neale MC. Schizophrenia as a complex trait: evidence from a meta-analysis of twin studies. Archives of General Psychiatry, 2003;60(12):1187–1192.
Full agonist, partial agonist, antagonist
On the left a chart: dose rises to the right and the effect at the mu opioid receptor rises up the page. A pale grey band across the top marks where breathing fails. Three graphite curves start flat at low doses. The full agonist rises late but keeps climbing into the pale band. The partial agonist, buprenorphine, a dashed curve, rises earlier, at lower doses, then levels off at a dashed ceiling well below the band. The antagonist, naloxone, a dotted line, stays flat along the floor at every dose. On the right, three short stretches of amber membrane, one beside the end of each curve, each crossed by a green receptor with a graphite drug in a pocket at its top. Under the full agonist the receptor's inner end is open wide and a darker green G protein is docked in it; under the partial agonist it is partly open with the G protein docked less deeply; under the antagonist it is shut and the G protein sits apart.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A full agonist such as heroin, methadone or fentanyl opens the receptor fully, and as the dose rises its effect climbs until breathing fails. Buprenorphine binds more tightly but opens the receptor only partly, so its effect levels off at a ceiling, and given while a full agonist is acting it displaces it and precipitates withdrawal. Naloxone binds and opens nothing, so it reverses an overdose.

Simplified: the curves have the textbook shapes, not measured values, and tolerance shifts them; the receptor is drawn as two halves that open; a real receptor has seven helices that shift; the ceiling is on breathing, not on pain relief, and holds only for buprenorphine alone.

4 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 14, Substance misuse, Opioids, p. 618.
  2. Ritter JM, Flower RJ, Henderson G, Loke YK, MacEwan D, Rang HP. Rang and Dale's Pharmacology, 9th edition. Elsevier, 2020. Chapters 2 and 3, How drugs act; chapter 43, Analgesic drugs.
  3. Mégarbane B, Hreiche R, Pirnay S, Marie N, Baud FJ. Does high-dose buprenorphine cause respiratory depression? Possible mechanisms and therapeutic consequences. Toxicological Reviews, 2006;25(2):79–85.
  4. Dahan A et al. Buprenorphine induces ceiling in respiratory depression but not in analgesia. British Journal of Anaesthesia, 2006;96(5):627–632.
When alcohol withdrawal comes
A time line over the week after the last drink, which is a fine dotted line down the left; a line along the foot has a tick for each day, with small dots marking the quarters of the first. Above it are four pale rows, each with a soft lavender hump that rises where a feature usually begins, is fullest where it is most likely and falls away where it usually ends. Early withdrawal, the top row, begins within the first half-day, is fullest over the second day and is gone by the fourth. Hallucinations, the second row, sit within the first two days. Seizures, the third row and a deeper lavender, form a narrow hump within the first two days. Delirium tremens, the bottom row and a deeper lavender, starts to rise at the end of the first day, is full from the end of the second through the fourth, and tails off through the rest of the week.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Withdrawal begins 6 to 12 hours after the last drink. Seizures come in the first two days, and delirium tremens, a medical emergency, usually begins at 48 to 72 hours, so a patient who seems well on the first day can still develop it.

Simplified: the heights of the humps are not to scale and do not show how common each feature is; most people in withdrawal never have seizures or delirium tremens; the windows are typical and drawn by hand, and the sources differ by a few hours; illness, past withdrawals and benzodiazepines move them; untreated withdrawal; a reducing course of benzodiazepine shortens and softens it.

2 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 14, Alcohol withdrawal syndromes, p. 590.
  2. Jesse S, Bråthen G, Ferrara M et al. Alcohol withdrawal syndrome: mechanisms, manifestations, and management. Acta Neurologica Scandinavica, 2017;135(1):4–16.
Where the dementias strike
Four small brains in pale lavender, each seen from the left side with the front to the left, the cerebellum and brainstem below the back. On each a deeper lavender wash marks where one dementia starts or is worst. Alzheimer's disease, top left: a dashed band along the inner face of the temporal lobe, the hippocampus, and a wash over the cortex where the temporal and parietal lobes meet. Vascular dementia, top right: a pale dashed oval deep in the white matter under the cortex, scattered with small dark dots, the lacunes. Dementia with Lewy bodies, bottom left: the brainstem and the occipital lobe at the back are shaded. Frontotemporal dementia, bottom right: the front of the frontal lobe and the tip of the temporal lobe are shaded.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Each dementia begins in, or hits hardest, its own part of the brain (or, in dementia with Lewy bodies, quiets it), and its first features follow from it: memory with the hippocampus in Alzheimer's disease; slowing and poor planning with the white matter in vascular dementia; visual hallucinations, fluctuation and parkinsonism in dementia with Lewy bodies; behaviour, or language, with the frontal and temporal lobes in frontotemporal dementia.

Simplified: each wash marks where a disease typically starts or is worst, not all its damage, and with time each spreads; for dementia with Lewy bodies the occipital wash marks lower activity on scans, not where the Lewy bodies are; the hippocampus and the deep white matter lie inside the brain and are drawn as if seen through its surface; one side of the brain drawn; the changes are usually on both sides, in frontotemporal dementia often more on one; in old age the diseases often come together, most often Alzheimer's and vascular disease.

5 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 4, Neuropsychiatry (Alzheimer's disease, vascular dementia, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia), pp. 156–165.
  2. Feather A, Randall D, Waterhouse M (eds). Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 26, Neurology: dementia.
  3. Braak H, Braak E. Neuropathological stageing of Alzheimer-related changes. Acta Neuropathologica, 1991;82(4):239–259.
  4. McKeith IG et al. Diagnosis and management of dementia with Lewy bodies: fourth consensus report of the DLB Consortium. Neurology, 2017;89(1):88–100.
  5. Rascovsky K et al. Sensitivity of revised diagnostic criteria for the behavioural variant of frontotemporal dementia. Brain, 2011;134(9):2456–2477.
The course of delirium, beside dementia
Three pale bands, one above the other, each holding a soft lavender line that runs across the same week, left to right, with higher on the page meaning clearer attention and awareness. Six pale shaded strips cross all three bands: the nights. In each band a dashed line marks the person's usual level. In the top band, delirium, the line runs high and level, then on the first afternoon, at a dotted mark for an illness, a drug or an operation, it falls within hours and begins to swing: it sinks deepest each night and rises in the mornings, with one clear spell circled on the second morning. After a second dotted mark, where the cause is treated, the swings shrink and the line climbs back over the following days to just under its usual level. In the bottom band, dementia alone, the line runs low and almost level all week. In the middle band, delirium on dementia, the line starts at the same low level, falls further after the insult, swings with the nights, and climbs back to a little below where it began.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Delirium comes on over hours to days, swings through the day, is usually worst in the evening and at night, and has lucid spells; it clears over days to weeks once its cause is treated. Dementia comes on over months to years and is steady from day to day. Delirium is often superimposed on dementia, and may leave the person below their previous level.

Simplified: the levels have no scale; up the page is clearer attention and awareness; each line is a typical course drawn by hand, not one patient's; the hypoactive form looks quiet but swings the same way; dementia is drawn over a week, in which it is steady; its decline is over months and years; dementia with Lewy bodies is the exception: it fluctuates from day to day, and is the hardest mimic of delirium.

4 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 18, Acute confusional state (delirium), pp. 854–855.
  2. Feather A, Randall D, Waterhouse M (eds). Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 15, Delirium, pp. 310–312; chapter 25, Delirium, pp. 796–797.
  3. Inouye SK, Westendorp RGJ, Saczynski JS. Delirium in elderly people. The Lancet, 2014;383(9920):911–922.
  4. Witlox J et al. Delirium in elderly patients and the risk of postdischarge mortality, institutionalization, and dementia, a meta-analysis. JAMA, 2010;304(4):443–451.
The four dopamine pathways
A brain cut down the middle and seen from the left, the front to the left, in pale lavender: the cerebrum with its folds, the corpus callosum arching over the middle, the thalamus beneath it, the brainstem running down and back, and the cerebellum behind it. In the midbrain sit two small deeper lavender cell groups, the ventral tegmental area and, just behind it, the substantia nigra. Four pink tracts run from them. From the ventral tegmental area one runs forward and down to the nucleus accumbens, a small oval low at the front of the striatum, and another runs further forward and up to the prefrontal cortex, a dashed region at the front of the frontal lobe. From the substantia nigra one runs up and forward to the dorsal striatum, drawn as a dashed region seen through the midline. A short fourth tract runs down from the arcuate nucleus at the base of the hypothalamus along the pituitary stalk toward the pituitary. Each tract ends in a small spray of branches.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Dopamine runs in four pathways, and the effects of antipsychotics, which block its D2 receptors, follow from them. Overactivity in the mesolimbic pathway is linked to positive symptoms and blocking it treats them; blocking the nigrostriatal pathway causes extrapyramidal side effects; blocking the tuberoinfundibular pathway raises prolactin; and underactivity in the mesocortical pathway is linked to negative and cognitive symptoms, which blocking can worsen.

Simplified: the striatum and the substantia nigra lie to the side of the midline, and are drawn as if seen through it; the routes are schematic, and each pathway is drawn as one tract to one target; the mesolimbic pathway also reaches the amygdala and hippocampus; the tuberoinfundibular tract is drawn down to the pituitary; it ends at the median eminence, and its dopamine reaches the pituitary in the portal blood; only the four classic pathways; dopamine has other, smaller ones.

3 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 5, Schizophrenia and related psychoses, Aetiological theories (dopaminergic overactivity); chapter 22, Therapeutic issues (hyperprolactinaemia with antipsychotics, p. 1004; antipsychotic-induced parkinsonism, p. 1010).
  2. Stahl SM. Stahl's Essential Psychopharmacology, 5th edition. Cambridge University Press, 2021. Chapter 4, Psychosis, schizophrenia, and the neurotransmitter networks dopamine, serotonin, and glutamate.
  3. Kapur S, Zipursky R, Jones C, Remington G, Houle S. Relationship between dopamine D2 occupancy, clinical response, and side effects: a double-blind PET study of first-episode schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry, 2000;157(4):514–520.
Retrograde and anterograde amnesia
A horizontal lavender line, a life from birth on the left to now on the right, studded with beads, the memories. About two thirds along, a fine upright ink line marks the onset of an illness or injury. On the left the beads are solid. Before the onset a pale wedge widens toward the line, and within it more and more of the beads are only empty dashed rings. After the onset a pale band runs to the end, and every bead in it is an empty ring. A dot marks now.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Anterograde amnesia is the inability to lay down new memories from the onset of an illness or injury; retrograde amnesia is the loss of memories from before it, usually graded, the recent lost more than the remote (Ribot's law). In Korsakoff syndrome the anterograde loss is dense and the retrograde loss reaches back years, and the gaps may be filled by confabulation; in Alzheimer's disease the anterograde loss comes first; after a head injury the retrograde loss is usually short.

Simplified: time is not to scale, and real gradients and spans vary with the cause; the onset is drawn as a moment; in Alzheimer's disease it creeps in over years; memories drawn as separate beads; memory is not stored as separate items; one dense pattern is drawn; many amnesias are partial, with islands of memory kept.

2 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 2, Abnormal cognitive function; chapter 3, Symptoms of psychiatric illness (memory).
  2. Kopelman MD. Disorders of memory. Brain, 2002;125(10):2152–2190.
The train of thought
Six pale lanes, one above another. In each, an ink dot on the left (the question) and an ink ring on the right (the point), and between them a chain of lavender beads, the ideas, linked by fine lines. Normal: a few beads in a near-straight line to the ring. Circumstantiality: many beads looping back and forth, but the chain reaches the ring. Tangentiality: the chain drifts steadily downward and ends short of the ring and below it. Flight of ideas: many close beads zigzagging quickly, every one linked to the next, ending short of the ring. Derailment: three short runs at different heights, with no link between them. Thought blocking: a short run that stops at two upright bars, a blank, then a new run at another height.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Normal thinking moves from a question to its point, each idea leading to the next. In circumstantiality the point is reached by a long way round; in tangentiality it is never reached; flight of ideas races from idea to idea by understandable links, as in mania; derailment slips onto unrelated tracks with no link, in schizophrenia and also in mania; in thought blocking the train stops dead and the mind goes blank.

Simplified: ideas drawn as beads and links as lines; real thinking has no such units; speed is shown only by how close the ideas are; each disorder drawn alone; in a patient they mix and vary from minute to minute.

2 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 2, Psychiatric assessment (thought disorder); chapter 3, Symptoms of psychiatric illness, pp. 99–120.
  2. Oyebode F. Sims' Symptoms in the Mind, Textbook of Descriptive Psychopathology, 7th edition. Elsevier, 2022. Disorders of the form of thought (formal thought disorder).
Mood and the range of affect
Four pale bands, one above another, each with a dashed level line and a lavender line running along it from left to right: one person's expressed emotion during the same conversation. Two dotted vertical lines cross all four bands, the first at a cheerful moment of the talk, the second at a sad one. In the top band, normal affect, the line plays a little and rises clearly at the cheerful moment and falls at the sad one. In the second, blunted affect, it does the same but much less. In the third, flat affect, it barely leaves the level. In the bottom band, labile affect, it swings far up and far down, quickly and often.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Mood is the steady emotional state over days or weeks, the climate; affect is the emotion shown from moment to moment, the weather, described by its range, its depth, its reactivity and its fit with what is said. Blunted and flat affect, a narrowed or almost absent range, are negative symptoms of schizophrenia; labile affect, quick and large swings, is seen in mania, organic states and personality disorders.

Simplified: a diagram: the lines are drawn, not measured, and up stands for any pleasant feeling and down for any unpleasant one; one line cannot show the range of different emotions, only how much is shown and when; books use blunted and flat differently; here flat affect is the extreme of blunting; incongruous affect, expression that does not fit what is said, is not drawn; nor are low or high mood, which would move the level itself.

3 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 2, Psychiatric assessment (mental state examination; Abnormal mood, p. 63); chapter 3, Symptoms of psychiatric illness, pp. 99–120.
  2. Bourke J. Liaison psychiatry. In Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 25, Mental state examination (Box 25.4), pp. 765–766.
  3. Kirkpatrick B, Fenton WS, Carpenter WT, Marder SR. The NIMH-MATRICS consensus statement on negative symptoms. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 2006;32(2):214–219.
Levels of consciousness
Five lavender steps going down from left to right, each with a person on it. On the top step a person sits upright, eyes open, looking ahead. On the next the head has dropped a little and the lids are heavy. On the third the head hangs forward and the eyes are shut, and three curved lines of a voice reach the ear from behind. On the two lowest steps a person lies on a pillow under a blanket, face up, eyes shut, with an examiner's thumb pressing on the brow.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The level of consciousness is described in steps, from full alertness through clouding, somnolence and sopor to coma, and the lower it is the stronger the stimulus that rouses the patient: a voice in somnolence, a painful one in sopor, none in coma. Because these words differ between countries, the level is recorded with the Glasgow Coma Scale, scored from 3 to 15; a score of 8 or less is coma.

Simplified: the steps are equal for drawing's sake; the level of consciousness falls continuously, not in equal steps; the European terms of the topic; English texts often use drowsiness and stupor (in its neurological sense) instead of somnolence and sopor; only the level of consciousness is drawn, not its content, which delirium, twilight and oneiroid states alter.

3 sources
  1. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 4th edition. Oxford University Press, 2019. Chapter 2, Abnormal cognitive function and Assessing cognitive function 1, pp. 82–85.
  2. Teasdale G, Jennett B. Assessment of coma and impaired consciousness, a practical scale. The Lancet, 1974;2(7872):81–84.
  3. Feather A, Randall D, Waterhouse M (eds). Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 26, Neurology, Disturbed consciousness: definitions and Box 26.28 (Glasgow Coma Scale); chapter 25, Liaison psychiatry, Box 25.5.
Currents by frequency
Four pale lanes side by side over a frequency axis, from direct current on the left to high frequency on the right. At the top of each lane its wave is sketched in ink over a pale lavender wash: a flat line above zero for direct current; short square pulses with gaps between them for low frequency; a sine wave of many cycles for medium frequency; and a sine wave so fast that its cycles crowd together for high frequency. Below each wave a white panel shows what that current does. Direct current: between a negative and a positive electrode, sodium ions drift towards the negative one and chloride ions towards the positive one, each with a fading trail behind it. Low frequency: a lavender line, a nerve's membrane potential, shoots up past a dotted threshold line once under every pulse. Medium frequency: the line climbs in small steps, one per cycle, until it reaches the threshold and fires, then starts again. High frequency: in a block of muscle, ions and water molecules shake in place, with short trails on both sides.−+Na⁺Cl⁻Na⁺Na⁺Cl⁻Na⁺

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Frequency decides how a current talks to the body. A direct current (0 Hz) flows one way and moves ions. Low-frequency currents, up to 1,000 Hz, fire a nerve with each pulse. Medium-frequency currents, 1,000 to 100,000 Hz, have cycles too short to fire a nerve one by one, so the nerve fires when many add up; and they pass the skin easily, because the skin's opposition falls as frequency rises. Above 100,000 Hz each cycle is far too brief to fire anything, the energy crosses the skin without contact, and what is left is heat: diathermy, at 27.12 MHz to 2.45 GHz.

Simplified: the lanes are drawn the same width, though each band spans far more frequencies than the one before: frequency rises to the right, not to scale; each wave is a sketch: low-frequency currents come in many shapes, medium-frequency currents are usually modulated, and a few dozen cycles stand for the millions of a high-frequency wave; the nerve's potential is a simple line: the size of each nudge, the leak between them and the shape of the action potential are not to scale; ions and water molecules are drawn far larger than life, and only a few; a water molecule really turns back and forth with the field rather than shifting; the direct-current panel leaves out electrolysis at the electrodes.

6 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Electrotherapy, types of electric current; Galvanization; Medium frequency currents; High frequency currents.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Galvanic current, movement of charged and polar molecules.
  3. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Electrical stimulation; interferential and medium-frequency currents; shortwave therapies.
  4. Robinson AJ, Snyder-Mackler L. Clinical Electrophysiology, electrotherapy and electrophysiologic testing, 3rd edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008.
  5. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 5th edition. Elsevier, 2018. Chapters on electrical currents and on diathermy.
  6. Hall JE, Hall ME. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology, 14th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Membrane potentials and action potentials.
The parameters of a pulsed current
A pulsed current drawn as a line over time, time running to the right and current up the page. On the left, a train of square pulses all above the zero line, each filled with a pale lavender wash: the first three grow taller one after another, along a dotted line, until the pulses reach full strength. Fine ink marks name the parameters on the third to fifth pulses: a vertical span for the height of a pulse, a short span over the top of a pulse for its width, a span along the zero line between two pulses for the interval, and a span below the line from the start of one pulse to the start of the next for the period. Past a break in the zero line, on the right, the same train as biphasic pulses: each pulse goes up for a moment and then down by the same amount for the same time, so the washed areas above and below the line are equal.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Every pulsed current is described by the same handful of settings. Amplitude decides how many and which fibres fire; pulse width, with amplitude, how much charge each pulse carries, short pulses for nerve and long ones for denervated muscle; the frequency, how many pulses come each second, decides whether a muscle twitches or contracts smoothly. The ramp lets the current build up gently. Monophasic pulses leave a net direct current behind them, with its chemical effects; balanced biphasic pulses leave none.

Simplified: neither time nor current is to scale: pulses are usually far narrower than the gaps between them; the pulses are drawn square; real pulses can be triangular, trapezoidal, sinusoidal or exponential, and rise and fall with a slope of their own; a real ramp lasts a second or more and takes many pulses, not three.

5 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Pulsed currents: waveform, polarity, pulse duration, frequency, amplitude, modulation.
  2. American Physical Therapy Association, Section on Clinical Electrophysiology. Electrotherapeutic terminology in physical therapy. APTA, 2001.
  3. Robinson AJ, Snyder-Mackler L. Clinical Electrophysiology, electrotherapy and electrophysiologic testing, 3rd edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008.
  4. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Electrical stimulation, introduction and general concepts.
  5. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 5th edition. Elsevier, 2018. Chapters on electrical currents and their effects.
A direct current in the tissue
A slice through the body: sand-coloured skin on top, a layer of cream fat cells below it, and rose muscle below that. On the skin sit two electrodes, each a pale plate on a wet pad: the cathode, marked minus, on the left, and the anode, marked plus, on the right. In the fat and muscle between them, teal balls drift with fading trails behind them: sodium ions and water molecules towards the cathode, chloride ions towards the anode. Along the top of the cathode's pad, just under the electrode where they form, sit hydroxide ions, the alkali; along the top of the anode's pad, hydrogen ions, the acid. Deep in the muscle a mauve nerve fibre runs under both electrodes, with plus signs along the outside of its membrane and minus signs inside. Under the cathode the fibre is paler and its charges are few: the membrane is depolarised. Under the anode it is deeper and its charges are crowded: the membrane is hyperpolarised.+−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−++−−+Na⁺Na⁺Na⁺Na⁺Cl⁻Cl⁻Cl⁻Cl⁻Cl⁻−+OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻OH⁻H⁺H⁺H⁺H⁺

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A direct current moves charge through the tissue, and everything it does follows from that. Cations drift to the cathode and anions to the anode; water drifts to the cathode too. At the electrodes, electrolysis makes alkali under the cathode and acid under the anode, which is why the pads must be thick and wet and why burns form there. Under the cathode the nerve membrane is depolarised and fires more easily (catelectrotonus); under the anode it is hyperpolarised and calmed (anelectrotonus).

Simplified: not to scale: the layers, the ions, the water molecules and the nerve fibre are drawn far larger than life, and the pads far thinner; the current spreads through the tissue between the pads, and the ions are shown drifting along it in a few directions; they move slowly, and most are carried along by many collisions; the charges on the membrane stand for its voltage, not for single ions; a real fibre has a myelin sheath and runs in a nerve with many others; a few ions stand for many kinds and countless numbers; potassium, calcium, bicarbonate and the gases of electrolysis are left out.

5 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Galvanization: biophysics, polarization phenomena, effects of the electrodes, hydrophile pillows.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Galvanic current: ion migration, electro-osmotic flow, changes in tissue pH.
  3. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 5th edition. Elsevier, 2018. Chapters on electrical currents and their effects.
  4. Hall JE, Hall ME. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology, 14th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Membrane potentials and action potentials.
  5. Rumble JR (ed). CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 104th edition. CRC Press, 2023. Equivalent conductivity of electrolytes in aqueous solution (limiting ionic conductivities).
How iontophoresis drives a drug in
A slice through the skin, the fat and the muscle under two electrodes, each a pale plate on a wet pad, joined by ink wires to a small stimulator above them. Under the anode, on the left, the pad holds graphite balls marked plus: lidocaine, a positive drug. Under the cathode, on the right, the pad holds paler graphite balls marked minus: dexamethasone phosphate, a negative drug. The skin's top layer, the horny layer, is a thin deeper band, broken where a sweat pore or a hair follicle opens. Under each electrode a sweat duct winds down to its coiled gland and a hair follicle runs down to the root of its hair. Drug balls with fading trails behind them travel straight down the duct and the follicle, one crosses the horny layer itself, and below the skin they spread out into the fat. A soft lavender band, the current, runs down from under one pad, across through the fat and muscle, and up under the other.+−+−++++++++++++−−−−−−−−−−−−

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Like charges repel: a positive drug goes under the anode and a negative one under the cathode, and the current pushes each away from its electrode into the skin. The dry horny layer keeps most of it out, so most enters through sweat ducts and hair follicles, where resistance is lowest, then spreads into the skin and the tissue just below; little reaches the blood. The other electrode closes the circuit. Here each electrode carries a drug, to show both; in practice one carries the drug and the other, usually larger, only returns the current.

Simplified: each electrode carries a drug, to show both charges; in practice one electrode carries the drug and the other, usually larger and some distance away, only closes the circuit; not to scale: the drug molecules, ducts and follicles are drawn far larger than life and few, and the layers' thicknesses are not true; the current spreads through the tissue rather than running in a band, and much of it passes through the ducts and follicles too; how deep the drug reaches is not measured: most stays in the skin and the tissue just below, and some is carried off by the blood.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Iontophoresis: definition and principle, requirements and pharmacokinetics.
  2. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Iontophoresis: requirements, pharmacokinetics of the iontophoretic drug.
  3. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 5th edition. Elsevier, 2018. Iontophoresis.
  4. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021.
The diadynamic currents
Six pale lanes stacked down the page, each with a waveform drawn as an ink line over soft lavender humps. The top lane is a sine wave swinging above and below its dashed middle: the mains. The second keeps only the humps above the middle, with flat gaps where the lower halves were: MF. The third has a hump in every half cycle, all standing up and touching: DF. Fine dotted lines line up the halves of the three. Under them a short bracket marks one mains cycle. The lower three lanes run over seconds: CP alternates stretches of spaced humps and of packed humps; LP has stretches of spaced humps, and between them extra humps grow in the gaps and shrink away again; RS has stretches of spaced humps separated by flat stretches with none.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Bernard made these currents from the mains. Rectifying the 50 Hz alternating current either keeps one half of each cycle (MF, 50 Hz) or turns both halves the same way (DF, 100 Hz). Alternating and interrupting the two gives CP, LP and RS. Every form flows one way only, so each carries a direct-current component, needs wet pads and can burn like galvanization. An analgesic session runs DF, then CP, then LP.

Simplified: the lower three lanes squeeze seconds into the width of the upper ones, so far fewer half-waves are drawn than flow (50 or 100 a second); every half-wave is drawn as an exact half of a sine wave at one height; how strong it is is set by the operator; sources give LP's stretches different lengths, so its lane is drawn without a time; the steady galvanic base current many devices can add under the half-waves is not drawn; with it or without it the current flows one way.

2 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Dia-dynamic (DD) current: definition, derivation and types.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Diadynamic currents (Bernard currents).
The modes of TENS
Three pale lanes stacked down the page, each with a wide panel on the left and a small one on the right. A bracket above the wide panels marks one second; one above the small panels marks a few hundred microseconds. In the wide panels the pulses are upright ink strokes swinging up and down from a dashed middle line. The top lane, conventional TENS, has a hundred short strokes packed into a dense comb. The middle lane, acupuncture-like TENS, has two tall strokes, and the bottom lane, burst TENS, two tight clusters of tall strokes. Under each tall stroke or cluster a soft rose hump rises quickly and falls more slowly: a muscle twitch; the top lane has none. In each small panel one pulse is drawn large: a step up, then a step down of the same size, back to the middle, the steps filled with soft lavender. The top one is low and narrow, the middle one tall and twice as wide, the bottom one tall and in between.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The modes of TENS differ in how fast, how long and how strong the pulses are, and so in what they fire. Conventional TENS sends fast, short, weak pulses that fire the touch fibres and close the spinal gate: a tingle and quick relief. Acupuncture-like TENS sends slow, longer, strong pulses that twitch the muscle and wake the brain's own pain control: slower, longer relief. Burst TENS packs fast pulses into slow trains, a gentler way to the same twitches. In every mode the pulses are biphasic, so the skin is not polarised.

Simplified: each mode is drawn at one value from its range, the pulse width it is quoted with drawn as the length of each of the pulse's two phases; sources and devices differ, and some count both phases together; in the trains a pulse is drawn as a line, far wider than it really is at this scale; its height shows how strong it is, not a measured current; the twitches are drawn by hand, a quick rise and a slower fall, not measured; brief-intense and modulated TENS are left out.

3 sources
  1. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter on transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation.
  2. Johnson MI. Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation (TENS): research to support clinical practice. Oxford University Press, 2014. Chapter 3, TENS equipment, techniques, and biophysical principles.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 1 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. TENS: parameters and modes.
The spinal gate and TENS
On the left, a strip of skin in the warm body colour, with a pale TENS pad on its outer face and a soft lavender field under the pad. From the skin two mauve fibres run right: above, a thick one sheathed in amber segments of myelin, starting in a small capsule; below, a thin bare one starting in fine branches. They enter a large pale lavender panel, the dorsal horn, crossed by a paler band, the substantia gelatinosa. The thick fibre ends on a round cell in the band, its ending marked plus. The round cell's axon runs down to a larger cell deeper in the horn and ends on it, marked minus. The thin fibre ends on the larger cell too, marked plus. The larger cell's axon runs up and off the top of the page. From the top of the page a third fibre comes down to the round cell and ends on it, marked plus. Three small pink transmitter molecules sit at each ending.+++−

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Pain signals from thin fibres are handed on in the dorsal horn to the cells that carry them up to the brain, and small inhibitory interneurons work as a gate on that hand-over. Conventional TENS fires the thick touch fibres, which excite the interneurons, and the gate closes: less pain goes up, and the patient feels tingling instead of aching. Strong, slow pulses also make the brainstem close the gate from above.

Simplified: a diagram of the circuit, not the dorsal horn's true shape or layers; the touch fibre's own branch to the projection neuron, and the pain fibre's effect on the interneuron, are left out; the fibres' cell bodies, in the dorsal root ganglion, are left out; the projection neuron's axon crosses to the other side of the cord before it rises; one cell stands for many and one pad for the pair TENS uses; the brainstem's fibre is drawn ending on the interneuron, though it also acts on the projection neuron directly.

4 sources
  1. Melzack R, Wall PD. Pain mechanisms: a new theory. Science, 1965;150(3699):971–979.
  2. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on the physiology of electrical stimulation and on TENS.
  3. DeSantana JM, Walsh DM, Vance C, Rakel BA, Sluka KA. Effectiveness of transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation for treatment of hyperalgesia and pain. Current Rheumatology Reports, 2008;10(6):492–499.
  4. Robinson AJ, Snyder-Mackler L. Clinical Electrophysiology: electrotherapy and electrophysiologic testing, 3rd edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008.
The strength-duration curve
A chart. Along the bottom, pulse duration on a log scale with a tick for each tenfold step; up the left side, current. A mauve curve comes down steeply from the top near the left, bends and runs level just above a dotted line, the rheobase, all the way to the right. A rose curve does the same far to the right and higher up: it comes down only in the middle of the chart and levels off above the mauve one. A dotted line at twice the rheobase runs from the left axis to a ring on the mauve curve, and from the ring a dotted line drops to the bottom axis: the chronaxie, short. A dotted level and drop mark a ring on the rose curve at twice its own rheobase, much further right: its chronaxie, long.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

For the curve, the current that just makes the muscle twitch is found for pulses from long to very short. A muscle with its nerve answers short pulses, so its curve sits to the left. Without its nerve the muscle needs pulses many times longer: the curve shifts up and to the right, and short pulses do nothing. The chronaxie, read at twice the rheobase, sums it up: below 1 ms with the nerve, often 10 to 50 ms without it.

Simplified: the curves are drawn from a simple law, in which the threshold falls as the pulse lengthens and is twice the rheobase at the chronaxie, not from measurements; each curve is drawn at one chronaxie from its range; the denervated rheobase is drawn higher, as later in denervation; early on it may be lower; partial denervation, whose curve has a kink, and the utilisation time are not drawn.

5 sources
  1. Robinson AJ, Snyder-Mackler L. Clinical Electrophysiology: electrotherapy and electrophysiologic testing, 3rd edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008. Strength-duration testing.
  2. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on the physiology of electrical stimulation and on stimulation of denervated muscle.
  3. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom’s Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on electrodiagnostic medicine.
  4. Geddes LA. Accuracy limitations of chronaxie values. IEEE Transactions on Biomedical Engineering, 2004;51(1):176–181.
  5. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Electrodiagnostics: rheobase, chronaxie and the strength-duration curve.
Functional electrical stimulation for drop foot
A right leg seen from the outside, from the thigh to the foot, walking to the right in mid-swing, in the warm body colour. Drawn on it: the fibula, an ivory bone with a round head just below the knee; a mauve nerve coming down the back of the knee, winding round the fibula's neck and running forward under a rose muscle on the front of the shin, tibialis anterior, whose pearly tendon crosses the front of the ankle onto the foot. Two pale discs with ink rims sit on the skin, one over the nerve below the fibular head and one over the muscle, joined by fine ink leads to a pale box beside the leg. A small pale pad sits under the heel, its lead running up behind the leg to the box. The foot is held up, its toes clear of the ground line; a dashed outline shows it hanging lower, its toes on the ground. Under the leg, a pale lane: a band along the bottom for stance, darker and then lighter where the heel lifts, then an arc for swing; beneath it a soft lavender block that starts where the heel lifts, marked by a dotted line, and runs to the end of the cycle.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Drop foot after a stroke or in multiple sclerosis comes from a weak or poorly controlled tibialis anterior whose nerve is intact. A heel switch in the shoe tells a small stimulator when the heel lifts; the stimulator then fires the common peroneal nerve where it winds round the fibular head, tibialis anterior contracts and the foot is lifted through swing, until the heel strikes the ground again. That is FES: stimulation timed to a task.

Simplified: the fibula, nerve and muscle are drawn as if seen through the skin; above the knee the nerve is still part of the sciatic nerve, drawn as one line, and its other branches are left out; the gap under the lifted toes is drawn larger than the centimetre or two of real walking; the stimulator is drawn beside the leg; it is worn on the belt or on a cuff below the knee, and some devices use a tilt sensor instead of a heel switch; the gait cycle is timed as in normal walking; after a stroke, stance takes longer and the heel lifts later.

4 sources
  1. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Functional electrical stimulation for drop foot of central neurological origin (IPG278), 2009.
  2. Lyons GM, Sinkjaer T, Burridge JH, Wilcox DJ. A review of portable FES-based neural orthoses for the correction of drop foot. IEEE Transactions on Neural Systems and Rehabilitation Engineering, 2002;10(4):260–279.
  3. Gil-Castillo J, Alnajjar F, Koutsou A, Torricelli D, Moreno JC. Advances in neuroprosthetic management of foot drop: a review. Journal of NeuroEngineering and Rehabilitation, 2020;17:46.
  4. Perry J, Burnfield JM. Gait Analysis: normal and pathological function, 2nd edition. SLACK, 2010. Chapters 1 and 2, Gait cycle and Phases of gait.
Continuous passive motion of the knee
A person lying on the back on a bed, the right leg seen from the outside, resting on a machine: a support under the thigh pivoted near the hip, a support under the calf hinged to it under the knee, and a footplate under the sole. The footplate's heel end sits on a carriage that runs along a screw rail in the machine's base, turned by a motor under the thigh. The leg is drawn with the knee bent to 80 degrees, the knee high; a dashed outline shows the same leg lying straight, and a dotted arc at the knee runs from the thigh's line carried on to the line of the shin. Through the skin: the femur and tibia, the kneecap, the cartilage on both joint surfaces with a pale lens of synovial fluid between them, and the thigh and calf muscles, pale because they are at rest.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

On a continuous passive motion machine a motor moves the carriage under the foot back and forth, so the knee slowly bends and straightens through a set arc while the muscles stay relaxed. Sessions last 10 to 60 minutes, 1 or 2 times a day, the arc widened within what is pain-free. The movement keeps the joint's range and moves synovial fluid over the cartilage, but with no contraction it builds no strength, and after knee replacement it adds only about 2 degrees of bend.

Simplified: the machine is drawn as a simple splint with one motor and a screw rail; makes and models differ; the arc drawn is an example; the range and speed are set for each patient; the joint is drawn as one condyle on one plateau, without menisci, ligaments or capsule, and the fluid is drawn larger than its thin real film; the leg is a simple figure seen through the skin, the thigh straps and the other leg left out.

5 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 4 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Mechanotherapy.
  2. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Passive kinesitherapy, mechanotherapy.
  3. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, Foundations and Techniques, 7th edition. FA Davis, 2017. Chapter 3, Range of motion (continuous passive motion).
  4. Salter RB. The biologic concept of continuous passive motion of synovial joints. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research, 1989, 242: 12–25.
  5. Harvey LA, Brosseau L, Herbert RD. Continuous passive motion following total knee arthroplasty in people with arthritis. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 2014, CD004260.
The senses that keep us balanced
The same person twice, standing on one floor line, seen from the side and facing right, as if through the skin. In the first, eyes open: a pale mauve brain fills the top of the head, a deeper mauve cerebellum sits low at the back, and the brainstem runs down into the spinal cord along the back. A fine mauve nerve runs back from the eye to the brainstem; three tiny loops, the inner ear's canals, sit under a fine outline of the ear, with a short nerve to the brainstem; small pale mauve beads at the sole, the heel, the ankle, the knee and the hip feed a nerve that climbs the back of the leg to the end of the cord. From the cord a deeper mauve nerve runs down to rose muscles: the buttock, the front of the thigh, the calf and the shin. In the second, the eyes are closed, a curved lid, there is no nerve from the eye, and the inner ear's nerve and the nerve up the leg are drawn heavier.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The brain builds balance from three reports: the eyes, the inner ear's balance organ, and position sense from the joints and the soles. The brainstem and the cerebellum compare them and set the muscles of the ankles, hips and trunk, which keep the body over its feet. When one report is lost, the others carry more: with the eyes closed a healthy person still stands, but a person who has also lost position sense sways and falls, as the Romberg test shows.

Simplified: each report is drawn as one nerve on one side; the pathways cross, branch and run on both sides; the cortex's part, which also receives every report, is drawn only as the pale brain; four muscles stand for the many of the legs and trunk that keep balance; heavier nerves stand for a report that counts for more, not for thicker nerves.

4 sources
  1. Shumway-Cook A, Woollacott MH. Motor Control, translating research into clinical practice, 5th edition. Wolters Kluwer, 2017. Normal postural control.
  2. Horak FB. Postural orientation and equilibrium: what do we need to know about neural control of balance to prevent falls? Age and Ageing, 2006;35(suppl 2):ii7–ii11.
  3. Kandel ER, Koester JD, Mack SH, Siegelbaum SA (eds). Principles of Neural Science, 6th edition. McGraw Hill, 2021. Posture; the vestibular system; the cerebellum.
  4. Horak FB, Nashner LM. Central programming of postural movements: adaptation to altered support-surface configurations. Journal of Neurophysiology, 1986;55(6):1369–1381.
How exercise lowers blood glucose
Part of a muscle fibre in section: an amber membrane runs across the drawing, blood above it on the white page, the fibre's pale cream inside below. Violet hexagons of glucose float in the blood. On the left, pink insulin sits in a green insulin receptor that crosses the membrane; inside, a short chain of small green proteins leads from it towards pale yellow vesicles studded with deeper green GLUT4, which rise with fading trails towards the membrane. Three GLUT4 transporters stand in the membrane, a glucose passing through each, and inside glucose drifts away from them. On the right, lower down, rose banded myofibrils lie under a lilac tube, the sarcoplasmic reticulum, from which teal calcium ions rise; two pale green AMPK proteins sit near the vesicles above them.Ca²⁺Ca²⁺Ca²⁺

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Glucose enters a muscle fibre through GLUT4, a transporter kept mostly inside the fibre in small vesicles. Insulin brings GLUT4 to the membrane through its receptor's chain of signals; contraction brings it there by signals of its own, the calcium released for contraction and AMPK, switched on as ATP is spent. So working muscle takes up glucose even when insulin works poorly, as in insulin resistance, and the two routes add up: exercise can push glucose too low in someone on insulin or a sulfonylurea.

Simplified: a diagram: the molecules are drawn far larger than life, the vesicles and myofibrils far smaller than the fibre around them; each route's signals are shown as a few proteins; the real chains have more steps, and contraction uses more signals than calcium and AMPK; a few molecules stand for many; the fibre's nuclei, mitochondria and glycogen are left out.

2 sources
  1. Colberg SR, Sigal RJ, Yardley JE et al. Physical activity/exercise and diabetes, a position statement of the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care, 2016;39(11):2065–2079.
  2. Richter EA, Hargreaves M. Exercise, GLUT4, and skeletal muscle glucose uptake. Physiological Reviews, 2013;93(3):993–1017.
Why pursed lips help in COPD
Two rows, each a breath out from left to right: a cluster of round, thin-walled pink air sacs, a narrow pink tube, a wider tube with pale blue-grey plates in its walls, and a pair of rose lips on the warm face. In the top row the sacs are large and filled with a pale straw wash, which runs into the narrow tube and stops where its walls pinch together part way along; beyond the pinch the tube is empty, and the lips are wide apart. In the bottom row the sacs are smaller, the narrow tube is open along its whole length, the pale wash fills it and the wider tube all the way to the lips, and the lips are pushed forward and almost closed, with a narrow slit between them.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Breathing out squeezes the airways from outside as well as pushing air through them. In COPD the small airways are floppy, having lost the alveolar walls that held them open, so a fast breath out squeezes them shut part way and traps the air behind: the chest stays overinflated and breathing gets harder. Breathing out slowly through lips held as if whistling puts the narrowing at the mouth instead. The air in the airways stays under pressure all the way to the lips, holds the floppy airways open longer, and more air leaves; breathing slows and breathlessness eases.

Simplified: one airway stands for the many branches of the bronchial tree, and the alveoli are drawn few and large; the small airway is drawn shut at one point; in life the narrowing is spread over a stretch and varies from breath to breath; the airways, alveoli and lips are not to scale; the pale wash shows where the air is under pressure, not how much.

5 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 7 handnotes and lecture 4 handnotes (breathing exercises). Medical University of Sofia, 2026; and Spruit MA et al. An official ATS/ERS statement: key concepts and advances in pulmonary rehabilitation. American Journal of Respiratory and Critical Care Medicine, 2013.
  2. West JB, Luks AM. West’s Respiratory Physiology: the essentials, 10th edition. Wolters Kluwer, 2016. Chapter 7, Mechanics of breathing: dynamic compression of airways.
  3. Spahija J, de Marchie M, Grassino A. Effects of imposed pursed-lips breathing on respiratory mechanics and dyspnea at rest and during exercise in COPD. Chest, 2005;128(2):640–650.
  4. Holland AE, Hill CJ, Jones AY, McDonald CF. Breathing exercises for chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 2012.
  5. American Lung Association. Breathing exercises (pursed-lip breathing).
The phases of cardiac rehabilitation
A time line from left to right. At the left a soft rose heart, with a dotted line down to a lane of four pale blocks; a short dotted gap separates the first block from the second, which is the longest; the third and fourth follow. Above the first block a deeper rose ribbon climbs in three small steps. From there a rose ribbon runs on, level over the gap, rises gently through the second block, and runs level over the third and fourth to the right edge.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

After a heart attack, a coronary stent or bypass surgery, rehabilitation starts in hospital with small, watched steps of effort, measured in METs (one is the energy of sitting at rest, about 3.5 mL of oxygen per kg per minute). Within a few weeks of going home comes the core: a supervised programme of training, risk factors, medicines, education and psychological support. Then training goes on with less supervision, and the new way of living is kept for life.

Simplified: time is not to scale: the days in hospital are drawn as wide as months; the four phases are the North American numbering the professor uses; many European programmes describe three, with the same content; the ribbon after hospital is a sketch of the usual course, not one patient's measurements, and has no scale; progress is drawn smooth; in life it comes in steps, with setbacks.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 7 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Cardiac rehabilitation: phases.
  2. Ambrosetti M et al. Secondary prevention through comprehensive cardiovascular rehabilitation, from knowledge to implementation. 2020 update. European Journal of Preventive Cardiology, 2021.
  3. American Association of Cardiovascular and Pulmonary Rehabilitation. Guidelines for cardiac rehabilitation programs, 6th edition. Human Kinetics, 2021.
  4. Dibben G et al. Exercise-based cardiac rehabilitation for coronary heart disease. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 2021.
Where Parkinson's disease, multiple sclerosis and neuropathy strike
A pale mauve brain seen from the left, with its folds, the cerebellum behind and the brainstem below, and the spinal cord running down from it. Deep in the hemisphere, drawn with dashed edges as if seen through, a deeper mauve oval and an arching tail over it, the basal ganglia, and a small deeper spot in the brainstem, the substantia nigra. Small deeper mauve scars are scattered through the brain round its middle, one in the brainstem and one in the cord: plaques. From the lower cord a mauve nerve runs across to the right and down the back of a leg drawn in the warm body colour, behind the ankle and into the sole of the foot, where its last branches to the toes are pale and dashed.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The three diseases hit different parts of one system, so they bring different problems and need different rehabilitation. Parkinson's disease takes the basal ganglia's autopilot for movement, but movement driven by cues and attention still works. Multiple sclerosis scars the insulation of fibres in the brain and cord, so they conduct slowly, tire and fail in the heat. A neuropathy damages the nerve itself, weakening and numbing what it supplies, the longest fibres first; a damaged nerve regrows about 1 mm a day.

Simplified: the basal ganglia and substantia nigra lie deep inside the brain and are drawn as if seen through it; plaques are drawn few and large; their number and places vary from person to person; the nerve is drawn as one line from the lower cord to the foot; it forms from several roots below the end of the cord, through a plexus; the three diseases are drawn in one nervous system to compare them; a patient seldom has more than one.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 6 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Parkinson’s disease, multiple sclerosis and peripheral nerve disorders.
  2. Keus SHJ et al. European Physiotherapy Guideline for Parkinson’s Disease. KNGF and ParkinsonNet, 2014.
  3. Kalb R et al. Exercise and lifestyle physical activity recommendations for people with multiple sclerosis throughout the disease course. Multiple Sclerosis Journal, 2020.
  4. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom’s Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on movement disorders, multiple sclerosis and peripheral neuropathies.
Centre of mass over the base of support
Four people standing on one floor line, seen from the front, each with the same small quartered ring in the pelvis and a dotted line dropping from it to the floor. Under each, the floor seen from above: the feet as two footprints, toes toward the reader, and round everything touching the floor a pale wash with a dashed rim. First, feet together: a narrow wash. Second, feet apart: a wide one. Third, feet a little apart and a stick in the right hand, its tip on the floor beside and in front of the right foot: the wash stretches out to the tip. Fourth, a walking frame in front, the hands on its grips, its four feet on the floor round the person's: the widest wash. In the first view the same person leans to one side, drawn dashed; its ring, dashed, is over a point on the floor outside the narrow wash, marked from above by a dashed ring beside the footprints.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A standing person is a tall pole on a small plate: balanced while the line straight down from the centre of mass falls inside the base of support, the area round everything touching the floor. Feet apart, a stick or a frame widen the base, so the body can sway further before the line falls outside it; feet together make the base small, and a small lean takes the line out, so the person falls unless a step makes a new base.

Simplified: balance is drawn standing still; standing, the body sways all the time and the brain corrects it; the centre of mass is drawn on the middle line, over the midfoot; it moves with every posture; the base is drawn round the stick's tip and the frame's feet as if each carried weight; a stick carries only part of it; the people are simple figures; the lean is drawn larger than a real sway.

4 sources
  1. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, Foundations and Techniques, 7th edition. FA Davis, 2017. Chapter 8, Exercise for impaired balance.
  2. Shumway-Cook A, Woollacott MH. Motor Control, translating research into clinical practice, 5th edition. Wolters Kluwer, 2017. Normal postural control.
  3. Levangie PK, Norkin CC, Lewek MD. Joint Structure and Function, a comprehensive analysis, 6th edition. FA Davis, 2019. Chapter 1, Biomechanical applications to joint structure and function (centre of mass).
  4. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom's Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on gait, balance and assistive devices.
Setting intensity from the heart-rate reserve
A heart-rate line runs across, with a tick every ten beats a minute. Over it a pale rose bar, the heart-rate reserve, runs from a ring on the line at the resting rate to a ring at the maximum. Inside the bar a deeper rose block marks the moderate zone and a deeper one beside it the vigorous zone. A deep rose ring on the bar where the two zones meet is the target, with an ink bracket under the bar from the resting rate to it and a dotted drop to the line. Further left on the line a dashed ring marks the lower rate that the same share of the maximum alone would give. Below, a separate strip with a tick for each Borg rating, its moderate and hard ratings shaded in the same two rose tones.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Intensity is set from the heart-rate reserve, the span between the resting and the maximal rate, by the Karvonen formula: target = resting + chosen share × (maximum − resting). With a resting rate of 70, a maximum of 170 and 60 per cent: 70 + 0.6 × 100 = 130 beats a minute. On a beta-blocker, which blunts the heart rate, perceived exertion on the Borg scale, or a heart-rate range from an exercise test on the drug, is used instead.

Simplified: the rates are the topic's worked example, not a patient's; each patient's own resting and maximal rates are used; the Borg scale is drawn on a strip of its own: its ratings are not heart rates, and its zones match the heart-rate zones only by name; the vigorous zone is drawn to 89 per cent of the reserve; above it lies near-maximal effort.

3 sources
  1. American College of Sports Medicine. ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription, 11th edition. Wolters Kluwer, 2021.
  2. Garber CE, Blissmer B, Deschenes MR et al. Quantity and quality of exercise for developing and maintaining cardiorespiratory, musculoskeletal, and neuromotor fitness in apparently healthy adults, ACSM position stand. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise, 2011.
  3. Borg GA. Psychophysical bases of perceived exertion. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise, 1982;14(5):377–381.
Which energy system feeds the muscle
A chart. Along the bottom, the length of an all-out effort on a log scale, with ticks at a second, ten seconds, a minute, ten minutes and an hour; up the left side, the share of the muscle's energy, from none to all. Three soft bands stacked to fill the chart. At the foot, in orange, the phosphagen system fills nearly the whole height at first and thins away within the first minute. On it, in violet, anaerobic glycolysis swells to its widest at around half a minute and thins out over the next minutes. On top, in salmon, oxidation is a thin strip at first and grows until by an hour it fills nearly everything. A ring marks the effort length at which oxidation supplies half, with a dotted line down to the time axis just past a minute.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

In an all-out effort all three energy systems run from the start; only their shares shift. Stored ATP and creatine phosphate carry the first seconds, about 10 s; anaerobic glycolysis, glucose to lactate, carries efforts of about 1 to 2 minutes; oxidation of glucose and fat with oxygen takes over beyond, for hours. Endurance training enlarges the oxidative system, strength and sprint training the first two.

Simplified: the shares are drawn from a smooth model that keeps to the times given, not from one set of measurements; drawn for an all-out effort of each length; at a lower intensity oxidation's share is larger from the start; glucose and fat are drawn as one oxidative band, and the shares differ with training and with the muscle's fibre types.

3 sources
  1. Gastin PB. Energy system interaction and relative contribution during maximal exercise. Sports Medicine, 2001;31(10):725–741.
  2. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, foundations and techniques, 8th edition. F.A. Davis, 2022. Energy systems and aerobic exercise.
  3. American College of Sports Medicine. ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription, 11th edition. Wolters Kluwer, 2021.
A new hip, and the movements that dislocate it
On the left, a right hip replacement seen from the front and cut through. The ivory pelvis holds a pale cup, a metal shell lined with paler plastic, opening down and out; a pale ball sits in it, on a neck rising from a pale stem that runs down the canal of the ivory femur, its cream marrow round the stem. On the right, three small figures in a warm body colour. The first sits upright on a pale chair, its thigh level, a small square marking the right angle between trunk and thigh; a dashed outline shows the trunk bent far forward over the thigh, and an arc marks how far past upright it has gone. The second stands facing us on a dotted midline; a dashed outline shows the right leg crossed over the line in front of the left. The third stands facing us, its kneecaps forward; dashed outlines show the right kneecap moved toward the middle and the right foot turned in to point at the other.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A hip replacement swaps the femoral head for a ball on a stem in the femur and lines the socket with a cup. After a posterior approach the back of the capsule has been opened, so for the first weeks the ball can be levered out backwards. Three movements do it, and worst together: bending the hip past a right angle (a low chair, bending down to the feet), crossing the leg over the midline, and turning the knee and foot in. A raised seat, a pillow between the knees, a reacher and a sock aid keep the hip inside them.

Simplified: only the classic precautions after a posterior approach are drawn; after an anterior approach the risk is extension with the leg turned out, and many centres now relax strict precautions, the surgeon deciding for each patient; each movement is drawn on its own; the risk is greatest when they come together, as when rising from a low chair with the knees together and turned in; one common design is drawn; stems, cups and bearings differ in shape, material and fixation; about 6 weeks is a rule of thumb for the time at risk, while the cut capsule and muscles heal.

4 sources
  1. arcmed. Hip and knee arthroplasty: the hip, avoiding dislocation (the movements to avoid after each approach).
  2. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, Foundations and Techniques, 7th edition. FA Davis, 2017. The hip: total hip arthroplasty, precautions after the posterior approach.
  3. Blom A, Warwick D, Whitehouse M (eds). Apley and Solomon’s System of Orthopaedics and Trauma, 10th edition. CRC Press, 2018. The hip: total hip replacement and its complications.
  4. Crompton J, Osagie-Clouard L, Patel A. Do hip precautions after posterior-approach total hip arthroplasty affect dislocation rates? A systematic review of 7 studies with 6,900 patients. Acta Orthopaedica, 2020;91(6):687–692.
The muscle test's grades and the exercise for each
Six pale lanes stacked like the rungs of a ladder, grade 0 at the foot and grade 5 at the top. In each, the same right arm lies on its back on an ink line, the shoulder at the left, drawn through the skin with its bones in ivory and biceps in rose on top of the upper arm. At the foot, the forearm lies flat and biceps is pale; two pale electrodes on it are wired to a small box. Above it, the same, with one electrode wired to a box and three short arcs over biceps, a flicker. Next, the whole arm hangs level a little above the line in two slings, their cords running up to one hook above the elbow. In the top three, the forearm is lifted well up off the line: empty-handed, then holding a small pale ball, then a larger one.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The manual muscle test grades a muscle by what it can overcome: nothing, its own weight with gravity taken away, gravity, then resistance. The grade says which exercise will challenge the muscle without defeating it, and the patient climbs the ladder one rung at a time: passive, assisted, gravity eliminated, against gravity, against resistance.

Simplified: one arm, the elbow's flexors, stands for every muscle tested; every grade is drawn with the patient lying on the back; the test's position changes with the grade. With gravity eliminated the forearm bends level, swinging in the slings or sliding across a table, never upward, so the arm in slings is drawn level; and lying on the back, the forearm works against gravity only until it stands upright; the plus and minus grades some examiners add are left out; the stimulator, biofeedback unit, slings and weights are drawn small and simple.

4 sources
  1. Medical Research Council. Aids to the Examination of the Peripheral Nervous System. Her Majesty's Stationery Office, 1976.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 4 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Manual muscle testing.
  3. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Manual muscle testing; Suspense and pulley therapy.
  4. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, foundations and techniques, 8th edition. FA Davis, 2022.
The key muscles of spinal cord injury
A person seen from the front in the warm body colour, arms a little out from the sides, the arm on the left of the page turned palm back and the one on the right palm forward. Rose muscles lie on them as if seen through the skin: a dome across the lower chest, the diaphragm; a muscle on the front of the right-hand upper arm, the biceps, and one on the front of its forearm, the finger flexors; a small one on the inner edge of that hand, by the little finger; on the other arm, a muscle along the outer back edge of the upper arm, the triceps, and one on the back of the forearm, the wrist extensors; in the legs, a muscle running down into one groin, the hip flexors, the large front of that thigh, the quadriceps, and on the other leg muscles down the front of the shin and onto the foot and a bulge on the inner calf. At the far left, the spinal cord as a mauve column of small segments in four groups, neck, chest, lower back and sacrum, with a deeper bead at the segment of each key muscle and of the diaphragm: six beads in the neck group and the first chest segment, five in the lower back and sacral groups.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Each segment of the cord drives its own muscles, so the examiner tests one key muscle per segment, 10 on each side, and the lowest that still lifts against gravity, with those above it at full strength, marks the motor level. Everything below a complete injury is lost, everything above it is kept, so the level tells what the person can learn to do: the goals named here are the usual best for a complete injury in a fit young adult.

Simplified: the goals are those of a complete injury in a fit young adult; incomplete injuries do better, and each person differs; the cord is drawn as an even column beside the body; its segments are not this even, and lie higher than the vertebrae of the same name; one muscle stands for each key muscle group, drawn as if seen through the skin, and each on one side only; one arm is turned palm back so that its triceps and the back of its forearm show.

4 sources
  1. Rupp R et al. International Standards for Neurological Classification of Spinal Cord Injury, revised 2019. Topics in Spinal Cord Injury Rehabilitation, 2021;27(2):1–22.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 6 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Spinal cord injury: levels and goals.
  3. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom’s Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter on spinal cord injury: functional outcomes by level.
  4. Consortium for Spinal Cord Medicine. Outcomes following traumatic spinal cord injury: clinical practice guidelines for health-care professionals. Paralyzed Veterans of America, 1999.
A worn joint and an inflamed one
Two joints cut lengthwise, side by side, each a rounded bone head above a cupped bone base, ivory round cream marrow, inside a pearl capsule lined with a coral synovium. In the left joint, the pale blue-grey cartilage is thin and rough in the middle, where the two bones come closer together, and full thickness at the edges; under the thin middle, a crescent of deeper ivory bone in each bone, with a small pale cyst in the head; small ivory beaks of bone grow out at the edges of the head and the rim of the cup. Its synovium is thin and pale, and the capsule hugs the joint. In the right joint, the synovium is thick, deep coral and folded, dotted with small cells; the capsule bulges out round a large pale straw effusion with cells in it; the cartilage is thin all over, so the bones are evenly closer; and at the edges of the head and the base, coral-filled bites are taken out of the bone.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Osteoarthritis is a mechanical problem: the joint is overloaded and repairs badly, so the cartilage wears where it is loaded, the bone under it hardens and grows spurs, and there is little inflammation. An inflammatory arthritis is an attack: the synovium is inflamed, fluid gathers, and the bone is eaten away at the margins. Exercise is the core treatment of both, but the state of the joint chooses the method: strengthen and load a worn joint; rest a hot, flaring one and keep its muscles working with isometrics.

Simplified: one small joint stands for any: osteoarthritis is most common in the knee, hip and hands, rheumatoid arthritis in the small joints of the hands and feet, and spondylitis affects the spine and the entheses, which are not drawn; the bone ends are drawn closer where the cartilage has gone; under load the surfaces press together; the cells are drawn far larger than life, a few for many; both diseases are drawn at a late stage, with every feature at once.

5 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 18, Rheumatology: osteoarthritis; rheumatoid arthritis.
  2. Schett G, Gravallese E. Bone erosion in rheumatoid arthritis: mechanisms, diagnosis and treatment. Nature Reviews Rheumatology, 2012;8(11):656–664.
  3. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Osteoarthritis in over 16s, diagnosis and management (NG226), 2022.
  4. Rausch Osthoff AK et al. 2018 EULAR recommendations for physical activity in people with inflammatory arthritis and osteoarthritis. Annals of the Rheumatic Diseases, 2018.
  5. arcmed. Osteoarthritis and arthropathies: two kinds of joint disease; kinesiotherapy in a flare.
The four rules of dosing light
Four rows, each a lamp over a strip of sand-coloured skin. Top row: three pale lavender rays leave one lamp; the left one ends in a soft glow just under the skin's surface, the middle one bounces off the surface and fades, the right one runs on through the skin and out the other side, fading. Second row: a larger lamp with a bright cone of light and, beside it, a smaller lamp with a faint cone; each has a stopwatch, the bright one's wedge a quarter of the dial, the faint one's half; both leave the same lavender wash on the skin. Third row: the same lamp close to the skin and twice as far away, ink brackets marking the two distances; the far lamp's light covers twice the width with a fainter wash. Under each strip, squares seen from above: one bright square under the near lamp, four faint ones under the far lamp. Bottom row: a beam straight down onto the skin, and the same beam coming in at a slant from the upper right, covering a stretch twice as long with a fainter wash; a dotted upright line and an arc mark the angle.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Four rules set the dose of any light. Only absorbed light acts. Dose is intensity times time, so a weak lamp for longer equals a strong one for less. Twice the distance gives a quarter of the dose, because the light spreads over four times the area. And a beam at a slant spreads wider and gives less than one at right angles. So distance, angle and time are fixed and written down.

Simplified: the lamps, distances and angles are chosen to show each rule, not taken from a treatment; light is drawn as a few rays, cones and beams; a real lamp's light spreads less evenly; the inverse square law holds strictly for a small source, and the Bunsen–Roscoe law only within limits, as the rules say.

2 sources
  1. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2022. Ultraviolet radiation; light: the laws that govern its dose.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 3 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Infrared and light therapy: a defined distance and angle.
Isometric, concentric and eccentric contraction
Three times the same right arm seen from its side, the upper arm hanging from the shoulder and the elbow bent, a pale ball held in the fist. Through the skin, the bones in ivory and biceps in rose on the front of the upper arm, with pearly tendons to the shoulder and to the forearm just below the elbow. First, the forearm level, still. Second, the forearm raised well above level; a fading streak runs from the ball down round the elbow to a dashed outline of the forearm and ball below level, and biceps is short and fat. Third, the forearm lowered below level, the streak running back up to a dashed outline above, and biceps long and slim. Under each arm a short rose bar over a dotted line, their left ends lined up: equal under the first, the bar shorter under the second, longer under the third.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A working muscle pulls; what happens to its length depends on the load. If the pull just holds the load, nothing moves and the muscle keeps its length: isometric. If it lifts the load, the muscle shortens: concentric. If the load wins and the muscle lets it down under control, the muscle lengthens while it still pulls: eccentric, as when lowering a cup or walking downstairs.

Simplified: one arm drawn three times, seen as if through the skin; biceps stands for the elbow's flexors; brachialis, which works with it, is left out; the speed of the movement is not drawn; how hard the muscle pulls changes with it; the radius and ulna are drawn as one bone.

5 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Kinesitherapy, muscle contraction.
  2. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, foundations and techniques, 7th edition. FA Davis, 2017. Chapter 6, Resistance exercise for impaired muscle performance.
  3. Alfredson H, Pietilä T, Jonsson P, Lorentzon R. Heavy-load eccentric calf muscle training for the treatment of chronic Achilles tendinosis. American Journal of Sports Medicine, 1998;26(3):360–366.
  4. Standring S (ed). Gray's Anatomy, the anatomical basis of clinical practice, 42nd edition. Elsevier, 2020. Arm.
  5. Lieber RL. Skeletal Muscle Structure, Function and Plasticity, 3rd edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2010.
How soft tissue heals, and how to load it
A chart of four pale lanes, one above the other, sharing a time axis along the bottom on a log scale with four ticks, each carried up through the lanes by a dotted line. In the top lane a soft muted red hill rises at once at the left edge and fades away by the second tick, with small periwinkle cells on it. In the second lane a light green hill rises a little later, holds, and fades by about halfway between the second and third ticks, with a loose tangle of short dark green strands on it. In the third lane a deeper green area rises after the second tick and stays high past the last tick, with dark green strands lying parallel on it. In the bottom lane, a low flat rose block covers the first stretch, then a rose area climbs in five rounded steps to full height and stays there.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Soft tissue heals in three phases that overlap: inflammation clears the damage, repair fills the gap with new collagen in a tangle, and remodelling replaces it with strong collagen lined up along the load the tissue feels. That is why loading is the treatment: protect the tissue in the first days, then load it progressively, so the new collagen sets aligned, like dry spaghetti in a packet, and not in a weak tangle.

Simplified: the curves show when each phase is active, not a measured amount; the times are the topic's typical ones; they differ by tissue and injury, muscle healing fastest, then ligament, then tendon; the collagen is drawn as a few strands on each phase, far larger than life; the load's steps are drawn evenly; in practice each step is set by the response of pain and swelling.

3 sources
  1. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, Foundations and Techniques, 7th edition. FA Davis, 2017. Soft tissue injury, repair and management.
  2. Brukner P, Khan K et al. Brukner and Khan’s Clinical Sports Medicine, 5th edition. McGraw-Hill, 2017. Principles of injury and healing.
  3. Dubois B, Esculier JF. Soft-tissue injuries simply need PEACE and LOVE. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 2020;54(2):72–73.
How deep light goes into skin
A block of skin in section: a sand-coloured epidermis on top with a wavy lower border, a paler dermis below it with a muted red blood vessel winding across, and cream fat lobules at the bottom. Six pale lavender columns of light come straight down onto the skin, side by side, from the shortest wavelength on the left to the longest on the right. Each fades away inside the skin where it is absorbed: the first just under the surface, the second at the foot of the epidermis, the third in the upper dermis, the fourth deeper in the dermis, round the vessel, the fifth down into the fat, and the last at the surface again.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Each band stops where something in the skin absorbs it: DNA and proteins take ultraviolet, melanin and haemoglobin take visible light, water takes most of infrared. So ultraviolet acts on the skin itself, less than about 1 mm deep, and far infrared heats only the surface, while red and near-infrared light, from about 650 to 1000 nm, slips between the absorbers (the optical window) and reaches a few millimetres, in part up to about 1 cm.

Simplified: not to scale: the epidermis, about 0.1 mm thick, is drawn far thicker, and the depths are drawn in their order, not measured; the borders between bands are conventions, here the CIE's, and books shift them by a few nanometres; light fades gradually with depth and scatters sideways; each column ends where little is left, not at a sharp stop; visible light is drawn as one column, though blue stops sooner than red; mid and far infrared are drawn as one column at the surface, though the shortest IR-B reaches a few tenths of a millimetre; melanin is not drawn.

3 sources
  1. International Commission on Illumination (CIE). ILV, International Lighting Vocabulary, CIE S 017:2020. Spectral bands UV-A, UV-B, UV-C and IR-A, IR-B, IR-C.
  2. Anderson RR, Parrish JA. The optics of human skin. Journal of Investigative Dermatology, 1981;77(1):13–19.
  3. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2022. Ultraviolet radiation; superficial heat.
How a fracture heals, and what rehabilitation does
Four upright pieces of a long bone's shaft side by side, each cut lengthwise to show an ivory cortex round cream marrow, and broken straight across the middle with a jagged gap. In the first, a lighter red clot fills the gap and bulges out round the break, with small periwinkle cells in it. In the second, a pale blue-grey spindle of soft tissue wraps the break and fills the gap, with thin red vessels growing into it from the marrow and from the outside. In the third, a deeper ivory spindle full of small irregular cream holes, woven bone, wraps and bridges the break. The fourth is one shaft again, its cortex only slightly thicker where it broke. Under the four, a long pale lane divided in four by dotted lines holds a soft rose area that starts low on the left and rises smoothly to full height on the right.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A broken bone heals with bone, not scar. A clot fills the gap, cartilage and fibrous tissue bridge it, the soft callus turns to woven bone, and over months the load the bone carries remodels it into strong lamellar bone. Rehabilitation follows the stages: the fracture is protected while everything around it keeps moving, and load is added as the callus hardens, since load is the signal that remodels bone.

Simplified: the stages overlap in a real fracture; they are drawn as four separate moments; the times are the topic's for a typical long bone in an adult; they depend on the bone, the break and the patient, and children heal about twice as fast; the rehabilitation phases (up to week 2, to week 6, to week 12, then beyond) are set under the healing stages they overlap, not to scale in time; only healing by callus is drawn; a rigid plate gives direct healing without callus.

4 sources
  1. Blom A, Warwick D, Whitehouse M (eds). Apley and Solomon’s System of Orthopaedics and Trauma, 10th edition. CRC Press, 2018. Principles of fractures: fracture healing.
  2. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, Foundations and Techniques, 7th edition. FA Davis, 2017. Bone: fracture healing and management.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 5 handnotes (rehabilitation in fractures: the phases of recovery). Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
  4. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom’s Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on rehabilitation of fractures and musculoskeletal trauma.
A herniated disc and the root it presses
Two views of the low back. On the left, seen from above with the front at the top: a bean-shaped disc in pale blue-grey with fine rings, the annulus, round a pale straw centre, the nucleus; a short pearly band along the middle of the disc's back, the posterior longitudinal ligament; behind it the ivory arch of the vertebra round the canal, with the transverse processes out to the sides and the spinous process at the back. In the canal, a pale mauve oval, the dural sac, holds small round roots. A tongue of the deeper straw nucleus breaks back and out through the rings, beside the ligament, and squashes a flattened mauve root in the corner of the canal; on the other side the same root is round. Further out, beyond the arch on each side, a mauve root lies in its exit hole. On the right, the same from the side with the front to the left: three ivory vertebral bodies with their arches behind, two discs between them, a pale mauve sac running down behind the bodies. A mauve root leaves the sac and turns forward under the top arch, above the upper disc; a deeper mauve root runs down behind the upper disc, bowed backwards where a straw bulge pushes out of the disc's back, and turns forward under the middle arch.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The disc is a tough ring round a jelly centre. Worn and torn, the ring lets the jelly out, most often back and to one side, where the ring is thinnest and the ligament does not cover it: straight into the root lying there. At the L4/5 disc that root is L5, on its way down to leave below the next vertebra; L4 has already left above the disc. So an L4/5 herniation gives an L5 radiculopathy: pain and numbness of the outer calf and the top of the foot, a weak big toe and ankle lift.

Simplified: the view from above shows the vertebra below the disc with its arch, as seen from the top, rather than one slice; in the side view the sac and roots are drawn as if seen through the near pedicles and processes, and the L4 root only to where it leaves the canal; only the roots of the L4/5 level are drawn; the sacral roots in the sac are a few dots; the herniation is drawn large, and the roots thicker than they are.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 6 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Spine and spinal cord: disc herniation and radiculopathy.
  2. Fardon DF, Williams AL, Dohring EJ et al. Lumbar disc nomenclature: version 2.0. The Spine Journal, 2014;14(11):2525–2545.
  3. Moore KL, Dalley AF, Agur AMR. Clinically Oriented Anatomy, 8th edition. Wolters Kluwer, 2018. Chapter 2, Back: intervertebral discs and herniation of the nucleus pulposus.
  4. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom’s Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on low back pain and lumbar radiculopathy.
More is not better: the dose window
A chart. Along the bottom, dose on a log scale with a tick at each tenfold step; up the left side, the cells' response. A dotted line across the middle is no effect. A thick ink curve runs along the dotted line from the left, rises to a peak in a pale lavender column, the window, then falls steeply, crosses the dotted line and levels off below it on the right. A ring on the peak marks the recommended dose, with a dotted line down to the middle tick; a second ring lower on the falling side marks twice that dose. Under the dose axis, brackets mark too little on the left, the window in the middle and too much on the right.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Light acts on cells in a biphasic way, the Arndt–Schulz pattern: very low doses do nothing, a window of moderate doses stimulates, and high doses inhibit cells and block nerves. So the dose is taken from recommendations such as WALT's, in joules per point, and not pushed up when results are slow.

Simplified: the curve is a sketch of the pattern, not a measurement, and the response has no scale; the dose is drawn relative to the dose for the site, which differs with the site, the wavelength and the laser; where the response turns to inhibition differs between cells and tissues and is drawn at one place.

4 sources
  1. Huang YY, Chen AC, Carroll JD, Hamblin MR. Biphasic dose response in low level light therapy. Dose-Response, 2009;7(4):358–383.
  2. World Association for Laser Therapy (WALT). Recommended treatment doses for low level laser therapy, laser class 3B, 780–860 nm GaAlAs and 904 nm GaAs lasers, 2010.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 3 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Low-level laser therapy: why it is controversial.
  4. Chow R, Armati P, Laakso EL, Bjordal JM, Baxter GD. Inhibitory effects of laser irradiation on peripheral mammalian nerves and relevance to analgesic effects, a systematic review. Photomedicine and Laser Surgery, 2011;29(6):365–381.
A joint's range and its barriers
Two rows, each a joint's range drawn as a line from a short upright tick at the left, neutral. The upper row, a healthy joint: a rose ribbon runs about two thirds of the way to an ink post, then a pearl ribbon coiled like a spring runs on to an ivory wall that stands across both rows. The lower row, a blocked joint: the rose ribbon stops early at a heavy ink post, and the rest of the way to the wall is only a dashed outline. Under the lower row, four fine ink waves, each between two ticks: a short one near the start, a long one that stops short of the heavy post, a long one that reaches it, and a short one right against it. Below them, a short heavy stroke runs from the heavy post a little past it, far from the wall; a dotted line drops from the post through the waves to it.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Pushed passively, a joint moves past where its muscles can take it, into a springy zone of capsule and ligament, until bone and ligament stop it. A blocked joint meets its barrier early and hard. Mobilization rocks the joint back and forth within its range, gently to ease pain or into the resistance to gain range; manipulation is a single small, quick thrust just past the barrier, never as far as the anatomical one.

Simplified: a joint's movement is drawn as a straight line; it is an arc, and a joint moves in more than one direction; the barriers are drawn as sharp posts; in the hand, resistance builds over a stretch of the range; the grades are placed as in Maitland's movement diagrams, by where and how far each moves, not measured; the names of the barriers follow the osteopathic and chiropractic texts; Lewit calls the first resistance simply the barrier.

6 sources
  1. Educational Council on Osteopathic Principles. Glossary of Osteopathic Terminology. American Association of Colleges of Osteopathic Medicine, 2017. Barrier (motion barrier).
  2. DeStefano LA. Greenman's Principles of Manual Medicine, 4th edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2011. Chapter 2, Barrier concepts in structural diagnosis.
  3. Lewit K. Manipulative Therapy, Musculoskeletal Medicine. Churchill Livingstone, 2010. Joint play, the barrier phenomenon, functional blockage.
  4. Hengeveld E, Banks K. Maitland's Peripheral Manipulation, 5th edition. Churchill Livingstone, 2014. Movement diagrams and grades of movement.
  5. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic Exercise, Foundations and Techniques, 7th edition. FA Davis, 2017. Chapter 5, Peripheral joint mobilization and manipulation.
  6. Sandoz R. Some physical mechanisms and effects of spinal adjustments. Annals of the Swiss Chiropractic Association, 1976;6:91–141.
The hemiplegic posture after a stroke
A person seen from the front, in the warm body colour. Their left arm hangs loosely at the side with the hand open, and their left foot stands flat. Their right side, on the left of the page, is drawn in the spastic pattern: the upper arm pressed against the chest wall, the elbow bent so the forearm lies across the waist, palm down, the wrist bent and the hand a fist below it; the right leg straight, its foot pointing down and turned in. On the right arm a deeper rose muscle lies along the front of the upper arm and another along the underside of the forearm, and a pale rose muscle along its upper side; on the right leg a deeper rose muscle on the inner calf and a pale one down the front of the shin. A dashed outline shows the right leg swung out sideways from the hip, and a dashed arc joins the foot to where it swings.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

After a stroke, the brain no longer damps the spinal stretch reflexes, and tone rises most in the postural muscles: the arm's flexors and the calf. Untreated, they win over the weaker phasic muscles that open the hand and lift the foot, and pull the body into this posture. The leg, stiff at the knee and pointing its foot down, is too long to swing through, so the patient swings it out in an arc. Rehabilitation treats both sides of the imbalance: it relaxes and stretches the overactive muscles and strengthens the underactive ones.

Simplified: the full typical pattern is drawn; most patients show only part of it, and recovery may stop at any stage; one muscle stands for each group, drawn as if seen through the skin, and the shoulder's adductors and the calf's inverting muscles are left out; the swing is drawn from the front, out to the side only; in walking the leg also moves forward; the patient is drawn standing unsupported, without the stick or orthosis most use.

3 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 4 handnotes (Kabat, Bobath, Brunnstrom and Vojta methods; positioning therapy; postural and phasic muscles) and lecture 6 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
  2. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom’s Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on stroke syndromes and on spasticity.
  3. Perry J, Burnfield JM. Gait Analysis: normal and pathological function, 2nd edition. SLACK, 2010. Chapter on hemiplegia and pathological swing.
Motor recovery after a stroke
A chart. Along the bottom, time after the stroke in months, a tick for each month and a longer one every three; up the left side, how much movement has come back. A pale lavender band covers the first three months, the chart's full height. A mauve ribbon rises steeply from the bottom left in the first weeks, bends over and flattens steadily, almost level by six months, creeping only a little higher towards the end of the year. Below it, a dashed ink curve rises in the same way but levels off much lower. A ring on the mauve ribbon at three months and another at six months each drop a dotted line to the time axis.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Brain cells killed by a stroke do not come back, but other brain takes over their work, and it does so most readily in the first weeks: in a large stroke-unit study, about 80 per cent of patients had reached their best function in daily activities by 6 weeks and 95 per cent by about 12.5 weeks. That rewiring is driven by use, so practice of real tasks starts early and is intensive; a limb that is not used loses its place in the cortex. Recovery usually levels off by about 6 months, yet training still helps later.

Simplified: the curves sketch the usual time course, shaped to the share of patients who had reached their best function in daily activities by 6 and 12.5 weeks (movement itself recovers a little sooner), not one patient's measurements; the gap between the two curves shows the direction of the effect of practice, not its size; recovery is drawn as one smooth curve, though arm, leg, speech and daily activities each recover at their own pace and may stop at any stage; the window of plasticity has no sharp end; it fades over the first months.

6 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 6 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026; and National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Stroke rehabilitation in adults (NG236), 2023.
  2. Jørgensen HS, Nakayama H, Raaschou HO, Vive-Larsen J, Støier M, Olsen TS. Outcome and time course of recovery in stroke. Part II: Time course of recovery. The Copenhagen Stroke Study. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 1995;76(5):406–412.
  3. Winstein CJ et al. Guidelines for adult stroke rehabilitation and recovery, a guideline for healthcare professionals from the American Heart Association and American Stroke Association. Stroke, 2016.
  4. Murphy TH, Corbett D. Plasticity during stroke recovery: from synapse to behaviour. Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 2009;10(12):861–872.
  5. Kwakkel G, van Peppen R, Wagenaar RC et al. Effects of augmented exercise therapy time after stroke: a meta-analysis. Stroke, 2004;35(11):2529–2539.
  6. Wolf SL et al. Effect of constraint-induced movement therapy on upper extremity function 3 to 9 months after stroke, the EXCITE randomized clinical trial. JAMA, 2006.
Post-isometric relaxation, step by step
A time line in three pale lanes. In the top lane a rose ribbon, the muscle's length as the therapist holds it, climbs from rest to a first level, runs level for a long stretch, climbs a little, runs level again, and so on, cycle after cycle, each climb smaller than the one before. In the middle lane, under a dotted line marking full effort, three low rose blocks stand on the floor, each under the first half of a level stretch above, and after each a thin pale rose band lies along the floor. In the bottom lane a soft pink hump stands over each block, rising as it starts and falling away through the pale band after it. Under the last cycle an ink span marks one cycle.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The therapist lengthens the muscle only to its first resistance and stops. The patient pushes very gently against the hand for 7 to 14 seconds, breathing in, while nothing moves; then breathes out and lets go, and the therapist waits about as long. The muscle gives a little, and the therapist takes up that slack, without force, to the new barrier. Each cycle gains less, so after 3 to 5 the session ends.

Simplified: each phase is drawn at one value from its range: about 10 seconds of push and 10 of letting go, and 3 cycles; the muscle's lengthening is drawn as one short climb after each letting go; it comes as the muscle softens; effort is drawn as steady through the push; a real push rises and falls a little; breathing is drawn only with the pushes; between them the patient breathes quietly.

3 sources
  1. Lewit K. Manipulative Therapy, Musculoskeletal Medicine. Churchill Livingstone, 2010. The barrier phenomenon; post-isometric relaxation; respiratory and visual facilitation.
  2. Lewit K, Simons DG. Myofascial pain, relief by post-isometric relaxation. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 1984;65(8):452–456.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 4 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Manual therapy versus post-isometric relaxation.
Lamp light and laser light
Above, a round light bulb with a filament, glowing pale lavender, on a screw base. Ink waves leave it in every direction except down, some short, some long, each starting at a different point of its cycle, through a soft lavender halo that fades outwards. Below, a laser: a pale box with an ink rim; inside it a lavender rod with light bouncing in it, a solid mirror at its left end and a dashed, part-silvered mirror at its right end. From the box's right end a straight beam runs to the right edge: a pale lavender band with parallel edges, holding three ink waves of exactly the same length, their crests lined up across the band and joined by fine dotted lines. Under the beam a small bracket spans one wavelength.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A lamp's light is a crowd walking in all directions, each at its own pace: many wavelengths, every way, out of step. A laser's light is a marching column: one wavelength (monochromatic), its waves in step (coherent), in a parallel beam that hardly spreads (collimated). So a small probe can put a precise dose on one spot, and the beam must never reach an eye.

Simplified: the waves are drawn hugely longer than light's, which are under a thousandth of a millimetre; three wavelengths stand for the lamp's continuous spread, and a few waves for countless photons; the pump that energises the medium is left out; a real beam spreads a little, a diode laser's more than a gas laser's.

4 sources
  1. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2022. Low-level laser therapy and light; superficial heat.
  2. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Phototherapy.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 3 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Laser therapy.
  4. Hamblin MR. Mechanisms and applications of the anti-inflammatory effects of photobiomodulation. AIMS Biophysics, 2017.
Measuring the elbow with a goniometer
A right arm seen from its outer side, lying with the upper arm level and the shoulder to the left, in the warm body colour, the elbow bent so far that the forearm and closed hand point up and back over the upper arm. Inside the arm, as if seen through the skin, the humerus runs along the upper arm to a round ivory knob at the elbow, and the radius along the forearm. A clear dial with an ink rim and ticks sits centred on the knob, with a rivet at its centre; one pale bar runs from it along the upper arm toward the shoulder, the other along the forearm. To the right, a dashed outline shows the forearm and hand straight out in line with the upper arm, and a dotted line continues the upper arm's line. A fine ink arc over a pale sector sweeps from that straight line, up and over, to the bent forearm.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The goniometer's fulcrum sits on the joint's axis, its fixed arm along the segment that stays still and its moving arm along the segment that moves. The angle is read from the neutral zero, the straight elbow, not between the two segments: a normal elbow flexes to about 150°, written by the neutral-zero method as S 0–0–150.

Simplified: the humerus and radius are drawn as if seen through the skin, as plain rods; the arm is drawn lying level, as when the patient lies on the back, with the forearm turned palm up; only flexion is drawn; the elbow's extension, which is zero in most people, and its other plane are not.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 4 handnotes (goniometry: principles and technique for measuring joint range of motion). Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
  2. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Goniometry: the SFTR system.
  3. Gerhardt JJ, Russe OA. International SFTR method of measuring and recording joint motion. Huber, 1975.
  4. Norkin CC, White DJ. Measurement of Joint Motion, a guide to goniometry, 5th edition. FA Davis, 2016. The elbow: flexion, goniometer alignment; reliability.
The ICF model
A diagram of six rounded cards joined by ink lines with no arrowheads. At the top, a deeper sand card holds a small drawing of the bones of a knee, capped with cartilage. A line drops from it to a bar that branches down to three pale sand cards in a row, themselves joined side by side: the left card holds a leg bent at the knee to a right angle with a thin rose muscle on the front of the thigh; the middle card a flight of stairs; the right card the roof of a house with a ladder against its wall. From the bottom of all three, lines meet in a second bar, which branches down to two pale cream cards: the left holds a block of flats four floors high, the right a person's head and shoulders.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The ICF, the WHO's framework since 2001, describes what a health condition does to a person at three levels: the body (impairment), the tasks the person does (activity limitation) and their roles in life (participation restriction). The environment and the person's own factors shape every level, and every link runs both ways, so rehabilitation can work on any box: a stronger quadriceps, practice on stairs, or a lift and a supportive employer.

Simplified: the example is the topic's knee injury, one problem per box; a real assessment lists many, with a qualifier from 0 (no problem) to 4 (complete problem) for each; the links are drawn as the WHO draws them, along shared lines; each box interacts with every other; the split of capacity (what the person can do in a standard setting) from performance (what they do at home) is not drawn.

3 sources
  1. World Health Organization. International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF). WHO, 2001. Introduction, figure 1, Interactions between the components of ICF.
  2. Cifu DX (ed). Braddom’s Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapters on the physiatric history and examination, and quality and outcome measures.
  3. arcmed. Functional assessment, the ICF model: the worked example after a knee injury, from the topic’s table.
The frequency ladder
A frequency axis on a log scale runs across the drawing, a tick for each tenfold step. Above it three pale lanes: on the left the widest, low frequency, with a few square pulses sketched in ink; in the middle, medium frequency, with a sine wave; on the right, high frequency, with a sine wave so fast its cycles crowd together, the lane warming from cream to a soft pink towards the right. Over the high lane lavender markers stand over the methods' frequencies, each with a dotted line down to the axis: a short capsule for d'Arsonvalization near the lane's left edge, a ball for shortwave further right, and two balls for decimetric and centimetric microwaves near the right end. Below the frequency axis, and lined up with it, a second axis gives how long one push of the current lasts, long pushes on the left and short on the right. Along it a lavender bar runs from the left edge, deepest over the nerve's chronaxie, which lies just past the low lane's edge under the first few kilohertz, then fades out across the rest of the medium lane and is gone by the edge of high frequency.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Read the two axes together: every frequency sits over the time one push of the current lasts, which is half a cycle. A nerve needs a push of about 0.1 to 0.5 ms to fire. Low-frequency pulses are that long; within the first few kilohertz the pushes grow shorter than that, and the nerve then fires only when many add up. Above 100 kHz a push lasts 5 µs or less, at shortwave about 18 ns: far too short to fire anything, and too short for ions to travel. All that is left is heat, and the higher the method on the ladder, the more of its effect is heat.

Simplified: the axes are drawn to a log scale, a tenfold step each tick; the wave sketches in the lanes are not to that scale, and a few dozen cycles stand for millions; low-frequency currents come in many shapes, and the methods' waves are often pulsed or modulated; d'Arsonvalization's sits in bursts; the edge at 100 kHz is the course's boundary, not a sharp line in the nerve: the push a nerve needs varies between nerves, and very strong short pushes can still fire one; only the classic methods on the course's ladder are drawn: shortwave's other bands, older Russian frequencies and TECAR, which works near half a megahertz with electrodes on the skin, are left out.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Electrotherapy, types of electric current; High frequency currents; Local d'Arsonvalization.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 2 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Ultra-high frequency therapy.
  3. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2020. Electrical stimulation; shortwave therapies; microwave and radiofrequency heating.
  4. Robinson AJ, Snyder-Mackler L. Clinical Electrophysiology, electrotherapy and electrophysiologic testing, 3rd edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008. Strength-duration testing.
Three ways to heat deep
Three slices of the same tissue side by side, each with skin on top, then a row of cream fat lobules, a thick rose layer of muscle with fine fibres, and ivory bone at the foot. Over each slice, held clear of the skin, an applicator on its cable. Left: a flat pale plate; lavender field lines run straight down from it through every layer and out of the foot of the slice, and a warm red wash lies strongest in the fat, lighter in the skin and bone, faint in the muscle. Middle: a pale drum with a row of cable turns inside it; under it, in the muscle, lavender loops of eddy current, and the warm wash lies in the muscle, strongest near the top and fading with depth, with almost none in the fat. Right: a dome-shaped applicator with a short aerial inside; a lavender beam with faint curved wavefronts goes down into the tissue and fades within the upper muscle; the warm wash lies in the skin and the top of the muscle. From the fat-muscle boundary dashed fronts curve back upwards, and a hot band lies in the middle of the fat.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The same tissue heats in different places depending on how the energy arrives. Capacitive plates put the layers in series between them, so the same current crosses each, and the layer that resists most, fat, heats most. An inductive coil drives eddy currents, which run in good conductors, so water-rich muscle heats and fat barely does. A microwave beam is absorbed by water near the surface, so the heat is shallow, and part of it bounces back at the fat-muscle boundary, where it can leave a hot spot in the fat. In a patient with thick fat, an inductive coil or decimetric waves suit deep muscle better.

Simplified: not to scale: the layers' thickness, the air gaps and the applicators are drawn to fit, and the slices are cut off below the bone; the heat is a sketch of where it lands most, not a measured temperature map; real heating depends on the fat's thickness, the dose, the distance and blood flow; one placement each: the second capacitive plate on the far side of the limb, other coil forms (a cable or a solenoid) and decimetric applicators are not drawn; the field, the eddy currents and the beam are drawn as lines and washes; real fields spread and bend at every boundary, and the eddy currents are loops seen at a slant.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. High frequency currents (electrode effect, selectivity of the endogenic heat); Ultra-high frequency therapy; Decimetric current; Centimetric current (microwave).
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 2 handnotes. Medical University of Sofia, 2026. Shortwave (UHF) therapy, capacitive and inductive techniques.
  3. Lehmann JF, de Lateur BJ. Therapeutic heat. In: Lehmann JF (ed). Therapeutic Heat and Cold, 4th edition. Williams and Wilkins, 1990. Microwaves: reflection at the fat-muscle interface and standing waves in fat.
  4. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2020. Chapters on shortwave therapies and on microwave and radiofrequency heating.
A pulsed magnetic field through a limb
A lower leg cut lengthwise lies across the drawing: sand skin along the top and bottom, rose muscle with fine fibres, and the ivory tibia down the middle, with a ragged gap across it in the middle where a fracture has not united. Round the middle of the leg is a pale plaster cast, and over and under the cast a row of pale rings with ink rims, the turns of a coil cut across. Lavender field lines run straight along the leg inside the coil, through skin, muscle, bone and plaster alike, and curve round outside the coil to close above and below it; the line along the leg's axis runs out of the drawing at both ends. Two tall, narrow dashed lavender loops ring the leg inside the coil. On the right, two pale lanes, one above the other, linked by dotted lines: in the upper lane three flat-topped pulses with pauses between them; in the lower lane a short block above the line at each pulse's rise and a short block below it at each fall, and a flat line everywhere else.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A coil carrying pulsed current makes a magnetic field that passes through skin, muscle, bone and even plaster as if they were not there, because none of them is magnetic, so the coil can sit over a cast. The field itself does nothing to still tissue; while it changes, it induces a weak electric field and small currents in the tissue (Faraday's law), which the cells may respond to. Usually 1 to 100 pulses a second, it gives no meaningful heat. Its best-studied use is a fracture slow to unite, and even there the evidence is weak.

Simplified: not to scale: the leg, its layers, the cast and the coil are drawn to fit, and the coil is shown with only a few turns; only a few field lines are drawn, as a solenoid's field looks in empty space; the tissue barely changes it; the induced currents are drawn as two loops ringing the limb; they flow in rings round the axis all along the inside of the coil, and the dashes stand for weak, not for broken; the pulses are a sketch: devices differ in shape, width and rate, and their pulses come in bursts; the blocks of induced current are drawn flat because the drawn ramps are straight.

5 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Ultra-high frequency therapy, inductive electrodes (cables and solenoids).
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 2 handnotes (magnetotherapy). Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
  3. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2020. Chapter on pulsed electromagnetic fields.
  4. Halliday D, Resnick R, Walker J. Fundamentals of Physics, 10th edition. Wiley, 2014. Induction and inductance: Faraday's law; the magnetic field of a solenoid.
  5. Griffin XL, Costa ML, Parsons N, Smith N. Electromagnetic field stimulation for treating delayed union or non-union of long bone fractures in adults. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 2011.
The ultrasound beam
A slice of tissue: skin on top, a row of cream fat lobules, a deep rose muscle layer and ivory bone at the foot. An ultrasound head stands on the skin: a pale rounded handle widening into a face, and across the face a band, the crystal, a little narrower than the face. Under the face a puddle of pale straw gel fills the gap to the skin. From the crystal a pale straw beam goes straight down. Near the head it is as wide as the crystal, its ink wavefronts ripple unevenly and three deeper straw spots lie in it. Further down the wavefronts become smooth curves, the beam widens a little and grows fainter. Where it meets the bone, dashed fronts curve back the other way, and a soft red wash lies along the surface of the bone under the beam.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The crystal in the head swells and shrinks 1 or 3 million times a second and pushes a pressure wave into the tissue. Air would reflect almost all of it, so gel fills the gap. Near the head the beam is uneven, with hot spots several times the average, which is why the head keeps moving; further on it evens out and spreads gently, losing energy as the tissue absorbs it. At the bone about a third turns back, meets the incoming beam and heats the periosteum: a deep ache means too much.

Simplified: not to scale: the head, the gel and the layers are drawn to fit, and real wavefronts lie a millimetre or two apart; the near field is drawn short so the far field fits above the bone; with a usual head at 1 MHz it reaches about 10 cm, so in most treatments the whole target lies in it; the beam is drawn with sharp edges; a real beam has side lobes and no clean border, and its hot spots move as the head moves; the fading stands for absorption overall; each tissue absorbs differently, and the beam is also bent and partly reflected at every boundary, not only at bone.

4 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 3 handnotes (therapeutic ultrasound). Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
  2. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2020. Chapter on therapeutic ultrasound.
  3. Watson T. Therapeutic ultrasound. Electrotherapy on the Web.
  4. Cameron MH. Physical Agents in Rehabilitation, an evidence-based approach to practice, 5th edition. Elsevier, 2018. Chapter on ultrasound.
How deep ultrasound reaches
A chart. Along the bottom, depth from the skin, a tick every centimetre, the tick at 2 cm longer; up the left side, intensity, from none to all that enters at the skin. Two ink curves start together at the top left and fall towards the right, each over a pale straw wash: a solid one for 1 MHz that falls slowly, and a dashed one for 3 MHz that falls faster and stays below it. A dotted line at half height runs from the left axis to a ring on each curve, with a dotted drop from each ring to the depth axis, the 3 MHz ring nearer the skin. Under the depth axis, two spans: a short one near the skin, for 3 MHz, and a longer one starting where it ends and reaching further, for 1 MHz.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Ultrasound loses energy as the tissue absorbs it, and it loses it faster the higher its frequency. On average 3 MHz has lost half by about 2.5 cm, 1 MHz by about 4 cm. So 3 MHz suits superficial targets, about 1 to 2 cm deep, such as the lateral epicondyle or a scar, and 1 MHz deeper ones, about 2 to 5 cm, such as the hip capsule.

Simplified: the curves use average half-value depths for mixed soft tissue; real ones depend on the tissue: in muscle the beam halves within a centimetre or so, in fat it travels much further; the beam is drawn as if the tissue were the same all the way down; every boundary reflects some of it, and bone takes up most of what reaches it; each curve halves at a steady rate, the simplest model of absorption; the beam's spread and its uneven near field are left out; continuous and pulsed beams are not drawn apart: pulsing lowers the average intensity, and so the heating, not how deep the beam reaches.

3 sources
  1. Watson T. Ultrasound dose calculations. Electrotherapy on the Web.
  2. Watson T, Nussbaum EL (eds). Electrophysical Agents, evidence-based practice, 13th edition. Elsevier, 2020. Chapter on therapeutic ultrasound.
  3. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 3 handnotes (therapeutic ultrasound: 1 MHz for deeper, 3 MHz for superficial targets). Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
Focused and radial shock waves
Two slices of tissue side by side, skin, fat, muscle and bone, each with a device standing on gel. On the left a focused head: a rounded housing filled with water, a curved dish at its top. Ink arcs, each curved about one point deep in the muscle, shrink as they go down through a pale straw cone that narrows to that point, where a small upright spindle in a deeper straw marks the focal zone; below it two faint arcs spread again. On the right a radial applicator: a narrow barrel with a projectile in its bore and a metal tip on the skin. From the tip, ink half-rings spread into the tissue over a straw wash, both strongest at the skin and fading to nothing a short way down. Under each slice, a small chart of pressure against time with a tick each microsecond. The left trace leaps almost straight up to a high peak, marked plus, falls back within about a microsecond and dips below the line in a shallow trough, washed pale and marked minus, before returning to it. The right trace rises over about a microsecond to a far lower peak, stays up a few microseconds, then dips below the line about as far as it rose, for longer.+−

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A focused shock wave is gathered to a point, so its energy is greatest deep in the tissue, up to about 6 cm, at the focus. A radial pressure wave spreads from the applicator, so its energy is greatest at the skin and fades within about 3 cm. Each is one pulse: the focused one rises in 10 to 100 nanoseconds to 10 to 100 MPa, then pulls for a moment; the radial one rises more slowly to a lower peak.

Simplified: the devices are sketches, not to scale, though both slices share one depth scale; the time axis runs to 10 microseconds, and the two pulses share its pressure scale; the radial pulse is drawn after one device measured in water, its ringing smoothed and its long tail cut short; real numbers depend on the device, the applicator and the air pressure; the focal zone is drawn as a small spindle at one depth; its size and depth differ between devices, and the energy does not stop at its edge but falls away gradually; the focused head stands for all three generators, spark, coil and crystals; the dish drawn is closest to the crystal design, while the others focus with a reflector or a lens.

3 sources
  1. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 3 handnotes (extracorporeal shock wave therapy). Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
  2. Cleveland RO, Chitnis PV, McClure SR. Acoustic field of a ballistic shock wave therapy device. Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology, 2007;33(8):1327–1335.
  3. Tenforde AS, Borgstrom HE, DeLuca S et al. Best practices for extracorporeal shockwave therapy in musculoskeletal medicine, clinical application and training consideration. PM&R, 2022.
Where inhaled particles land
An airway drawn as a branching tube: in at the mouth on the left, along and round a bend where the throat turns down, down the trachea with faint cartilage rings, into two main bronchi, then smaller branches and small airways that end in clusters of alveoli. Particles are graphite balls, the colour of a drug, in four sizes. The largest lie pressed against the outer wall of the throat's bend, each at the end of a dotted line running straight on from the mouth. Mid-size ones lie on the walls of the trachea and on the ridge where it divides. Small ones lie in the small airways and alveoli, each under a short dotted fall. The finest lie in alveoli at the end of a wandering dotted path, and a few drift back out of the mouth. At the upper right, a small chart of lung volume against time with a tick each second: the line rises smoothly over a few seconds, stays flat for a long hold, then falls.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

What decides where an inhaled particle lands is its size. Particles over 10 µm cannot turn at the bends and strike the mouth and throat; 5 to 10 µm land in the trachea and large bronchi; 1 to 5 µm settle in the small airways and alveoli, the target for asthma and COPD. Many particles of 0.1 to 1 µm are breathed out again, and only the smallest reach the alveoli by diffusion. A slow deep breath over 3 to 5 seconds and a hold of about 10 seconds give them time to settle.

Simplified: the airway is a schematic: a handful of branches stands for about twenty generations, and its sizes and angles are not to scale; each size is drawn landing in one place; real deposition curves overlap, and every size lands in more than one place; the particles are drawn far larger than they are, and only in order of size, not to one scale; the airway starts at the mouth, as with an inhaler; breathing through the nose filters out large particles even sooner.

3 sources
  1. Aleksiev A. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation for English-speaking MD students. Medical University of Sofia, 2002. Aerosolotherapy.
  2. Aleksiev AR. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, lecture 3 handnotes (aerosol therapy). Medical University of Sofia, 2026.
  3. Laube BL, Janssens HM, de Jongh FHC et al. What the pulmonary specialist should know about the new inhalation therapies. European Respiratory Journal, 2011.
Where each antibiotic can reach
Three cells cut through, side by side on a white plate. On the left, a pneumococcus: two sage-green lance-shaped cells end to end, pointed at their outer ends, each wrapped in a thin amber membrane and outside that a thick pale violet wall, small red ribosomes inside; small grey dots, a β-lactam, sit in the wall all round. In the middle, a smaller rounded Mycoplasma: green inside a thin amber membrane, with no wall; darker grey dots, a macrolide, sit beside half of its red ribosomes, and the lighter grey β-lactam dots lie scattered outside it. On the right, a large pale blue macrophage with a darker kidney-shaped nucleus, and in it a round vacuole edged by an amber membrane holding four short olive-green rods, Legionella; dark macrolide dots are scattered through the macrophage and in the vacuole, while the lighter β-lactam dots lie round the outside of the macrophage.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

A β-lactam such as amoxicillin acts on the bacterial wall, so it kills the pneumococcus but cannot touch Mycoplasma, which has no wall, and does not clear Legionella, which lives inside the alveolar macrophages, where β-lactams gather poorly. Macrolides act on the ribosome and gather inside cells, so they reach both; doxycycline and the fluoroquinolones do too. This is why atypical cover means adding a macrolide or doxycycline to a β-lactam, or using a fluoroquinolone alone.

Simplified: not to scale: the drug molecules drawn as dots far larger than life, and far fewer, and the cells at sizes that fit side by side, though a macrophage is many times larger than a bacterium; the wall drawn as one layer without the pneumococcus's capsule, the β-lactam drawn in the wall where its target enzymes lie at the wall's inner face, and the pneumococcus's own ribosomes without a macrolide; one dot colour for any β-lactam and one for any macrolide, standing also for doxycycline, which binds the other ribosomal subunit, and the fluoroquinolones, which act on DNA; each cell cut through and simplified: the macrophage with one nucleus and one vacuole, Legionella as four rods, and shown only in a macrophage, though it also multiplies in alveolar epithelial cells.

10 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: community-acquired pneumonia (pp. 963–964).
  2. Papp-Wallace KM, Endimiani A, Taracila MA, Bonomo RA. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 2011;55:4943–60. Carbapenems: past, present, and future
  3. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 3.3 Unique characteristics of prokaryotic cells
  4. Parker N et al. Microbiology. OpenStax, 2016. 14.3 Mechanisms of antibacterial drugs
  5. Waites KB, Talkington DF. Mycoplasma pneumoniae and its role as a human pathogen. Clin Microbiol Rev 2004;17(4):697–728.
  6. Vázquez-Laslop N, Mankin AS. How macrolide antibiotics work. Trends Biochem Sci 2018;43(9):668–84.
  7. Corrin B, Nicholson AG. Pathology of the Lungs, 3rd edition. Churchill Livingstone, 2011. Chapter 5, Infectious diseases: pneumococcal pneumonia and Legionnaires’ disease.
  8. Cunha BA. Legionnaires' disease: clinical differentiation from typical and other atypical pneumonias. Infect Dis Clin North Am 2010;24(1):73–105.
  9. Bongers S, Hellebrekers P, Leenen LPH, Koenderman L, Hietbrink F. Intracellular penetration and effects of antibiotics on Staphylococcus aureus inside human neutrophils: a comprehensive review. Antibiotics (Basel) 2019;8(2):54.
  10. Barcia-Macay M, Seral C, Mingeot-Leclercq MP, Tulkens PM, Van Bambeke F. Pharmacodynamic evaluation of the intracellular activities of antibiotics against Staphylococcus aureus in a model of THP-1 macrophages. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 2006;50(3):841–51.
Where emphysema destroys the acinus
Three acini side by side, each drawn as a small pink tree seen from outside: a terminal bronchiole at the top divides into two respiratory bronchioles with a few alveoli budding from their walls, each of those into two alveolar ducts lined with alveoli, and each duct ends in an alveolar sac, a cluster of round alveoli like grapes. On the left a normal acinus. In the middle centriacinar emphysema: the respiratory bronchioles at the centre are replaced by two large pale hollow spaces with stubs of torn wall at their edges, while the ducts and sacs below look normal. On the right panacinar emphysema: the whole acinus is a little larger and every level of it is enlarged evenly, each respiratory bronchiole, each duct and each sac now one pale hollow space of about the same size with stubs of torn wall, so ducts and alveoli can no longer be told apart.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Emphysema is a permanent enlargement of the air spaces beyond the terminal bronchiole, with destruction of their walls. In centriacinar emphysema, the common kind in smokers and worst in the upper lobes, the damage centres on the respiratory bronchioles and spares the sacs beyond. In panacinar emphysema, the type associated with α1-antitrypsin deficiency and worst in the lower lobes, the whole acinus is enlarged evenly.

Simplified: not to scale, and the airways drawn as plain pink tubes; two of each branch and a handful of alveoli, where a respiratory bronchiole supplies about 200; the acinus drawn from outside, as if it stood alone, though acini lie packed together; the spaces drawn as smooth bubbles, though a centriacinar lesion is a cluster of small dilated spaces; paraseptal emphysema, under the pleura, and irregular emphysema, round scars, left out.

2 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 28, Respiratory disease: the airways (p. 930) and emphysema (pp. 955–956).
  2. Takahashi M et al. Imaging of pulmonary emphysema: a pictorial review. Int J Chron Obstruct Pulmon Dis. 2008;3(2):193-204.
Diphyllobothrium latum
On the far left, a short length of an adult Diphyllobothrium latum: a small scolex at the top, a thin neck, then a ribbon of proglottids that widen as they go back until they are far broader than long, each with a dark spot in its middle, the rosette of its uterus. Beside it, the scolex and neck drawn large: a long, flat head with a deep groove, a bothrium, down its face, then the neck and the first young proglottids behind it. At the top right, a mature proglottid drawn large from its ventral side, broader than long, its hind edge overhanging the next: on the left the small golden yolk glands, on the right the larger blue testes, in the middle the pink uterus coiled in loops either side of the midline into a rosette full of amber eggs, the two-lobed ovary near the hind edge, and near the front edge the blue cirrus sac at the genital pore, with the uterine pore just behind it. Along the foot, its forms outside the definitive host: an oval egg with a lid at one end and a small knob at the other, holding its egg cell among yolk cells; a round coracidium covered in cilia, the oncosphere inside it with its six hooks; a procercoid, a long larva with a round tail, the cercomer, that holds the hooks; and a plerocercoid, a longer, flat, finely wrinkled larva with a groove at its front end.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Diphyllobothrium latum (now Dibothriocephalus latus), the broad fish tapeworm, grows 2 to 15 m long with 2000 to 5000 proglottids. It holds on by two grooves on its scolex, not suckers, and its proglottids are broader than long. Its eggs, 55 to 75 µm long, have a lid; in fresh water a ciliated coracidium hatches, a copepod eats it, a fish eats the copepod, and people are infected by the plerocercoid in raw or undercooked fish.

Simplified: not to scale: the adult, metres long, is drawn as a short length beside an enlarged scolex, an enlarged proglottid and the larvae, each at its own size; the adult's proglottids are far more numerous than drawn, and the ribbon is a short piece of it; the testes and the yolk glands both fill both side fields, the testes deep and the yolk glands near the surface; drawn one on each side, as taxonomists draw them; the excretory canals, the nerves, the vagina, the seminal receptacle and Mehlis' gland left out; the larvae drawn as simple outlines, their glands and inner tissues left out; the coracidium's hooks drawn larger than they are.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Diphyllobothriasis. Last reviewed 14 May 2019.
  2. Hernández-Orts JS, Kuzmina TA, Gomez-Puerta LA, Kuchta R. Diphyllobothrium sprakeri n. sp. (Cestoda: Diphyllobothriidae): a hidden broad tapeworm from sea lions off North and South America. Parasit Vectors. 2021;14:219.
  3. Kuchta R, Phillips AJ, Scholz T. Diversity and biology of Spirometra tapeworms (Cestoda: Diphyllobothriidea), zoonotic parasites of wildlife: a review. Int J Parasitol Parasites Wildl. 2024;24:100947.
  4. Wikipedia. Cestoda.
Diphyllobothrium latum: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of Diphyllobothrium latum, the broad fish tapeworm. Across the top, the patient's pale panel, the definitive host: the adult tapeworm lives in the small intestine and its eggs appear in the faeces 5 to 6 weeks after infection. Down the left, on the white page, the eggs are passed unembryonated, mature in fresh water in 18 to 20 days, and a ciliated coracidium hatches and swims. Along the foot, three panels from left to right. A copepod, the first intermediate host, eats the coracidium, which becomes a procercoid in its body cavity. A perch or a ruffe, the second intermediate host, eats the copepod, and the procercoid becomes a plerocercoid in its muscle and organs. A pike or a burbot eats the perch and gathers its plerocercoids unchanged in its own muscle: a paratenic host. From both fish an arrow climbs to the patient, who eats them raw or undercooked.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

The broad fish tapeworm passes through two aquatic hosts before it reaches people: a copepod, then a fish. Big predatory fish such as pike carry plerocercoids they took from the small fish they ate, without the larvae developing further. People are infected by eating raw, marinated or undercooked freshwater fish.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; one copepod, one perch and one pike drawn for the several copepods and fish that can carry it; dogs, cats, bears and other fish-eating mammals are definitive hosts too; each larva's way out of the gut of the host that eats it, into that host's tissues, drawn as one arrow.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Diphyllobothriasis. Last reviewed 14 May 2019.
  2. Kovalov V, Trubenová B. The life cycle of the tapeworm Dibothriocephalus latus in the Alpine region: what we know, what we miss, and how it is maintained. Int J Parasitol Parasites Wildl. 2026;31:101294.
Taenia solium and Taenia saginata
On the far left, a short length of an adult Taenia: a small scolex at the top, a thin neck, then a ribbon of proglottids, broader than long near the neck, square in the middle and longer than wide toward the end. Across the top, the two scoleces drawn large, each a rounded, four-sided knob on a short neck with the first young proglottids behind it. Taenia solium's has four suckers, two facing us and two at the sides, and at its apex a small rostellum ringed by a crown of hooks in two rows, large and small. Taenia saginata's has the four suckers but no rostellum and no hooks. Below each, its gravid proglottid drawn large, longer than wide, with the genital pore on one side margin: in T. solium the pink uterus is a stem down the middle with a few thick side branches on each side; in T. saginata many more fine side branches, each forking, all strung with amber eggs. On the right, the egg the two share: round, with a thick, radially striped amber wall round the oncosphere and its six hooks; and below it the cysticercus, a pale bladder with the scolex turned in from one side, its suckers and hooks inside.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The two tapeworms are told apart by the scolex, armed with hooks in Taenia solium and unarmed in T. saginata, and by the gravid proglottid: 7 to 13 side branches of the uterus on each side in T. solium, 12 to 30 in T. saginata. Their eggs, 30 to 35 µm across, look alike. T. solium's cysticercus can also grow in people, as cysticercosis.

Simplified: not to scale: the adult, metres long, is drawn as a short length beside the enlarged scoleces, proglottids, egg and cysticercus, each at its own size; only the half of the crown of hooks that faces us is drawn, and the adult's small scolex is drawn without its hooks; the gravid proglottids show only the uterus and the genital pore; their remaining ducts, the excretory canals and the nerves are left out, and the side branches are drawn evenly spaced; the cysticercus's scolex is drawn as a knob reaching into the bladder; in life it lies folded inside a spiral canal.

5 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Taeniasis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Cysticercosis. Last reviewed 12 July 2019.
  3. Wikipedia. Taenia solium.
  4. Wikipedia. Taenia saginata.
  5. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Taenia saginata (beef tapeworm) infection. MSD Manual Professional Edition, 2025.
Taenia saginata and Taenia solium: the life cycles
A map of the life cycles of the beef and pork tapeworms. Across the top, the patient's pale panel, the only definitive host: the adult tapeworm lives in the small intestine, grown from a cysticercus in about 2 months. Down the middle, on the white page, eggs and whole gravid proglottids are passed in the faeces, infective at once. Along the foot, three panels. On the left, cattle eat the eggs with soiled fodder, and T. saginata's cysticerci form in their muscle. On the right, a pig does the same with T. solium's. From each, an arrow climbs an outer edge back to the patient, who eats the beef or pork raw or undercooked. In the middle, a person who swallows T. solium's eggs in soiled food or water becomes its accidental intermediate host: cysticerci form in the brain, muscle and skin over 60 to 70 days, cysticercosis, and no arrow leaves this panel.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

People are the only definitive host of both tapeworms: they carry the adult after eating raw or undercooked beef (T. saginata) or pork (T. solium). T. solium is the dangerous one: a person who swallows its eggs, from someone else's faeces or their own, becomes its intermediate host, and its cysticerci can lodge in the brain.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; the two tapeworms drawn as one cycle: T. saginata goes only through cattle, T. solium through pigs and, by accident, people; one adult and one egg drawn for both; each larva's way from the gut it hatches in to the muscle it settles in, through the blood, drawn as one arrow.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Taeniasis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Cysticercosis. Last reviewed 12 July 2019.
Echinococcus granulosus
On the left, the whole adult Echinococcus granulosus drawn large: a scolex with four suckers and a rostellum ringed by hooks, a short neck, then only three proglottids: a small immature one, a mature one with blue testes scattered through it, a compact pink ovary, a golden yolk gland and a genital pore on its side margin, and a long gravid one, about half the length of the whole worm, its pink uterus a stem with side pouches full of amber eggs. In the middle, a hydatid cyst in section: outside, a muted band of the host's own fibrous tissue; inside it the cyst's thick, pale, faintly layered laminated layer; then the thin germinal layer, from which small round brood capsules bud into the clear fluid, each holding protoscolices; three daughter cysts float in the fluid, each walled like the mother cyst; and loose protoscolices lie settled at the bottom, the hydatid sand. On the right, the egg, round with a thick, radially striped amber wall round the oncosphere and its six hooks; and below it a protoscolex drawn large, an oval with its suckers and crown of hooks turned in.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Echinococcus granulosus is a tiny tapeworm, 2 to 7 mm long with 3 proglottids, of the dog's small intestine. People who swallow its eggs grow its larva, the hydatid cyst, most often in the liver (60%) or the lung (20%): a fluid-filled cyst that grows slowly for years and buds thousands of protoscolices inside.

Simplified: not to scale: the adult, a few millimetres long, and the cyst, often centimetres across, are drawn near the same size; the egg and the protoscolex are enlarged; the testes drawn fewer than they are, the excretory canals and the nerves left out, and only the half of the crown of hooks facing us; the cyst drawn with a few brood capsules and daughter cysts, where a real one holds very many; the layers' thicknesses not to scale.

6 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Echinococcosis. Last reviewed 15 July 2019.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Taeniasis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  3. Wikipedia. Echinococcus granulosus; Echinococcosis.
  4. Feather A, Randall D, Waterhouse M, editors. Kumar and Clark’s Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 20, Infectious disease; hydatid disease, p. 581.
  5. World Organisation for Animal Health. Manual of Diagnostic Tests and Vaccines for Terrestrial Animals, 2022. Chapter 3.1.6, Echinococcosis.
  6. Gessese AT. Review on epidemiology and public health significance of hydatidosis. Veterinary Medicine International 2020;2020:8859116.
Echinococcus granulosus: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the dog tapeworm. Across the top, the dog's pale panel, the definitive host: the tiny adult lives in the small intestine, grown from a protoscolex in 32 to 80 days. Down the middle, on the white page, eggs are passed in the dog's faeces, infective at once. Along the foot, two panels. On the left, a sheep eats the eggs as it grazes; the larvae hatch, cross the gut wall and grow into hydatid cysts in its liver and lungs, full of protoscolices. An arrow climbs the left side back to the dog, which eats the sheep's organs with their cysts. On the right, a person swallows the eggs, after close contact with a dog or in food or water soiled with dog faeces, and grows the same cysts, most often in the liver (60%) or the lung (20%): hydatid disease. No arrow leaves this panel.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Dogs carry the adult; sheep and other grazing animals carry the cyst, and the cycle turns when dogs eat their offal. A person who swallows the eggs grows hydatid cysts but passes nothing on: the cycle ends there.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; one intermediate host drawn, the sheep, for the grazing animals that carry the parasite's several strains; one egg and one cyst drawn for all; the larva's way from the gut it hatches in to the organ it settles in, through the blood, drawn as one arrow.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Echinococcosis. Last reviewed 15 July 2019.
  2. Feather A, Randall D, Waterhouse M, editors. Kumar and Clark’s Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 20, Infectious disease; hydatid disease, p. 581.
Hymenolepis nana
On the left, the whole adult Hymenolepis nana, a slender ribbon: a tiny head, a long thin neck, then many short proglottids growing wider toward the hind end. In the middle, enlarged: the scolex, with four suckers and a rostellum ringed by a single crown of hooks, on its long slender neck; a mature proglottid, far wider than long, with three round blue testes in a row, one on one side and two on the other, a pink ovary between them with a golden yolk gland behind it, and a genital pore on one side margin; and a gravid proglottid, its uterus a pink sac packed with eggs. On the right, the egg: oval and pale, with a thin outer membrane, an inner membrane with a knob at each end from which fine polar filaments spread into the space between, and the oncosphere inside with its six hooks; and below it the cysticercoid, the larva, as it grows in a beetle: a small thick-walled body with its scolex turned in, and a short tail.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Hymenolepis nana, the dwarf tapeworm, is 15 to 40 mm long and the commonest tapeworm of people, above all children. Its egg is told apart by the polar filaments, 4 to 8, between its two membranes.

Simplified: not to scale: the scolex, the proglottids, the egg and the larva are enlarged, each by a different amount, and the whole adult is drawn far fewer proglottids than it has; only the half of the crown of hooks facing us; the excretory canals, the nerves and the seminal vesicles left out; the two-lobed ovary drawn as one; the hooks drawn as plain sickles, not their true tuning-fork shape; four polar filaments drawn at each pole, within the range the egg has.

6 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Hymenolepiasis. Last reviewed 5 June 2024.
  2. Wikipedia. Hymenolepis nana.
  3. Ito A, Budke CM. Perspectives on intestinal tapeworm infections: an evaluation of direct and indirect life-cycles with a special emphasis on species of Hymenolepis. Curr Res Parasitol Vector Borne Dis. 2021;1:100023.
  4. Feather A, Randall D, Waterhouse M, editors. Kumar and Clark’s Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 20, Infectious disease; tapeworms, p. 580.
  5. Younis AE, Saad AI, El-Akhal IRM, Saleh NMK. A parasitological survey of zoonotic cestodes carried by house rats in Aswan, Egypt. Veterinary World 2021;14:2160–2169.
  6. Olson PD, Zarowiecki M, James K, et al. Genome-wide transcriptome profiling and spatial expression analyses identify signals and switches of development in tapeworms. EvoDevo 2018;9:21.
Hymenolepis nana: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the dwarf tapeworm. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is both the definitive and the intermediate host. Left to right, an oncosphere hatches from a swallowed egg in the small intestine; it burrows into a villus and grows into a cysticercoid, without a tail, which returns to the lumen after 5 to 6 days; and there it grows into the adult, in the ileum, which lives 4 to 6 weeks. A loop beneath them, inside the patient, runs back from the adult to the oncosphere: autoinfection, its eggs hatching without leaving the gut. From the adult, eggs are passed in the stool, onto the white page; they are infective at once and last up to 10 days. From the eggs, an arrow climbs the left side back to the oncosphere: a person swallows them from soiled hands, food or water. At the foot, a pale panel: a grain beetle eats the eggs and carries cysticercoids with tails; an arrow climbs the right side to the adult, for a person who swallows an infected beetle by accident.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

The dwarf tapeworm needs no intermediate host: a person is both its definitive and its intermediate host, and catches it straight from another's stool. Its eggs can also hatch in the gut of the person who carries it, so the infection keeps itself going.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; fleas, which can also carry the cysticercoid, and the rodents that carry the parasite too, left out; the egg hatching and the oncosphere entering a villus drawn as one stage.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Hymenolepiasis. Last reviewed 5 June 2024.
  2. Ito A, Budke CM. Perspectives on intestinal tapeworm infections: an evaluation of direct and indirect life-cycles with a special emphasis on species of Hymenolepis. Curr Res Parasitol Vector Borne Dis. 2021;1:100023.
  3. Wikipedia. Hymenolepis nana.
  4. Feather A, Randall D, Waterhouse M, editors. Kumar and Clark’s Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 20, Infectious disease; tapeworms, p. 580.
Ascaris lumbricoides
On the left, the female and the male Ascaris lumbricoides seen from the side as if cleared: long, round, ivory worms tapering to both ends. The female is the longer and thicker, her tail straight. A short muscular oesophagus runs back from the mouth into the olive intestine, which runs the length of the body to the anus near the tail. About a third of the way down, on her belly side, the vulva opens, and behind it her pink ovaries and uteri loop through the rest of her body. The male is smaller, his tail curled toward his belly, with one blue testis looping through his body and two spicules at the tail. In the middle, at the top, the head seen end-on: three rounded lips round a three-cornered mouth, two papillae on the upper, dorsal lip and one on each of the others. Below it a female cut across: the outer cuticle; the hypodermis under it, thickened into four cords, those at the sides with their excretory canals and those at the top and bottom with the dorsal and ventral nerve cords; the longitudinal muscle cells between the cords, bulging inward; and inside them the open body cavity, holding the flattened intestine, the two large round uteri full of eggs and the small cut loops of the ovaries. On the right, a fertile egg, round, with a thick shell under a bumpy brown coat and a single cell inside; below it an infertile egg, longer and narrower, its coat uneven, full of granules.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Ascaris lumbricoides, the large roundworm, is the commonest parasitic worm of people. Females are 20 to 35 cm long, males 15 to 31 cm. A female lays about 200,000 eggs a day, and each must lie in the soil for 18 days to several weeks before it can infect.

Simplified: not to scale: the worms are drawn far shorter for their width than they are, and the head, the section and the eggs are enlarged, each by a different amount; the ovaries, uteri and testis drawn as single looping lines with far fewer loops than they have; the excretory pore, the nerve ring and the male's papillae left out, and the excretory canals shown only in the cross-section; the amphids beside the ventrolateral papillae left out, and each double papilla drawn as one; the cross-section simplified, its muscle cells, cords and organs drawn as at mid-body of a female; the muscle cells' arms to the nerve cords left out.

6 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Ascariasis. Last reviewed 19 July 2019.
  2. Wikipedia. Ascaris lumbricoides; Ascaris suum.
  3. Wikipedia. Nematode: anatomy and reproduction; Spicule (nematode anatomy).
  4. Castelletto ML, Akimori D, Patel R, Schroeder NE, Hallem EA. Introduction to Strongyloides stercoralis anatomy. Journal of Nematology 2024;56:e20240019.
  5. Wikipedia. Coelom: pseudocoelomates; Ascaris.
  6. Civáňová Křížová K, Seifertová M, Baruš V, et al. First study of Ascaris lumbricoides from the semiwild population of the Sumatran orangutan Pongo abelii in the context of morphological description and molecular phylogeny. Life 2023;13:1016.
Ascaris lumbricoides: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the large roundworm. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is the definitive host, and the parasite needs no other. Low on the left, larvae hatch from swallowed eggs in the small intestine and penetrate the gut wall. An arrow climbs from them to the top of the panel: the larvae are carried in the portal, then the systemic blood to the lungs, where they mature further. From the lungs an arrow runs right and down: within about two weeks of infection the larvae break into the air spaces, climb the airways to the throat and are swallowed, and in the small intestine they grow into adult worms, which start laying eggs 2 to 3 months after the eggs were swallowed and live 1 to 2 years. From the adults, eggs are passed in the stool, down the right side onto the white page: fertile eggs, usually still a single cell and not yet infective. An arrow runs left from them: in the soil a larva grows inside each egg in 18 days to several weeks, best in moist, warm, shaded soil. From the infective eggs an arrow climbs the left side back to the larvae in the gut: a person swallows them on vegetables, in water or from soiled hands.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Ascaris needs only one host, but its eggs must ripen in the soil before they can infect: there is no spread straight from person to person. Inside the patient, the larvae take a long way round, through the blood and the lungs, before they settle in the gut.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the host drawn as an icon and the parasite drawn small, nothing to scale; the pig roundworm, Ascaris suum, which can also infect people, left out; the larvae's way from the gut wall to the lungs, through the liver and the heart, drawn as one arrow; the larvae's moults left out.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Ascariasis. Last reviewed 19 July 2019.
  2. Musimbi ZD, Laubschat A, Oser L, et al. Larval ascariasis elicits a prominent IgA and IgG1/2 antibody response to adult Ascaris excretory/secretory antigens in pigs. Frontiers in Immunology 2025;16:1606128.
  3. World Health Organization. Soil-transmitted helminth infections, fact sheet. 18 January 2023.
Enterobius vermicularis
On the left, the female pinworm seen from the side as if cleared: a slender ivory worm, her head end with a small swelling of the cuticle on each side, a short oesophagus ending in a round bulb, and her body behind it packed with tiny eggs. Her tail is drawn out into a long, fine point, and the anus opens on her belly side where the tail begins. In the middle, at the top, her head end enlarged: the cuticle swollen into a wing on either side of the head, the cephalic alae; the coral oesophagus, a muscular tube that narrows into a short isthmus and ends in a round bulb; and behind the bulb the olive intestine. Below, the male, drawn at the female's scale: much smaller, with the same head and bulb, one blue testis, and a blunt tail curled toward his belly, with a single spicule. On the right, two eggs, long ovals flattened on one side with a clear, colourless shell: the first as it is laid, holding a young embryo; the second a few hours later, holding a larva folded back on itself.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Enterobius vermicularis: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the pinworm. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is the definitive host, and the only one. Low on the left, larvae hatch from swallowed eggs in the small intestine. An arrow climbs from them to the top of the panel: the larvae grow into adults on the way to the large intestine, where the adults live, usually in the caecum; the females lay eggs about 1 month after the eggs were swallowed, and the adults live about 2 months. From the adults an arrow runs right and down: at night the females crawl out of the anus and lay their eggs on the skin around it, where each egg can infect within 4 to 6 hours; a few larvae may hatch there and crawl back into the rectum. From the eggs on the skin an arrow runs straight back left to the larvae: scratching carries the eggs on the fingers to the mouth. A second arrow runs down the right side onto the white page: the eggs are shed onto bedding, clothes, toys and into dust, where they survive up to 3 weeks. From there an arrow climbs the left side back to the larvae: the eggs are swallowed by the same person or another, from the fingers or food, and rarely breathed in with dust.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

The pinworm needs one host and no time outside it: its eggs can infect within hours of being laid, so it spreads from the anus to the mouth on the fingers, and through a household on bedding, clothes and dust.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the host drawn as an icon and the parasite drawn small, nothing to scale; the larvae's moults, and the mating of the adults, left out; the larvae that crawl back from the skin into the rectum noted, not drawn.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Enterobiasis. Last reviewed 5 August 2019.
  2. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Pinworm infestation. MSD Manual Professional Edition, January 2025.
  3. Wikipedia. Pinworm (parasite): life cycle.
Trichuris trichiura
On the left, the female and the male whipworm seen from the side as if cleared. Each is a thread-thin front, about two thirds of the worm, then a short, thick hind part, like a whip and its handle. Along the thin front runs the coral oesophagus among a single row of gland cells, the stichosome. Where the thin part ends, the olive intestine begins and runs through the thick part to the anus at the tip of the tail. The female's hind part is straight and blunt; her vulva opens where the oesophagus meets the intestine, and her pink ovary and uterus full of eggs fill the hind part. The male's hind part is coiled toward his belly, with one blue testis looping through it and a single long spicule at the tail. In the middle, at the top, the wall of the caecum cut across: a band of pink tissue with test-tube crypts, under a row of surface cells. A worm's thin front runs just under the surface, inside the lining, and its thick hind part rises free into the gut. Below, the front end enlarged: the mouth, a short muscular oesophagus, then the narrow tube running past a row of large, round gland cells. On the right, two barrel-shaped eggs with a clear plug at each end: the first as it is passed, a single cell; the second with a folded larva inside.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The whipworm threads its thin front into the lining of the caecum and the ascending colon, where it lives about 1 year. A female sheds 3,000 to 20,000 eggs a day, and each needs 15 to 30 days in the soil before it can infect.

Simplified: not to scale: the worms are drawn far shorter for their width than they are, and the wall, the front end and the eggs are enlarged, each by a different amount; the stichosome in the whole worms drawn small; the bacillary band along the thin front, the mouth's stylet, the male's spicule sheath and the vagina left out; the ovary, uterus and testis drawn as single looping lines; the wall of the caecum drawn as a band of crypts under a row of surface cells; in life the worm's front lies in a tunnel of the lining's cells.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trichuriasis. Last reviewed 10 June 2024.
  2. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Trichuriasis. MSD Manual Professional Edition, last updated September 2026.
  3. Rivero J, Cutillas C, Callejón R. Trichuris trichiura (Linnaeus, 1771) from human and non-human primates: morphology, biometry, host specificity, molecular characterization, and phylogeny. Frontiers in Veterinary Science 2021;7:626120.
  4. Wikipedia. Trichuris trichiura.
Trichuris trichiura: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the whipworm. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is the definitive host, and the parasite needs no other. On the left, larvae hatch from swallowed eggs in the small intestine. An arrow runs right: the larvae mature and settle as adults in the caecum and the ascending colon, their thin front threaded into the lining; the females start laying eggs 60 to 70 days after infection, and the adults live about 1 year. From the adults, eggs are passed in the stool, down the right side onto the white page: unembryonated, not yet infective. An arrow runs left from them: in the soil the egg divides and a larva grows inside it in 15 to 30 days. From the infective eggs an arrow climbs the left side back to the larvae in the gut: a person swallows them from soiled hands or food.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Like Ascaris, the whipworm needs one host, and its eggs must ripen in the soil: there is no spread straight from person to person. Unlike Ascaris, its larvae never leave the gut.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the host drawn as an icon and the parasite drawn small, nothing to scale; the egg's stages in the soil, from two cells to the larva, drawn as one arrow; the larvae's moults left out.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trichuriasis. Last reviewed 10 June 2024.
  2. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Trichuriasis. MSD Manual Professional Edition, last updated September 2026.
  3. World Health Organization. Soil-transmitted helminth infections, fact sheet. 18 January 2023.
Trichinella spiralis
On the left, the female and the male seen from the side as if cleared, drawn to one scale, the female the longer. Each is a slender ivory worm, thin at the front, where a narrow coral oesophagus runs along a single row of large gland cells, the stichosome, and thicker behind, where the olive intestine runs to the anus at the tip of the tail. The female's vulva opens far forward, beside the stichosome; behind it her single pink uterus holds tiny curled larvae near the vulva and eggs further back, and her ovary loops near the tail. The male has a blue testis, and his tail ends in two small rounded lobes, the copulatory appendages. At the top right, a larva in muscle: three striated coral muscle fibres lie across the drawing, and the middle one is swollen into a pale nurse cell with many nuclei and no striations, its outside a beige collagen capsule shaped like a lemon. Inside it the ivory larva lies coiled, its row of gland cells along its front half. Thin red capillaries hug the capsule above and below it. At the bottom, the female's front end enlarged: the mouth on the left, the oesophagus running along its stichosome, the vulva on her belly side, and behind it the uterus full of curled larvae, one of them leaving through the vulva.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Trichinella is a tiny roundworm: the female is about 2.2 mm long, the male about 1.2 mm. One host carries both stages, the adults for a few weeks in the small intestine, then their larvae for years in its muscles, each larva coiled inside a muscle cell it has remade into a nurse cell.

Simplified: the female and the male drawn to one scale but far wider for their length than they are; the nurse cell and the front end enlarged, each by a different amount; the stichosome in the whole worms drawn small; the mouth's stylet, the cuticle's bacillary bands and the male's accessory papillae left out; the ovary, uterus and testis drawn as single tubes; a few dozen of the nurse cell's nuclei drawn; the fibres around it drawn as three bands, and its network of capillaries as two vessels.

5 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trichinellosis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Trichinosis. MSD Manual Professional Edition, January 2025.
  3. Mitic I, Vasilev S, Gruden-Movsesijan A. Trichinellosis: a zoonosis that still requires vigilance. PLOS Neglected Tropical Diseases 2026;20(1):e0013944.
  4. Wikipedia. Trichinella spiralis.
  5. Abdel Salam SA, El-Darier SM, Ashmawy MI, Abdelaziz M, Arafa FM. Rosmarinus officinalis L. essential oil: in silico molecular docking and in vivo nematocidal activity on intestinal and muscular trichinellosis. BMC Complementary Medicine and Therapies 2025;25.
Trichinella: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of Trichinella. Every host carries both stages, the adult worms in its small intestine for a few weeks and then their larvae in its muscles, so each is a definitive and an intermediate host at once, and the cycle turns only when one animal eats another's muscle. Top left, the rat's panel, and below it the pig's: the domestic cycle. Each has larvae in nurse cells in its muscles. An arrow runs down from the rat to the pig, which eats an infected rat, and another back up, since rats feed on dead pigs; pigs are also infected from raw meat scraps and from eating dead pigs. Top right, the panel of wild boar and bears: the sylvatic cycle. An arrow runs right from the rat: boars and bears eat rats and other animals. From the pig and from the wild animals, arrows run down to the patient's panel along the foot: a person eats undercooked pork or game. In the patient, the larvae become adult worms in the small intestine, which live about 4 weeks. An arrow runs right and down: after about 1 week the females release newborn larvae, which travel in the blood and lymph. An arrow runs left from them to the larvae in nurse cells: they settle in skeletal muscle, are encysted in 1 to 2 months, live for years and then calcify. No arrow leaves the patient.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Every host carries both the adult worms and the larvae, so each is a definitive and an intermediate host; the cycle turns only when one animal eats another's muscle. People are infected from undercooked pork or game, and pass nothing infective on.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; drawn for the genus: T. spiralis keeps mostly to pigs and rats, the other species mostly to wild animals; a rat, a pig, a wild boar and a bear drawn for the many hosts; in each animal only the larvae in muscle drawn, though each carries the adults too; the larvae's moults in the gut, and the mating of the adults, left out; the newborn larvae's way through the blood and lymph drawn as one arrow; wild animals also bring the parasite back to free-range pigs, not drawn.

6 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Trichinellosis. Last reviewed 7 June 2024.
  2. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Trichinosis. MSD Manual Professional Edition, January 2025.
  3. Dubey JP, Thompson PC, Fournet V, Hill DE, and others. Over a century of progress on Trichinella research in pigs at the United States Department of Agriculture: challenges and solutions. Food and Waterborne Parasitology 2024;36:e00239.
  4. Rodriguez-Morales AJ, Shehata AA, Parvin R, Tasnim S, and others. Rodent-borne parasites and human disease: a growing public health concern. Animals 2025;15:2681.
  5. Mitic I, Vasilev S, Gruden-Movsesijan A. Trichinellosis: a zoonosis that still requires vigilance. PLOS Neglected Tropical Diseases 2026;20(1):e0013944.
  6. Wikipedia. Trichinosis.
Hookworms: Ancylostoma duodenale and Necator americanus
The hookworms, drawn as a parasitology textbook draws them. On the left, an Ancylostoma duodenale female and male seen from the side as if cleared, to one scale: each a slender cylinder with its front end bent back into the hook that gives the worm its name, a buccal capsule at the mouth, a short muscular oesophagus widening into a club, and the intestine running to the anus near the tail. The female's two ovaries and uteri coil forward and back from her vulva, which opens behind the middle of her body; her tail is pointed. The male's testis coils in his hind half and leads back to the cloaca, and his tail spreads into the copulatory bursa. At the top, the two species' mouths seen end-on, ventral side down: Ancylostoma's buccal capsule with two pairs of hooked teeth on its ventral rim, and Necator's with a pair of cutting plates on the ventral rim and a pair on the dorsal rim. Beside them the egg: oval, its shell thin and clear, with eight cells inside. In the middle, the male's tail enlarged: the bursa, an umbrella of cuticle held open by its rays, and the two long spicules. Below, the two larvae to one scale: the rhabditiform larva, with a long buccal canal and an oesophagus ending in a bulb, and the longer filariform larva, its oesophagus about half as long as its intestine, its tail pointed, in a loose sheath.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Hookworms are small, about 10 to 15 mm (Ancylostoma) or 9 to 11 mm (Necator) for a female. They hold on to the lining of the small intestine with their buccal capsule and feed on blood. Their eggs hatch in warm, moist soil, and the larvae that grow there go through the skin.

Simplified: the female and the male drawn to one scale, and the two larvae to another; the mouths, the egg and the male's tail enlarged, each by a different amount; the ovaries, uteri and testis drawn as single coiling tubes; the bursa's rays drawn as a simple fan, without their branches; the excretory pore, the nerve ring and the cervical papillae left out; the mouths drawn end-on as rings; Ancylostoma's small pair of teeth, and Necator's small teeth, deep in the capsule left out; the teeth on the worms drawn whole only as two small hooks.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Hookworm (intestinal). Last reviewed 17 September 2019.
  2. Wikipedia. Hookworm; Ancylostoma duodenale; Necator americanus; Nematode.
  3. Liptáková M, Schreiberová A, Cellengová Z, Kožárová V, Štrkolcová G, and others. The canine hookworm Ancylostoma caninum: first confirmed evidence in a dog in Central Europe. Pathogens 2025;14(12):1241.
Hookworms: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the hookworms, Ancylostoma duodenale and Necator americanus. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is the definitive host, and the worms need no other. Low on the left, infective larvae that have gone in through the skin. An arrow climbs from them to the top of the panel: they are carried in the blood vessels to the heart and then the lungs. From the lungs an arrow runs right and down: they break into the air spaces, climb the airways to the pharynx and are swallowed, and in the small intestine they grow into adult worms, attached to the wall and feeding on blood; most are gone in 1 to 2 years. From the adults, eggs are passed in the stool, down the right side onto the white page: thin-shelled eggs, not yet infective. An arrow runs down from them: in warm, moist, shaded soil they hatch in 1 to 2 days into rhabditiform larvae, which grow in the stool and soil. An arrow runs left: after 5 to 10 days they have moulted into filariform larvae, the infective stage, which survive 3 to 4 weeks. From them an arrow climbs the left side back to the larvae in the skin: they go in through the skin, most often of bare feet.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Hookworms need only one host, but their eggs must hatch and the larvae grow infective in the soil. The infective larvae mostly do not wait to be swallowed: they go in through the skin, most often of a bare foot.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the host drawn as an icon and the parasite drawn small, nothing to scale; the two species drawn as one cycle; the larvae of the dog and cat hookworms, most of which wander in the skin but cannot grow up in people, left out; the larvae's way from the skin through the heart to the lungs drawn as one arrow; Ancylostoma duodenale's probable oral and breast-milk routes, and its larvae's rest in the tissues, left out.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Hookworm (intestinal). Last reviewed 17 September 2019.
  2. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Hookworm Infection. MSD Manual Professional Edition, January 2025.
  3. Wikipedia. Ancylostoma duodenale; Necator americanus.
Strongyloides stercoralis
On the left, the adults seen from the side as if cleared, drawn to one scale. The parasitic female, the only adult in the patient, is a long, slender ivory worm: her thread-like coral oesophagus runs a third of her length, then the olive intestine runs to the anus near the tip of her tail. Her vulva opens two-thirds of the way down; from it her two straight pink uteri run forward and back, each holding a single row of eggs, and her thin ovaries bend back toward it on the other side. Beside her, much smaller, the free-living female and male of the soil, each with a short oesophagus ending in a round bulb. The female's vulva opens at her middle, with eggs in the uteri either side, and her tail is pointed. The male has one straight blue testis and two amber spicules in his curved tail. At the top right, the middle of the parasitic female enlarged: the vulva on her belly side, the two uteri with their single row of eggs, the thin ovaries above, bent back toward the vulva. Below it, the front end of a rhabditiform larva enlarged, with its short buccal canal and its oesophagus in three parts ending in the bulb; and the tail of a filariform larva, its tip notched. Along the foot, the larvae to one scale: the rhabditiform larva, its oesophagus a third of its length and a pink genital primordium in its middle; and the filariform larva, twice as long, its oesophagus as long as its intestine, its tail notched.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Strongyloides has two kinds of adult female. In the patient, a parasitic female 2 to 3 mm long lives in the lining of the small intestine and makes eggs without a male; in the soil, free-living females about 1 mm long and slightly smaller males mate. The larvae that pass in the stool are rhabditiform; the infective larvae are filariform, with a notched tail.

Simplified: the adults drawn to one scale but about twice as wide for their length as they are, and the larvae to another; the enlarged parts each by a different amount; the ovaries, uteri and testis drawn as simple tubes; the mouth's lips, the nerve ring and the excretory pore left out; the second-stage larva, and the autoinfective larvae, which look much like the filariform, left out.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Strongyloidiasis. Last reviewed 30 July 2019.
  2. Castelletto ML, Akimori D, Patel R, Schroeder NE, Hallem EA. Introduction to Strongyloides stercoralis anatomy. Journal of Nematology 2024;56(1):20240019.
Strongyloides stercoralis: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of Strongyloides stercoralis. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is the definitive host. Low on the left, filariform larvae that have gone in through the skin. An arrow climbs from them to the top of the panel: they are carried in the blood to the lungs. From the lungs an arrow runs right: they are coughed up and swallowed, and in the small intestine they grow into parasitic females, which live in the wall of the gut and lay eggs without males. An arrow runs down from them: the eggs hatch in the gut into rhabditiform larvae. Most of these pass in the stool, down the right side onto the white page. Some turn infective while still in the gut: an arrow runs left from the rhabditiform larvae to filariform larvae in the middle of the panel, and from those an arrow climbs back to the lungs: autoinfection, through the gut wall or the skin round the anus. On the white page, the soil: from the rhabditiform larvae passed in the stool one arrow runs left and down to infective filariform larvae, and another runs down to free-living adult males and females, which mate; an arrow runs from them to the filariform larvae too, since their young turn infective. From the filariform larvae an arrow climbs the left side back to the larvae in the skin.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Strongyloides is the roundworm that can multiply inside the patient. Its larvae can turn infective while still in the gut and go straight back in, so an infection can last for decades, and in a patient on corticosteroids it can grow into a deadly hyperinfection.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the host drawn as an icon and the parasite drawn small, nothing to scale; the free-living adults drawn as one chip; their eggs, and the larvae they hatch into, left out; Strongyloides fuelleborni left out; the larvae's way to the gut drawn through the lungs, as long taught, though they may also reach it through the tissues of the abdomen; the larvae spread through the body in disseminated infection left out.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Strongyloidiasis. Last reviewed 30 July 2019.
  2. Castelletto ML, Akimori D, Patel R, Schroeder NE, Hallem EA. Introduction to Strongyloides stercoralis anatomy. Journal of Nematology 2024;56(1):20240019.
Dracunculus medinensis, the Guinea worm
The Guinea worm, drawn as a parasitology textbook draws it. On the left, the adults to one scale. The gravid female, about 60 to 120 cm long and 1.5 mm wide, is drawn coiled so that she fits on the page: an even, ivory cylinder, rounded at her head on the outside of the coil and pointed at her tail in its middle, with a pink uterus running almost her whole length. Below the coil, the male, a thin thread of no more than 4 cm. At the top right, the female's front end enlarged and cut off behind: the rounded head, the short coral oesophagus, the thin olive intestine pressed against her back, and the broad pink uterus filling the rest of her body, packed with coiled larvae. Below it, a first-stage larva enlarged, as it is released into the water: a slender body with a plain oesophagus and intestine and a long tail drawn out to a point.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The Guinea worm female is one of the longest roundworms of people, about a metre long, and when she is ready to give birth she is little more than a tube full of larvae. The male is tiny by comparison and dies after mating.

Simplified: the adults drawn to one scale, the female coiled; the front end and the larva each enlarged by a different amount; the gut and uterus drawn as simple tubes and the larvae in the uterus as short threads; the head's papillae, the nerve ring and the male's tail left out; the larva's inner organs drawn simply.

6 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Dracunculiasis. Last reviewed 3 June 2024.
  2. World Health Organization. Dracunculiasis (Guinea-worm disease), fact sheet. 30 January 2025.
  3. Marie C, Petri WA Jr. Dracunculiasis. MSD Manual Professional Edition.
  4. Pellegrino C, Patti G, Camporeale M, Belati A, Novara R, and others. Guinea worm disease: a neglected disease on the verge of eradication. Tropical Medicine and Infectious Disease 2022;7(11):366.
  5. Natalini MB, Notarnicola J, Monje LD, Vallejos AB, Gavier FS, Kowalewski MM, and others. A new Dracunculus species (Nematoda: Dracunculoidea) in neotropical otters (Lontra longicaudis) from Argentina. International Journal for Parasitology: Parasites and Wildlife 2023;22:234.
  6. Wikipedia. Dracunculiasis; Dracunculus medinensis.
Dracunculus medinensis: the life cycle
A map of the life cycle of the Guinea worm. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is the definitive host. On the right, larvae freed in the stomach from a swallowed copepod; they go through the gut wall. An arrow runs left: they grow into adults in the abdomen and mate, and the males die. Another arrow runs left: the gravid female moves under the skin to the leg and comes out 10 to 14 months after infection. From her an arrow runs down out of the panel onto the white page, the water: the blister bursts when the leg is put in water, and she releases her first-stage larvae, which swim in the water. Down again, into the copepod's panel at the lower left: a copepod eats them, and in 2 weeks they grow infective inside it; the copepod is the intermediate host. From the copepod two arrows leave. One climbs back to the larvae in the patient: the patient drinks the copepod in unfiltered water. The other runs right into the panel of the frogs and fish, which eat copepods and carry the infective larvae unchanged, paratenic or transport hosts; from them an arrow climbs back to the patient: eaten raw or undercooked.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

The Guinea worm needs water twice: the female puts her larvae into it, and people drink the copepods that carry them. Filtering or boiling drinking water, and keeping people with an emerging worm out of it, breaks the cycle.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasite drawn small, nothing to scale; dogs and cats, which are definitive hosts too and now carry most infections, left out; one fish drawn for the frogs and fish; the larvae's way from the gut wall to the abdomen, and the female's way under the skin, each drawn as one arrow.

5 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Dracunculiasis. Last reviewed 3 June 2024.
  2. World Health Organization. Dracunculiasis (Guinea-worm disease), fact sheet. 30 January 2025.
  3. Pellegrino C, Patti G, Camporeale M, Belati A, Novara R, and others. Guinea worm disease: a neglected disease on the verge of eradication. Tropical Medicine and Infectious Disease 2022;7(11):366.
  4. Delea MG, Sack A, Eneanya OA, Thiele E, Roy SL, and others. Slaying the serpent: a research agenda to expand intervention development and accelerate Guinea worm eradication efforts. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene 2024;111(3 Suppl):12.
  5. Wikipedia. Dracunculus medinensis.
Microfilariae of Wuchereria, Loa and Onchocerca
Three microfilariae, the young of the filarial worms, drawn to one scale and lying across the page, head to the left, with a few red cells on the right for size. Each is a slender ivory body, blunt at the head and tapering to the tail, about as wide as a red cell and filled with a column of blue nuclei. At the top, Wuchereria bancrofti, 240 to 300 µm long, gently curved, inside a clear sheath; its nuclei are loosely spaced and stop short of the tip of the tail. In the middle, Loa loa, 230 to 250 µm long, also in a sheath; its nuclei run to the very tip of the tail. At the bottom, Onchocerca volvulus, 300 to 315 µm long, with no sheath; its tail is sharply bent and its nuclei stop short of the tip.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Filariae are roundworms passed on by biting insects. Their females give birth to microfilariae, which an insect takes up as it feeds: Wuchereria's and Loa's from the blood, Onchocerca's from the skin. Under the microscope they are told apart by the sheath, the nuclei and the tail.

Simplified: the three microfilariae and the red cells drawn to one scale, at the lengths the CDC gives for stained films (for Onchocerca, from its description of the microfilaria); the adult worms, which are centimetres long, not drawn; the sheath drawn clear and even; the nuclei drawn as round dots in DNA's blue, not in a stain's colours; the microfilariae's few other structures left out.

4 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Lymphatic filariasis.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Loiasis.
  3. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Onchocerciasis.
  4. Wikipedia. Microfilaria; Red blood cell.
Wuchereria, Loa and Onchocerca: the life cycles
A map of the life cycles of the three filariae, one column each, each in its own colour. Across the top, the patient's pale panel: the patient is the definitive host of all three. In each column, the adult worms, and below them an arrow down to the microfilariae the females give birth to. Wuchereria bancrofti's adults live in the lymphatic vessels and its sheathed microfilariae are in the blood, mostly at night. Loa loa's adults live under the skin and may cross the eye; its sheathed microfilariae are in the blood by day. Onchocerca volvulus's adults live in nodules under the skin for about 15 years; its microfilariae, without a sheath, are in the skin. From the microfilariae an arrow crosses down into each column's insect, the vector and intermediate host, in a panel of its own across the foot: mosquitoes of the genera Culex, Anopheles, Aedes and Mansonia for Wuchereria, the deer fly Chrysops for Loa, the black fly Simulium for Onchocerca. The insect takes the microfilariae up as it feeds; they shed their sheath if they have one and go to its thoracic muscles, where they grow into infective third-stage larvae, which move to the proboscis. From the larvae an arrow climbs the right edge of the column back to the adults: at the next bite the larvae go in through the wound and grow into adults.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Each filaria needs its insect as well as a person: the microfilariae grow into infective larvae only inside the insect, and its bite brings them back.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the parasites drawn small, nothing to scale; one Anopheles mosquito drawn for the several kinds of mosquito that carry Wuchereria; the larvae's growth in the insect, through the first and second stages to the third, drawn as one step; Brugia, which also causes lymphatic filariasis, left out.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Lymphatic filariasis.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Loiasis.
  3. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx: Onchocerciasis.
Anopheles and Culex compared
Two columns, Anopheles on the left and Culex on the right, and down the page the same stages of each. The eggs on the water, seen from above: Anopheles's lie apart, each a dark boat-shaped egg with a pale ribbed float along either side; Culex's stand on end, stuck together in a dark, boat-shaped raft. The larva in the water, seen from the side: the Anopheles larva lies level just under the surface, its back along it, breathing through a small plate of spiracles on its back near the tail; the Culex larva hangs head down at an angle from the surface by a long breathing tube, the siphon, near its tail. The pupa: in both a comma, a large rounded head and thorax with a curled abdomen, hanging from the surface by two small breathing trumpets. The female at rest on a surface, seen from the side: Anopheles tilts up at an angle, her proboscis, head and body in one straight line, her wings, in most species, spotted with dark scales; Culex holds her body level with the surface and her head bent down, her wings clear. At the bottom, each female's head enlarged: Anopheles's palps are as long as her proboscis, Culex's are short.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Anopheles carries malaria, and filariae in the countryside; Culex carries filariae in towns and viruses such as West Nile. They are told apart at every stage: the eggs laid one by one with floats, or in a raft; the larva lying level without a siphon, or hanging from one; the female resting tilted with long palps and usually spotted wings, or level with short palps and clear wings.

Simplified: each row drawn to its own scale, the two genera in a row to the same one, except the Culex raft, drawn smaller than the Anopheles eggs beside it; the eggs seen from above, the rest from the side; the bodies drawn simply in one muted colour, without their scales and most of their hairs; the larvae's mouth brushes and tufts of hairs drawn as a few lines, and the larva's head turned for feeding at the surface not shown; only the female's legs on the near side drawn, and the antennae left off the enlarged heads; the two pupae, which look much alike, drawn the same.

3 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Life cycle of Anopheles mosquitoes. 14 May 2024.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. About Culex mosquitoes.
  3. Wikipedia. Anopheles; Culex; Mosquito.
The sand fly Phlebotomus papatasi
The female sand fly at rest on a surface, seen from the side, and below her on damp ground among fallen leaves her eggs, a larva and a pupa. She is small and pale, her body, legs and wings covered in short hairs. Her head is held low in front of a humped thorax, mostly taken up by a large dark eye; from it a long, slender antenna of many cylindrical segments curves forward and down, and below it hang a short proboscis and a longer palp that curls back under the head. Her lance-shaped wings are raised over her body at about 40 degrees, not folded flat. She stands high on six long, thin legs. The eggs are small dark ovals lying together on the ground. The larva is a slender grub with a black head, a pale body of twelve segments each carrying a feathery bristle, and two pairs of long hairs at its tail. The pupa stands upright, head up, its tail still in the crumpled last larval skin, from which the long tail hairs stick out.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Sand flies carry Leishmania and the sand fly fever viruses. A female is only 1.5 to 3.5 mm long and hairy, with large black eyes and long legs, and rests with her wings raised over her body. Her young stages live on damp ground, never in water.

Simplified: the female and her young stages each drawn to their own scale; the body drawn simply in one muted colour, its covering of hairs shown as a few short lines; only the legs on the near side drawn; the antenna's segments and the wing's veins simplified.

3 sources
  1. European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control. Phlebotomine sand flies: factsheet for experts.
  2. Wikipedia. Phlebotomus; Phlebotomus papatasi.
  3. Galati EAB, Galvis-Ovallos F, Lawyer P, Léger N, Depaquit J. An illustrated guide for characters and terminology used in descriptions of Phlebotominae (Diptera, Psychodidae). Parasite 2017;24:26.
Lice, the bed bug and the flea
Four insects that feed on our blood, drawn at one scale with a one-millimetre bar. Top left, the head or body louse from above: long and narrow, a small head with short antennae, a thorax, and a long abdomen with lobed sides and a row of spiracles down each side; its six short, stout legs each end in a curved claw that closes against a thumb-like spur. Beside it, a nit, the louse's egg, an oval cemented to a hair by a sheath of cement, its capped end away from the scalp below. Top right, the crab louse from above, much smaller: a broad, short body nearly as wide as it is long, slender first legs and thick second and third legs ending in huge claws, so it looks like a tiny crab. Bottom left, the bed bug from above, the largest: a flat oval with a small head, bulging eyes and long antennae, a broad thorax hollowed round the head, two small dark pads where its wings would be, and a broad, round, segmented abdomen. Bottom right, the human flea from the side, flattened from side to side: a small head with a rounded front, an eye and no combs, the body covered in plates with backward bristles, and long, thick hind legs folded under it, ready to jump.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

All four suck blood, and their bites itch. The lice and the bed bug grow up through nymphs that look like small adults; the flea goes through a larva and a pupa. The body louse carries epidemic typhus, trench fever and relapsing fever; the bed bug carries no known infection, and the human flea is a poor vector.

Simplified: all drawn at one scale, the nit too; the lice and the bed bug from above, the flea from the side; the female louse drawn; the bodies drawn simply in one muted colour, with few of their hairs and bristles; the legs' segments and the antennae's simplified.

5 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Pediculosis. Last reviewed 6 June 2024.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. About head lice; About body lice.
  3. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Pthiriasis. Last reviewed 6 June 2024.
  4. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Bed bugs. Last reviewed 3 June 2024.
  5. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Fleas. Last reviewed 8 December 2017.
Hard and soft ticks
Ticks drawn from above at one scale, with a one-millimetre bar. Across the top, the castor bean tick Ixodes ricinus, a hard tick, at each stage. First the larva, about 1 mm long, a tiny oval with only six legs; then the nymph, a little larger, with eight; then the unfed female, 3 to 3.6 mm long, a flat pear-shaped body with a dark shield covering only its front part, long mouthparts pointing forward ahead of it, a palp either side of the toothed hypostome, and eight jointed legs, the first pair reaching forward; then the male, a little smaller, whose dark shield covers nearly his whole back. Below them the same female after her blood meal: a smooth, swollen bean about 10 mm long, three times her unfed length, with her small shield, mouthparts and legs no bigger than before, clustered at its front. On the right, the soft tick Ornithodoros moubata, about 10 mm long: a broad, flat oval with a leathery, wrinkled back covered in small nodules, no shield, and no mouthparts to be seen from above, because they are on its underside; only the ends of its legs show from under its front half.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Ticks are arachnids, not insects: their larvae have six legs, their nymphs and adults eight, and they have no antennae and no wings. A hard tick has a shield on its back and mouthparts pointing forward, and feeds for days; a soft tick has no shield and its mouthparts are hidden underneath, and it feeds in about an hour.

Simplified: every tick drawn to one scale; the larva's and nymph's size is a typical one, and the fed female is shown at the small end of her range; the bodies drawn in one muted colour, without the hairs, the grooves on the underside or the spiracles; the legs drawn as plain jointed lines, their many segments and Haller's organ not shown; the soft tick's nodules evened out.

5 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Ticks. Last reviewed 31 December 2017.
  2. European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control. Ixodes ricinus, factsheet for experts.
  3. Szalata M, Wielgus K, Danielewski M, et al. Ticks: biology, habitat, threats and protection methods. Biology (Basel). 2026;15(6):497.
  4. Wikipedia. Ixodes ricinus.
  5. Wikipedia. Ornithodoros moubata.
The itch mite and its burrow
Top left, the female itch mite Sarcoptes scabiei from above, greatly enlarged: a round, eyeless body like a tiny tortoise, crossed by fine folds, with a field of small backward-pointing spines on its back and a few stout spines behind them. Short mouthparts project at the front. Her two front pairs of legs are short and stubby and point forward, each ending in a long stalk with a small sucker at its tip; her two hind pairs lie under her body, and only the long bristles they end in show behind her. Top right, at the same scale, the follicle mite Demodex folliculorum lying across the page, mouthparts to the left: long and slender like a tiny worm, with short mouthparts, four pairs of stubby legs close together near its front, and a long ringed body. Below, at a far lower magnification, a section of the skin: the pale, layered stratum corneum on top, the living epidermis below it, and the dermis fading out beneath. A burrow opens at the surface on the left, dips into the stratum corneum and runs to the right through it, never reaching the living cells. The female lies at its far end, head on. Behind her, a row of oval eggs runs back along the burrow, the oldest near the entrance already hatched and left as empty shells, with dark faecal pellets between them. On the right, a small six-legged larva sits in a short pouch near the surface.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Scabies is caused by the itch mite; the fertilised female digs a burrow in the dead outer layer of the skin and lays her eggs in it for the rest of her life. The itch is an allergic reaction to the mites, their eggs and their faeces. Demodex lives harmlessly in the hair follicles of the face and is not a cause of scabies.

Simplified: the two mites drawn to one scale and greatly enlarged; the skin and its burrow at a far lower magnification, the burrow short and straight where a real one is longer and winding, and the stratum corneum drawn thick; the female in her burrow drawn from above, inside a side view of the skin; the mites drawn in one muted colour, their spines and folds fewer than they are, the hind legs' bristles and the suckers' stalks simplified; the layers of the epidermis between the stratum corneum and the dermis drawn as one.

2 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Scabies. Last reviewed 6 June 2024.
  2. Wikipedia. Sarcoptes scabiei.
Ixodes ricinus: the life cycle
A map of the three-host life cycle of Ixodes ricinus, the castor bean tick, which runs clockwise round the page. Top left, a pale panel for mice and shrews, its first hosts: the six-legged larva feeds for 3 to 5 days, then drops off. On the ground, the white page between the panels, it moults into a nymph, which climbs low plants and waits, questing. Top right, a panel for birds, hares and hedgehogs, its second hosts: the nymph feeds for days, drops off and moults on the ground into an adult, which quests again. Bottom right, a panel for sheep, deer, cattle and dogs, its third hosts: the female feeds for 6 to 13 days and mates, drops off, lays up to 2000 eggs in the leaf litter and dies. Larvae hatch about 8 weeks later and wait near the ground for a first host. In the middle, the patient's panel: a questing nymph or adult may feed on a person instead, an incidental host, and may pass on Borrelia or the tick-borne encephalitis virus.

Point at a name to light its pathway.

Ixodes ricinus feeds once in each stage, each time on a new host, and drops off between them: the larva on a small mammal or a bird, the nymph on a bird or a small or medium mammal, the adult on a large mammal. Between meals it moults on the ground and waits on low plants for the next host to brush past. Mice and birds keep Borrelia going; deer feed the adults but do not infect the ticks. A person is an incidental host, bitten most often by a nymph.

Simplified: a map, not anatomy: the hosts drawn as icons and the ticks drawn small, nothing to scale; each stage feeds on many kinds of animal and the panels name the usual ones; birds, for one, feed larvae as well as nymphs; the other infections the tick passes on, such as anaplasmosis, babesiosis and tularaemia, left out.

5 sources
  1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Ticks. Last reviewed 31 December 2017.
  2. European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control. Ixodes ricinus, factsheet for experts.
  3. Wikipedia. Ixodes ricinus.
  4. Wikipedia. Lyme disease.
  5. Szalata M, Wielgus K, Danielewski M, et al. Ticks: biology, habitat, threats and protection methods. Biology (Basel). 2026;15(6):497.
How insects grow
Insects drawn at one scale, with a one-millimetre bar. Across the top, complete metamorphosis in the housefly, Musca domestica. First a small batch of white eggs, each about 1.2 mm long and slightly curved; then the larva, the maggot, drawn from the side: a pale, legless, cream-coloured grub 8 to 12 mm long, tapering to a point at its head end, where its dark mouth hooks show, and broad and blunt behind, where a dark spiracle lets it breathe; then the pupa, a smooth reddish-brown case about 8 mm long with rounded ends, made from the last larval skin. In the middle, the adult fly from above, 6 to 7 mm long: a broad head with two large dark compound eyes at its sides and short antennae between them; a grey thorax with four dark stripes running down it and rows of short bristles; one pair of clear, veined wings held apart in a V over the abdomen, the fourth vein bending forward near the tip; behind each wing a tiny knobbed haltere; three pairs of jointed legs, each ending in small pads; and an oval, hairy abdomen. Along the bottom, incomplete metamorphosis in the bed bug, Cimex lectularius: a few vase-shaped eggs under 1 mm long with a cap at one end; a nymph, a smaller, paler copy of the adult without its wing pads; and the adult, about 5 mm long, a flat reddish-brown oval with two small wing pads behind its thorax.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Insects grow in one of two ways. The housefly goes through complete metamorphosis: its larva, a maggot, looks nothing like the adult, lives and feeds somewhere else, and rebuilds itself into the adult inside a pupa. The bed bug goes through incomplete metamorphosis: its nymphs look like small adults and feed like them, and grow up through a series of moults without a pupa.

Simplified: every form drawn to one scale; the larva shown fully grown, before it pupates; the bodies drawn in one muted colour; the hairs, the bristles and the wing veins fewer than in life, the legs plain jointed lines, the mouthparts not shown, and the calypters that hide the halteres left out; one nymph drawn for the bed bug's five, at a size between the newly hatched nymph and the adult.

5 sources
  1. Wikipedia. Housefly.
  2. Ardburai W, Thongphak D, Tangkawanit U. Control efficacy of Bidens pilosa L. extract against immature stages of Musca domestica L. (Diptera: Muscidae): laboratory and semi-field evaluations. PeerJ. 2026;14:e21544.
  3. Sakulpanich A, Attrapadung S, Gritsanapan W. Larvicidal activity of Stemona collinsiae root extract against Musca domestica and Chrysomya megacephala. Sci Rep. 2023;13:15689.
  4. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. DPDx, Bed bugs. Last reviewed 3 June 2024.
  5. Wikipedia. Cimex lectularius.
Two cnidarians: Hydra and Obelia
On the left, the freshwater polyp Hydra, cut lengthwise: a tube about 10 mm long, standing on its basal disc, with a ring of hollow tentacles round a domed hypostome at the top, where the mouth opens. Its wall has two cell layers, a blue outer epidermis (ectoderm) and a yellow inner gastrodermis (endoderm), with a thin lilac jelly, the mesoglea, between them; inside is one pale cavity, the gastrovascular cavity, which runs on into the tentacles and into a bud growing from the side, a small Hydra with tentacles of its own. Two small cones high on the column are testes, and a rounder swelling lower down is an ovary holding an egg. Small bumps along the tentacles are batteries of stinging cells; a ring on one tentacle leads to an inset that enlarges two of them, one loaded, its capsule closed by a lid with a coiled thread inside and a trigger hair beside it, and one fired, its lid open and its thread shot out with barbs at its base. On the right, a branch of an Obelia colony, rising from a creeping root: a stem with clear cups on ringed stalks, each holding a feeding polyp with a crown of tentacles; low down, a taller vase-shaped cup holding a reproductive polyp, its stalk budding young medusae. Beside it, a free Obelia medusa, a small flat bell of jelly fringed with short tentacles, with four canals running from its middle to the rim, a round gonad on each, and the manubrium with the mouth hanging from the centre.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Cnidarians have two cell layers, the ectoderm and the endoderm, with the jelly-like mesoglea between them, one gut cavity with a single opening, a nerve net and stinging cells, and they are radially symmetrical. Hydra lives only as a polyp and buds; Obelia alternates between a colony of polyps, which bud off medusae, and the medusae, which reproduce sexually.

Simplified: each form drawn at its own scale: Hydra and the Obelia polyps far larger than the medusa beside them, and the stinging cells enlarged in the inset; Hydra drawn with two tentacles cut through and two behind, shorter than they stretch, and its cell layers thicker than they are; the nerve net and the cell types within each layer left out; testes and an ovary drawn on one animal, as in hermaphrodite species; in others the sexes are separate; the stinging cells drawn simply, as one kind; Hydra has several; a short branch of the colony with four feeding polyps and one reproductive polyp; the root that creeps over the rock drawn short; the medusa drawn from the side, its tentacles fewer and stiffer than they are, the oral arms of the mouth as small lips and the rudimentary velum left out.

6 sources
  1. Wikipedia. Hydra (genus).
  2. Wikipedia. Cnidocyte.
  3. Wikipedia. Mesoglea.
  4. Fox R. Invertebrate Anatomy OnLine, Obelia. Lander University, 2006.
  5. Cowles D. Obelia dichotoma, medusa form. Invertebrates of the Salish Sea, Walla Walla University, 2017.
  6. Wikipedia. Obelia.
Body plans: germ layers and body cavities
Four animals cut across, side by side, each with its germ layers coloured: ectoderm blue, mesoderm red, endoderm yellow. First a cnidarian: a ring of ectoderm outside, a ring of endoderm inside, a thin lilac jelly, the mesoglea, between them, and one gut cavity in the middle. Second a flatworm, flattened top to bottom: ectoderm outside, a small gut lined by endoderm, and the whole space between them filled solid with red mesodermal tissue, so it has no body cavity. Third a roundworm: ectoderm outside, a ring of mesoderm under it, then a fluid-filled cavity, and the gut, lined only by endoderm, lying free in the middle: the cavity has mesoderm on its outer side only. Fourth an annelid: ectoderm outside, a ring of mesoderm under it, a fluid-filled cavity, and the gut in the middle wrapped in its own layer of mesoderm and hung from above and below by thin mesodermal sheets: the cavity is lined by mesoderm on both sides.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Cnidarians have two germ layers (diploblastic); all the other animals here have three (triploblastic), the mesoderm between ectoderm and endoderm. Flatworms fill the space between body wall and gut with solid tissue (acoelomate); roundworms have a body cavity lined by mesoderm only on its outer side (a pseudocoelom); annelids, like us, have a coelom lined by mesoderm all round, in which the gut is hung.

Simplified: each animal reduced to its germ layers in a round section: the organs, muscles, nerves and vessels of each left out, and the layers drawn as even rings; the three kinds of body cavity are a handy way to compare body plans, not a family tree: the coelom was lost again in several lines of animals.

4 sources
  1. Wikipedia. Coelom.
  2. Wikipedia. Diploblasty.
  3. Wikipedia. Intraembryonic coelom.
  4. Wikipedia. Mesoglea.
Two annelids: the earthworm and the medicinal leech
Across the top, the earthworm Lumbricus terrestris seen from its left side, head to the left: a long, ringed, rosy brown tube, a small lobe over the mouth at the front, a smooth, swollen band about a quarter of the way back, and tiny bristles on the lower half of each ring. A circle on the body behind the band leads to a large cross-section below it on the left, coloured by germ layer: a thin blue skin outside, a pale red ring of circular muscle, a thicker red ring of longitudinal muscle in bundles, then a wide pale cavity, the coelom. In the middle hangs the yellow gut, its roof folded down into the lumen, wrapped in a beaded amber layer; a red vessel lies above it and another below, and under them a lilac double nerve cord on the floor. A green coiled tube lies on each side, its duct running out through the wall, and four pairs of brown bristles stand out through the skin. On the right, the medicinal leech Hirudo medicinalis from above: an olive green, finely ringed body, narrow in front and broad behind, with four thin orange stripes down its back, five pairs of tiny dark eyes at the front and a round sucker showing beyond its tail. A circle at its head leads to an inset of the front sucker opened from below, with three toothed jaws set in a Y round the mouth.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Annelids are segmented worms with a true coelom, lined all round by mesoderm, and a closed blood system. The earthworm moves by waves of its circular and longitudinal muscles against the fluid in its coelom, anchored by its chaetae; the leech has lost its chaetae and most of its coelom, and holds on with a sucker at each end.

Simplified: the earthworm, its section and the leech each drawn at their own scale; fewer segments drawn than the 120 to 170 of a real earthworm, only the chaetae of the near side, and none under the clitellum; the section a diagram: its layers drawn as even rings, each nephridium as a few loops of its tubule, and the septa, the dermis and the hearts left out; the leech's rings drawn evenly along its body, and its colour pattern simplified to four stripes.

5 sources
  1. Fox R. Invertebrate Anatomy OnLine, Lumbricus terrestris. Lander University, 2007.
  2. Wikipedia. Lumbricus terrestris; Earthworm.
  3. Wikipedia. Hirudo medicinalis; Leech.
  4. Wang H, Meng FM, Jin SJ, Gao JW, Tong XR, Liu ZC. A new species of medicinal leech in the genus Hirudo Linnaeus, 1758 (Hirudiniformes, Hirudinidae) from Tianjin City, China. ZooKeys. 2022;1095:83-96.
  5. Lemke S, Vilcinskas A. European medicinal leeches, new roles in modern medicine. Biomedicines. 2020;8(5):99.
Arachnids and a copepod: two spiders, a scorpion and Cyclops
Four arthropods seen from above. Top left, the Mediterranean black widow Latrodectus tredecimguttatus, a female: a small black front body with eight tiny eyes in two rows at its front, joined by a narrow waist to a big round glossy black abdomen with thirteen red spots on its back, and eight long black legs, the front pair longest. Beside her, at the same scale, the Mediterranean recluse Loxosceles rufescens: a flat light brown front body with a dark brown violin on it, the violin's body round six eyes in three pairs and its neck pointing back, an oval brown abdomen, and eight long, thin, pale brown legs. On the right, the common yellow scorpion Buthus occitanus, smaller in the drawing than it is: a straw yellow front body with two eyes on a ridge in the middle and a few at each front corner, a pair of long pincers reaching forward, eight legs, a broad back of seven overlapping plates, and a narrow tail of five segments laid out straight behind, ending in a bulb and a curved sting. Bottom left, much enlarged, in a pale wash of water, a female Cyclops facing left: a pale, teardrop-shaped front body in segments with a single red eye at its front, two long antennae swept back along its sides, a narrow hind body ending in a fork of bristles, and two oval egg sacs full of eggs either side of it.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Arthropods have jointed legs and an exoskeleton of chitin that they moult to grow. Arachnids have two body parts, the prosoma and the opisthosoma, 4 pairs of legs and no antennae; their first appendages, the chelicerae, are their mouthparts. Crustaceans such as Cyclops have two pairs of antennae and mostly live in water.

Simplified: the spiders drawn to one scale, the scorpion smaller and Cyclops far larger than they are beside them; the spiders' legs drawn flat, as if pressed down, without their hairs and claws, and the widow's eyes as two even rows of four; the scorpion's tail laid straight out behind it, its pincers and legs simplified and only a few of its lateral eyes drawn; Cyclops's swimming legs only hinted at its sides, and its antennae drawn smooth, without their segments.

5 sources
  1. Wikipedia. Arachnid; Spider.
  2. Wikipedia. Latrodectus tredecimguttatus.
  3. Wikipedia. Recluse spider.
  4. Wikipedia. Scorpion; Buthus occitanus; Buthus.
  5. Wikipedia. Cyclops (copepod); Copepod; Crustacean.
A knuckle joint, healthy and in rheumatoid arthritis
Two knuckle joints, metacarpophalangeal joints, cut lengthwise and drawn side by side on a white plate, the metacarpal above and the finger's first phalanx below. Each bone is ivory, with cream marrow crossed by struts of spongy bone. On the left, the healthy joint: the rounded head of the metacarpal and the shallow cup of the phalanx are each capped by a smooth pale blue layer of cartilage, kept apart by a thin film of pale straw synovial fluid, and enclosed on both sides by a pearl-coloured capsule lined by a thin, pale coral synovium. On the right, the same joint in rheumatoid arthritis: the synovium is deep coral, thick and folded into fronds, with pale blue white cells in it; the capsule bulges outwards round a larger pool of fluid holding neutrophils; deep coral tissue, the pannus, has crept from the joint's edges over the cartilage, which is thinner, so the bones lie closer; and at the edges of each bone, where the synovium meets bone not covered by cartilage, the bone is eaten away in pits filled with synovium, large cells with several nuclei, osteoclasts, lying in them.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

Rheumatoid arthritis is a disease of the synovium. The inflamed synovium thickens and fills with immune cells, fluid gathers in the joint, and the synovium grows over the cartilage as pannus and into the bone at the joint's edges. MRI shows the bone damage in the first 3–6 months, which is why disease-modifying drugs should be started within 3 months of onset.

Simplified: not to scale: the cartilage, the synovium, the gap between the bones and the fluid round them drawn thicker than life, and the cells far larger; the bone ends drawn as a smooth rounded head and a shallow cup, simpler than the real metacarpal head and base of the phalanx; the collateral ligaments, the tendons that cross the joint, the volar plate, the periosteum and the new blood vessels of the synovitis left out; a handful of cells for the many in a real synovium, and the lymphocytes, macrophages, plasma cells and neutrophils drawn as simple cells; the fibroblast-like synoviocytes of the lining not drawn one by one; changes that take months to years, and differ from joint to joint, all drawn in one joint at once; the spongy bone drawn as a few struts.

2 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 18, Rheumatology: synovial joints (p. 415) and rheumatoid arthritis (pp. 438–445); Chapter 19, Bone disease: osteoclasts (p. 474).
  2. Schett G, Gravallese E. Bone erosion in rheumatoid arthritis: mechanisms, diagnosis and treatment. Nat Rev Rheumatol. 2012;8(11):656-64.
Which hand joints rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis take
A right hand seen from the back, drawn twice side by side on a white plate: a soft, sand-coloured hand with pale nails, its bones showing through in ivory, from the ends of the radius and ulna, which fade out at the bottom, through the carpal bones of the wrist and the five metacarpals to the bones of the thumb and fingers. On the left, the hand in rheumatoid arthritis: see-through coral swellings, the colour of inflamed synovium, lie over the wrist's joints, over the knuckles (MCP joints) of all five digits and over the middle joints of the four fingers and the thumb's interphalangeal joint, and the skin bulges over them; the joints nearest the fingertips have none. On the right, the hand in nodal osteoarthritis: no soft swelling, but lips of new bone grown out from the edges of the joints nearest the fingertips of all four fingers and of the middle joints of the index and middle fingers, those joints' spaces narrowed and the skin knobbly over them; at the base of the thumb, the metacarpal has slipped partly off the trapezium and carries a lip of new bone, and the thumb is drawn in towards the index finger, narrowing the web between them.

Point at a name or a part to light it.

The joints a disease takes help tell it apart. Rheumatoid arthritis swells the wrists, the knuckles (MCP joints) and the fingers' middle joints (PIP joints) of both hands alike, and usually spares the joints nearest the fingertips (DIP joints). Nodal osteoarthritis takes the DIP joints most, the PIP joints less often and the base of the thumb, and leaves hard bony nodes rather than soft swelling.

Simplified: the bones drawn in simplified outlines after an anatomy atlas, without their ridges and grooves; one hand drawn for each disease; rheumatoid arthritis takes both hands alike; each disease's typical pattern drawn whole: a patient may have only some of these joints taken; the swelling of rheumatoid arthritis drawn as a see-through coral sac over each joint, standing for the swollen synovium and capsule, and over the wrist as one swelling across its joints and tendon sheaths; the nodes of osteoarthritis drawn as smooth lips of new bone either side of each finger joint and on the metacarpal at the thumb's base; in life they are lumpier; the erosions rheumatoid arthritis makes in the bones, the deformities either disease brings in time other than the squared thumb, osteoarthritis of the knuckles (its least common site in the hand), the tendons, muscles and other soft tissues under the skin, the sesamoid bones and the joints of the feet left out.

6 sources
  1. Kumar and Clark's Clinical Medicine, 10th edition. Elsevier, 2021. Chapter 18, Rheumatology: the hand (p. 421), nodal osteoarthritis (p. 435) and rheumatoid arthritis (pp. 439–442).
  2. Zhang W, Doherty M, Leeb BF et al. EULAR evidence-based recommendations for the diagnosis of hand osteoarthritis: report of a task force of ESCISIT. Ann Rheum Dis. 2009;68(1):8-17.
  3. Aletaha D et al. 2010 Rheumatoid arthritis classification criteria: an American College of Rheumatology/European League Against Rheumatism collaborative initiative. Arthritis Rheum. 2010;62(9):2569-81.
  4. Jordaan P, Kruger N, McGuire D. Thumb base/carpo-metacarpal joint osteoarthritis. In: Held M, ed. Orthopaedics for Primary Health Care. University of Cape Town Libraries, 2021. CC BY 4.0.
  5. Adams JE, O'Brien V, Magnusson E, Rosenstein B, Nuckley DJ. Radiographic analysis of simulated first dorsal interosseous and opponens pollicis loading upon thumb CMC joint subluxation: a cadaver study. Hand (N Y). 2018;13(1):40-44.
  6. Gray H. Anatomy of the Human Body, 20th edition, ed. Lewis WH. Lea & Febiger, 1918. Figure 219, the bones of the left hand, volar surface.